Nokia 5800 XpressMusic User Manual
Nokia 5800 XpressMusic User Guide Issue 2
DECLARATIO N OF CONFORMI TY Hereby, NOKIA CORPOR ATION declares that this R M-356 product is in compliance with the essential requirements and ot her relevant provisions of Directive 1999/ 5/EC. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can b e found at http://www. nokia.com/phones/ declaration_of_conformity/. é 2008 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia, Nokia Connecting Peop le, Nokia Care, and XpressMusic are trad emarks o r registered trademarks of Nokia Corpor ation. Nokia tune is a sound mark of Nokia Corporation. Other product and company names mentioned herein ma y be trademarks or tradenam es of their respective owners. Reproduction, transfer, di stribution , or storage of par t or all of the contents in this document in any form without t he prior written permission of Nokia is prohibited . This product inclu des software licensed fro m Symbian Software Ltd é1998-2008. Symb ian and Symbi an OS are trademarks of Symbian Ltd . This software is based in part of the work of the FreeType Team. This product is covered by one or more of the following patent s: United States Paten t 5,155,805, United States Patent 5,325,4 79, United States Patent 5,1 59,668, United States Pa tent 2232861 and France Pa tent 9005712. US Patent No 5818437 and other pending pa tents. T9 text input software Copy right é 1997-2008. Tegic Communica tions, Inc. All ri ghts reserved. Java and all Java-based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. Portions of the Nokia Maps softwar e are é1996-2008 The FreeType Project. All rights reserved. This product is licensed under the MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio License (i) for personal and nonco mmercial use in conne ction with information which has been encoded in compli ance with the MPEG-4 Visual Standard by a cons umer engaged in a personal and no ncommercial activity and (ii) f or use in connection with MPEG-4 video provided by a licensed video provider. No licens e is granted or shall be implied fo r any other use. Additional informatio n, including that related to promotional, internal, and commercial uses, ma y be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. See http: //www.mpegla.com . Nokia operates a policy of ongoing d evelopment. Nokia res erves the right to ma ke changes and improv ements to any of the product s described in thi s document without prior notice. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERM ITTED BY APPL ICABLE LAW, UNDER NO CI RCUMSTANCES SHALL NOK IA OR ANY OF ITS LICENSOR S BE RESPONSIBLE FO R AN Y LOSS OF DAT A OR INCOME OR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUE NTIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES HOWSOEVER CAUSED.
THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT AR E PROVIDED "AS IS". EXCEPT AS RE Q U I RE D B Y A P PL I C A B L E L A W , N O W A RR A N T I E S OF A N Y K I N D, E I T H E R E X P RESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITE D TO, THE IMP LIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT ABILITY AND FITNE SS FOR A PARTICULA R PURPOSE, A RE MADE IN RELATI ON TO THE ACCURACY, RELIABILITY OR CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT . NOKIA RE SERVES THE RIGHT TO REVISE THIS DOCU MENT OR WITHDRA W IT AT ANY TIM E WITHOUT PRIO R NOTICE. Reverse engineering of any software in the No kia device is prohibited to the extent permitt ed by applicable l aw. Insofar as thi s user guide contains an y limitations on Nokia's represen tations, warrantie s, damages and liabilities, such limitations shall likewise limit an y representations, wa rran ties, dama ges and liabilities of Nokia's licensors. The third-party applications provided wit h your device may have been created and may be owned by persons or entiti es not affili ated with or related to Nok ia. Nokia does not own the copyrights or intellectual property rights to the third-party a pplications. As such, Nok ia does not take any r es ponsibility for end-us er support, functionality of the applications, or the information in the a pplications or these materia ls. Nokia does n ot provide an y warran ty for the third-party applications. BY USING THE APPL ICATIONS YOU ACKNOW LEDGE THAT THE A PPLICATIONS ARE PROV IDED AS IS WITHOUT WARR ANTY OF ANY KIN D, EXPRESS OR IMPL IE D, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED B Y APPLICABLE LAW. YOU FU RTHER ACKNOWLEDGE THAT NEITHER NOKIA NOR ITS A FFILIATES MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS O R W ARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, IN CLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES O F TITLE, MERCH ANTABILITY OR FI TNESS FOR A PARTIC ULAR PURPOSE, OR THAT THE APP LICATIONS WILL NOT INFR INGE ANY THIRD-PARTY PATENTS, COPYRIGH TS, TRADEMARKS, OR OTHER RIGHTS. The availability of part icular products an d applications and services for these products may vary by region. Please check with your Nokia dealer for details, and availabili ty of language option s. Export controls This device may contain commod ities, technology or software subject to export laws and regulations from the US and ot her countr ies. Diversion contr ary to law is prohibited. FCC/INDUSTRY CA NADA NOTICE Your device may cause TV or radio interferen ce (for example, when usin g a telephone in clos e proximity to receiving equipment). The FCC or Indu stry Canada can require you to stop using your telephone if such inter ference cannot be elimina ted. If you require assistance, contact your local service facility. Th is device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the follo wing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this dev ice must accept any interference received, includi ng interference that may cause und esired operation. Any changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by Nokia co uld void the user's authority to operate this equipment. Model number: 5800d-1 /Issue 2 EN
Contents Safety................. .................. .............. ............... .10 About your device............... ........................ .......................... ...10 Network services.................................................... .................11 1. Get started........................... ........................... 12 Keys and parts........ ......................... ................................. ........12 Insert the SIM card...................... ....................... ......................13 Insert battery ..........................................................................13 Charge the battery..... .............................. ................................14 Switch the device on...............................................................15 Stylus.............. ..................... ....................... ..................... ..........15 Lock the keys and touch screen.................... ............... ..........15 Home screen............................ ....................... ...................... ...15 Access the menu......................................................................16 Touch screen actions................. ....................................... .......16 Media key............ ................... .................... ...................... .........17 Change the ringing t one.........................................................18 Nokia support................................................ ..........................18 2. Find help....................... ...................... ............18 In-device help................................... ............................ ...........18 Extended user guide............ ................... ..................... ............18 Software updates............................................... .....................19 Settings........ .............................. ........................... ....................19 Access codes............................ .......................................... .......19 Prolong battery life................................... ........................ ......20 Free memory.......................................................... ..................21 3. Your device..................................................... 21 Welcome.................................. ................................. ................21 Transfer content.......................................................... ............21 Display indicators.............................................................. ......22 Memory card.................................... ......................... ...............23 Insert the memory card.............................. ............... ..........23 Remove the memory card......... ......................... ..................24 Volume and loudspeaker control........................ ...................24 Shortcuts............................................. .....................................2 5 Antenna locations. ......................... ....................... ...................25 Contacts bar.......................................... ...................................2 5 Offline prof ile...........................................................................26 Sensor settings and display rotat ion.....................................26 Headset............................ ................................... ......................27 Remove the SIM card.................................. .............................27 Attach a wrist strap.................................................................28 Remote lock.......................... ...................... ......................... ....28 4. Make calls................................... ....................29 Proximity sensor..................... .......................................... .......28 Voice calls ........................... .....................................................28 During a call...................................................................... .......29 Voice mailbox ..... ......................... ....................... .....................30 Answer or reject a call....................... ................................... ...30 Make a conference call............................................................30 Speed dial a phone number ................... ............. ................ ..30 Call waiting.... ..................... ................... ...................... .............31 Voice dialling.... .......................... ........................ ..................... .31 Make a video call.... .................. .................. ....................... .......32 During a video call..... ..............................................................32
Answer or reject a video call................................. .............. ...33 Video sharing...........................................................................33 Video sharing requiremen ts................................................33 Settings....................... ...................................................... .....34 Share live video or video clips.............................................34 Accept an invitation. ...................... ........................ ...............35 Log .......... ................... ................... ................... .................. .......35 Recent calls..................... ................................................ .......35 Recent calls toolbar....................................... .......................35 Call duration..........................................................................36 Packet data.... ......................................... ...............................36 Monitor all communication events................ ............... ......36 5. Write text....................... ......................... .......36 On-screen keyboard.......................... ................. ............... ......37 Handwriting.............................................................................37 Alphanumeric keypad......................................... ................... .38 Icons and functions........................................ ......................38 Traditional text inp ut...........................................................39 Predictive text input...................... .......................................39 Switch between text modes................................................39 Touch input settings....................................... ..................... ...39 6. Contacts (phonebook)......................... ...........40 Save and edit names and numbers............... ........ ........ ........40 Contacts toolbar.......... ........................ ...................... ...............40 Manage names and numbers.................................................40 Default numbers and address es........ .......... ........ ........ ..........41 Ring ing t ones , imag es an d cal l tex t fo r con tacts .................41 Copy contacts...........................................................................41 SIM services..............................................................................42 SIM contacts.... ..................... .................... ...................... ........42 Fixed dialling......... ................................................ ................42 7. Messaging.............. ........ ......... ......... ........... ...42 Messaging main view. ................................... ..........................42 Write and send messages..... ................................................. .43 Messaging inbox..................... .................................................44 Receive messages.................................................................44 Multimedia messages... ................................ ........................44 Data, settings, a nd web service messages.........................45 Mailbox.....................................................................................4 5 Define e-mail setti ngs............................... ...........................45 Open the mailbox........................................ ...................... ...45 Retrieve e-mail messages....................................................45 Delete e-mail messages..................................... ..................4 6 Disconnect from the mailbox .......... ............ ........... ........... ..46 View messages on a SIM card. ......................................... .......46 Cell broadcast messages.........................................................46 Service commands........... .............................. ..........................47 Messaging settings................. .................................................47 Text messa ge settings........ ............................ ......................47 Multimedia message settings................... .......................... .47 E-mail settings ..................... ........................... ......................4 8 Manage mailboxes.............................................................48 Instant messaging. ................................................. .................48 8. Pe rson alis e your devic e............ ..................... 48 Change the look of your device..... .........................................49 Profiles............................ .................................... ......................49 9. Music folder....................................................50 Contents
Music player......... .................. .................. ....................... ..........49 Play a song or a podcast ................. .................. ...................50 Playlists............................. .....................................................51 Podcasts................... ..................................... .........................51 Transfer music from a computer. ............................. ...........51 Nokia Music Store...................................................... ..............52 Nokia Podcasting......... ................................................... .........52 Podcasting setti ngs...................................... ........................52 Downloads............. ............................... .................................53 Radio................................. ............................................. ...........53 Listen to the radio......................................... .......................53 Manage radio stations......... ........................ .........................54 10. Gallery.................. .................. ............. .........54 View and organise files.... .................................... ...................54 View images and videos.................................................... .....54 Organise images and videos............ ............ ............... ...........55 TV-out mode................................. ........................ ...................55 11. Camera.............. .......... ............ .......... .......... .56 Activate the ca mera.................. .................... ................ ..........56 Image capture............ ............................... ........................ .......56 On-screen controls and in dicators for still image capture.................... ................................ ...............................56 Capture and recording setting s...........................................57 Capture images.....................................................................58 After capturing an image....................... ..............................58 Flash and video light........................................................... .59 Scenes......................................................................... ...........59 Location information..... .................. .................. ...................59 You in the image â self-timer......................................... ...59 Capture images in a sequence... ........................ ..................60 Video recording................................ ............................ ...........60 Record videos....................................... .................................60 Vi de o re co rd in g o n-s cr ee n c on tro ls an d i ndi ca to rs ..........60 After recording a video clip................ ........... ........... ...........61 12. Positioning (GPS)..........................................61 About GPS.................................................................................61 Assisted GPS (A-GPS)................................................................62 Hold your device correctly............................ ..........................6 2 Tips on creating a GPS connection................................. ........63 Position requests...................... ...............................................63 Landmarks................ .................................... ............................63 GPS data.......... ......................... ................................ .................64 Positioning settings .................. .............................. ................64 13. Maps.................................. ................... ........64 Maps............................. ........................................... ..................65 Network positioning...............................................................6 5 Move on a map...... .................... .......................... .................... .65 Display indicators.............................................................. ......66 Find locations............. ............................ ............................... ...66 Plan a route........................ .............................................. ........67 Save and send locations.. ................... ................... ..................67 View your saved items............................................................67 Navigate to the destina tion........... ............... ............ .............68 Update maps................... .........................................................68 Nokia Map Loader.................................. ..................................68 14. Connectivity.. ................. ............... ................69 Data connections and access points......................................69 Contents
Network settings.....................................................................69 Wireless LAN .......... ........................... ............................. ..........70 About WLAN............... .................... .................... ....................70 WLAN connections................................................................70 WLAN wizard.........................................................................70 WLAN internet access poin ts.............. ................ .............. ...71 Operating modes..................................................................71 Wireless LAN settings...........................................................71 Access points........................... ............................................. ....72 Create a new access point..... ...................... ...................... ...72 Create access point groups..................................................72 Packet data access poin ts............................... .....................73 WLAN internet access poin ts.............. ................ .............. ...73 Active data connections ..........................................................75 Synchronisation. ......................................................................75 Bluetooth connectivity.... ............................................ ............75 About Bluetooth connectivity............... ...............................75 Settings....................... ...................................................... .....76 Security tips..................... ........................................ ..............76 Send data usin g Blu etoo th co nnec tivi ty................. ...........76 Pair devices......... .................. .................... ................... ..........77 Receive data using Bluetooth con nectivity........................77 Block devices.........................................................................78 Remote SIM mode............. ............................................. .......78 USB............................................................................................78 PC connections................. ........................................................79 Administrative setting s..................... .......................... ............79 SIP settings........... .................................................................7 9 Access point name control.............. .....................................79 Packet data se ttings.............................................................79 15. Share online................... ................ ............ ..80 Share online.............................................................................80 Subscribe to services...............................................................80 Manage your accounts....................................... .....................80 Create a post............................................................... .............81 Post files from Gallery........................................... ..................81 16. Nokia Video Centre.......... .............................81 View and download video clips............... ............ ............ ......82 Video feeds......................... ................................ ......................82 My videos................... ...................................... .........................83 Transfer videos from your PC........................ ................ .........83 Video centre settings........................................ ................... ...83 17. Web browser.......... ......................................84 Browse the web....................... ............................................ ....84 Browser toolbar............................ ...........................................85 Navigate pages ............................................................ ............85 Web feeds and blogs...................................... .........................85 Widgets............. .................... .................... ...................... ..........86 Content search.........................................................................86 Download and purchase items.................. ........ ............ ........8 6 Bookmarks.................................. ............................... ..............87 Empty the cache.. ................... ......................... ................... ......87 Connection security.................................................................87 18. Search..................................... ......................88 About Search................................................................... .........88 Start a search...........................................................................8 8 19. Download!...................... ..............................88 Contents
About Download!............... ............................... .......................88 Purchase and download items ..................................... ..........89 20. Other applications............ ............................89 Clock ................................................... ......................................89 Alarm clock............................................................................89 World clock................................................................. ...........90 Calendar..................... ............................... ............................. ...90 Calendar views......................................................................90 Calendar toolbar................................. ........................ ..........90 File manager.......................................................................... ..90 About File manager........................................................ ......90 Find and organise files.........................................................90 Edit memory card................. .................... ...................... .......91 Back up files on a memory card....................... .................. .91 Application manager.... ............................................. ..............91 Install application s....................... .......................... ..............91 Remove applications............................................................92 Application manager set tings.................. .............. .............93 Application Update................. .................................................93 RealPlayer .......... ............................................ ..........................93 RealPlayer toolbar......................... ................... ....................93 Play video clips.................. ........................... .........................93 Stream content over the air................. .................... ............94 Recorder................................................ ...................................94 Write notes.............. ....................... .......................... ................94 Calculator.............. .......................... ................................ ..........94 Converter..................................................................................94 Dictionary.................................................................................95 21. Settings................. ................ ............ ...........95 Phone settings.........................................................................95 Date and time settin gs.........................................................95 Language setti ngs............................. .................................. .95 Display settings. ................................................... .................96 Voice commands......................... ..........................................96 Accessory settings.. ........................ ..................... ..................96 Application settings........ ............................. .........................97 Device updates...... ................................................................97 Security settings........................................... ................... .....97 Phone and SIM.................... ...................................... ..........97 Certificate management... ........................ ...................... ...98 Security module........................................ .........................99 Restore original settings... .......................... ....................... 100 Protected content........................ .......................................100 Notification light............................. .................. ................ .100 Call settings................ ................................................ ............100 Call settings.........................................................................100 Call divert........ ........................... .................................. ........101 Call barring..........................................................................101 22. T rou blesh ooti ng.......... ................... ...........10 2 Accessories.......................................................105 Battery.............. .............. ............... ............... ....105 Battery and charger information....................... ..................105 Nokia battery authentication guidelines......................... ...106 Authenticate hologram........... ...........................................106 Wha t if y our ba tter y is n ot a uthe ntic ?......... ............. .......1 07 Care and maintenance........ ....... ....... ...... ..... ....107 Contents
Recycle...................................................... ..............................108 Addi tion al sa fet y inf orma tion .........................108 Small children........................................................................108 Operating environment........................................................108 Medical devices.................................................. ....................109 Implanted medical devices................... .............................109 Hearing aids........................................................................109 Vehicles.............. ...................... ....................... ...................... ..109 Potentially explosive environmen ts.......................... ..........110 Emergency calls.............................................. .......................110 Certification information (SAR)........................................ ....111 Index....................................................... .........112 Contents
Safety Read these simple guidelines . Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete user guide for further information. SWITCH ON SAF ELY Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COM ES FIRST Obey all local laws. Always keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safe ty. INTERFERENCE All wireless devices may be suscepti ble to interference, which coul d affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN RESTRICTED ARE AS Follow any restrictions. Switch the device off in aircraft, near medical eq uipment, fuel, chemicals, or blasting areas. QUALIFIED SERVI CE Only qualified personnel ma y install or repair this product. ACCESSORIES AN D BATTERIES Use only approved accessories and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. WATER-RESIST ANCE Your device is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. About your device The wireless device described in this guide is approved for use on the GSM 850, 900, 1800, 1900 and UMTS 900, 2100 networks. Contact your service provider for more information about networks. When using the features in th is device, obey all laws and respect local customs, privacy and legitimate rights of others, including copyrights. Copyright protections may pr event some images, music (including ringing tones), an d other content from being copied, modified, or transferred. Your device supports several methods of connectivity. Like computers, your devic e may be exposed to viruse s and other harmful content. Exercise caution with messages, connectivity requests, browsing , and downloads. Only install and use services and other software from trustworthy sources that offer adequate se curity and protecti on against harmful software, such as app lications that are Symbia n Signed or have passed the Ja va Verified⢠testing. Consider installing antiviru s and other security s oftware on your device and any connected computer. é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 10
Your device may have preins talled bookmarks and links for third-party internet sites. Yo u may also access other third- party sites through your device. Third-party sites are not affiliated with Nokia, an d Nokia does not endorse or assume liability for them. If you choos e to access such sit es, you should take precautions for security or content. Warning: To use any features in this device, other than the alarm clock, the device must be switched on. Do not switch the device on when wireless device use may cause interference or danger. Remember to make back-up copies or keep a written record of all important information stored in your device. When connecting to any other de vice, read its user guide for detailed safety in structions. Do not connect incompatible products . The images in this guide may di ffer from your device display. Refer to the user guide for ot her important information about your devi ce. Network services To use the device you must have service from a wireless service provider. Many of the features require special network features. These features are no t availa ble on all networks; other networks may require that you make specific arrangements with your servic e provider before you can use the network services. Usin g network services involves transmission of data . Check with your service provider for details about fees in your home network and when roaming on other networks. Your service provider can give you instructions an d explain what charg es will apply. Some networks may have limitati ons that affect how you ca n use network services. For instance, some networks may not support all lang uage-dependent ch aracters and s ervices. Your service provider may ha ve requested that certain features be disabled or not ac tivated in your device. If so, these features will not appear on your devi ce menu. Your device may also have a special configuration such as changes in menu names, menu order, an d icons. Contact your service provider for more information. This device supports WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocols. Some features of this device, such as MMS, browsing, and e-mail, require network support for these technologies. Safety é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 11
1. Get started Keys and part s 1 â Micro USB connector to connect to a compatible PC 2 â Nokia AV Connector (3.5 mm) for compatible headsets, headphones, and TV- out connectors 3 â Charger connector 4 â Power key 5 â Earpiece 6 â Ligh t senso r 7 â Proximity sensor 8 â Touch screen 9 â Secondary camera 10 â Volume/Zoom key 11 â Media key 12 â Screen and key lock switch 13 â Capture key 14 â End key 15 â Menu key 16 â Call key 17 â Pen stylus 18 â Camera lens 19 â Camera flash 20 â Loudspeakers é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 12
21 â Cover of the SIM card slot 22 â Cover of the memory card slot 23 â Wrist strap opening 24 â Microphone During extended operation such as an active video call and a high speed data connection, the device may feel warm. In most cases, this condition is normal. If you suspect the device is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorised service facility. Insert the SIM card Important: To prevent damage to the SIM card, always remove the battery befo re you insert or remove the card. A SIM card may be already inserted in the device. If not, do the following: 1. Open the cover of the SIM card slot. 2. Insert a SIM card in the slot. Ensure that the contact area on the card is facing up and the bevelled corner is facing toward the device. Push th e card in. 3. Close the cover of the SIM card slot. Ensure that the cover is properly closed. If the SIM card is not properly in place, the device can only be used in the offline profile. Insert battery Always switch the device o ff and disconnect th e charger before removing the battery. 1. Remove the back cover by lifting it from the bottom end of the device. Get started é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 13
2. Insert the battery. 3. To replace the cover, direct the top locking catches toward their slots first and then press down until the cover locks into place. Charge the battery 1. Connect a compatible charger to a wall outlet. 2. Connect the power cord to the device. If the battery is completely discharged, it ma y take a while before the charging indicator starts scrolling. 3. When the battery is fully ch arged, the char ging indicator stops scrolling. Disconnect the charger from the device, then from the wall outlet. Tip: Disconnect the charger fr om the wall outlet when the charger is not in use. A charger that is con nected to the outlet co nsumes po wer even when it is not connected to the device. Get started é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 14
Switch the device on 1. Press and h old the power key. 2. If the device asks for a PI N code or lock code, enter it, and select OK . To delete a number, select . The factory setting for the lock code is 12345 . 3. Select your location. If you accidentally select the wrong location, select Back . 4. Enter the date and time. When using the 12-hour tim e format, to switch between a. m. and p.m., select any number. Stylus Some functions, such as handwriting recognition, are designed to be used with a st ylus. The pen stylus is located in the back cover of the device. Important: Use only a stylus approved by N okia for use with this device. Using any other stylus may invalidate any warranty a pplying to the device and may damage the to uch screen. Avoid scratchin g the touch screen. Never use an ac tual pen or pencil or other sharp objects to write on the touch screen. Lock the keys and touch screen To lock or unlock the touch screen and the keys, s lide the lock switch on the side of the device. When the touch screen and keys are locked, the touch screen is switched off and the keys are inactive. The screen and keys may be locked automatically after a period of inactivity. To chan ge settings for automatic screen and key locking, select Menu > Settings and Phone > Phone mgmt. > Auto. keyguard > Keypad autolock period . Home screen Home screen is your starting point where you can collect all your important contacts or application shortcuts. Get started é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 15
Interactive display elements To open the clock applic ation, tap the clock (1). To open calendar or change profiles in the home screen, tap the date or the profile name (2). To view or change connectivity settings ( ), to see the available wireless LANs if WL AN scann ing is enabled, or to view the missed events, tap th e top right corner (3). To make a phone call, select (4). To open Contacts, s elect (5). To open the main menu, press the menu key (6 ). Start using the contacts bar To start using the contacts bar and add your con tacts to the home screen, in the home screen, select > Add cont. to Home scr. , and follow the instructions. Change the home screen theme To change the home screen th eme or the shortc uts, select Menu > Settings and Personal > Home screen . Access the menu To access the menu, press the menu key. To open an application or folder in the menu, tap it. Touch screen actions Tap and double-tap To open an application or othe r element on the touch screen, you normally tap it with your finger or the stylus. However, to open the following items, you must tap them twice. â List items in an application, such as the Drafts folder in the folder list in Messaging Tip: When you open a list view, the first item i s already highlighted. To open the highlig hted item, tap it once. â Applications and folders in th e menu when using the list view type â Files in a file list, for exampl e, an image in the images and videos view in Gallery. If you tap a file or similar item once, it is not opened, it becomes highlighte d. To see the options available for the item, select Options or, if available, select an icon from a toolbar. Get started é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 16
Select In this user documentation, op ening applications or items by tapping them once or twice is called "selecting". If you need to select several items in a sequence, the display texts to select are separated by arrows. Example: To select Options > Help , tap Optio ns , and then tap Help . Drag To drag, plac e your finger or the stylus on the screen, and slide it across the screen. Example: To scroll up or down on a web page, drag the page with your finger or stylu s. Swipe To swipe, slide your finger quic kly left or right on the screen. Example: When viewing an image, to view the next or previous image, swipe the image left or right, respectively. Scroll To scroll up or down in lists th at have a scroll bar, drag the slider of the scroll bar. In some list views, you can scroll by placing your finger or stylus on a list item and dra gging up or down. Example: To scroll throug h contacts, place your finger or stylus on a contact, and dra g up or down. Tip: To view a brief desc ript ion of icons and buttons, place your finger or stylus on the icon or butt on. Descriptions are not available for all icons and butto ns. Touch screen light The touch screen light is turned off after a period of inactivity. To turn the screen light on, tap it. If the touch screen and keys are locked, tapping the scr een does not turn the screen ligh t on. To unlock the screen and keys, slide the lock switch. Media key To access app lications such as the music player or browser, tap the media key ( ) to open the media bar, and select the application. Tip: Ho l d y o ur fi ng e r o r t h e stylus on the icon to see the name of the application. Get started é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 17
Change the rin ging tone Select Menu > Settings and Pe rsonal > Prof iles . You can use profiles to set an d customise the ringing tones, message alert tones, and othe r tones for different events, environments, or caller groups. To personalise a profile, scroll to the profil e, and select Options > Pe rsonalise . Nokia support To find the latest version of this guide, additional information, downloads, and serv ices related to your Nokia product, see www.nokia.com/support or your local Nokia website. Configuration setti ngs service To download configuration sett ings such as MMS, GPRS, e- mail, and other services for your phone model, see www.nokia.com/support. Nokia Care services If you need to contact Nokia Care services, check the list of local Nokia Care contact centres at www.nokia.com/ customerservice. Maintenance For maintenance services, find your nearest N okia Care point at www.nokia.com/rep air. 2. Find help In-device help Your device contains instru ctions to help to use the applications in your device. To open help texts from the main menu, select Menu > Help and the application for which you want to read instructions. When an application is open, to access the help text for the current view, select Options > Help . When you are reading the instru ctions, to change the size of the help text, select Options > Decrease font size or Increase font size . You can find links to relate d topics at the end of t he help text. If you select an underlined word, a short explanation is displayed. Help texts use the following indicators: shows a link to a related help topic shows a link to the application being discussed When you are reading the inst ructions, to switch between help texts and the app lication that is open in the background, press and hold the menu key, an d select from the list of open applications. Extended us er guid e An extended version of this us er guide is available on the product support pages of the Noki a website. Some Find help é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 18
applications or functions are explained only in the extended user guide. Software upda tes Nokia may produce software up dates th at offer new features, enhanced functions, a nd impr oved performance. You may be able to request these updates through the Nokia Software Updater PC ap plication. Software updates may not be available for all products or their variants. Not all operators may endorse the latest so ftware versions available. To update the device software, you need the Nokia Software Updater applicati on and a compatible PC with t he Microsoft Windows 2000, XP, or Vista opera ting system, broadband internet access, and a comp atible data cable to connect you r device to the P C. Warning: If you ins tall a softwar e update, you cann ot use the device, even to make emergency calls, until the installation is completed an d the device is restarted. Be su re to back up data before acceptin g installation of an upd ate. To get more information and to download the Nokia Software Updater application, visitwww.nokia.com/ softwareupdate or your local Nokia website. If software updates over the air are supported by your network, you may a lso be able to request up dates through the device. Downloading s oftware updat es may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information about data transmission charges. Make sure that the device battery has enough power, or connect the charger before starting the update. Tip: To check the software version in your device, select Menu > Settings and Phone > Phone mgmt. > Device updates . Settings Your device norm ally has MMS, GP RS, streaming, and m obile internet settings automat ically configured in the device, based on your network service provider information. You may have settings from your service providers already installed in your device, or you may receive or request the settings from the network service providers as a special message. Access codes If you forget any of the access codes, contact your service provider. â Personal identification number (PIN) code â This code protects your SIM card against una uthorised use. The PIN code (4 to 8 digits) is usually supplied with the SIM card. After three consecutive incorre ct PIN code entries, the code is blocked, and you need the PUK code to unblock it. â UPIN code â This code may be supplied with the USIM card. The USIM card is an enhanced version of the S IM card and is supported by UMTS mobile phones. Find help é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 19
â P I N 2 c o d e â T h i s c o d e ( 4 t o 8 d i g i t s ) i s s u p p l i e d w i t h s o m e SIM cards, and is required to access some functions in your devic e. â Lock code (also known as security code) â The lock code helps you to protect your device against unauthorised u se. The preset code is 12345. You can create and change the code, and set the device to request the code. Keep the new co d e s e cr e t an d i n a sa f e p l ac e se p ar a te f ro m y ou r de v ic e . If you forget the code and your device is locked, your device will require servic e and additional char ges may apply. For more information, contact a Nokia Care point or your device dealer. â Personal Unblocking Key (PUK) code and PUK2 code â These codes (8 digits) are required to change a blocked PIN code or PIN2 code, respectively. If the codes are not supplied with the SIM card, contact the opera tor whose SIM card is in your device. â UPUK code â This code (8 digi ts) is required to change a blocked UPIN code. If the code is no t supplied with th e USIM card, contact the operator whose USIM card is in your devic e. Prolong battery life M a n y f e a t u r e s i n y o u r d e v i c e i n c r ea s e t h e d e m a n d o n b a t t e r y power and reduce the battery lifeti me. To save battery power, note the following: â Features that use Bluetooth technology, or allowing such features to run in the ba ckground while usi ng other features, increase the dema nd on battery power. Turn Bluetooth technology off when you do not need it . â Features that use wireless LAN (WLAN), or allowing such features to run in the ba ckground while using other features, increase the demand on battery power. WLAN on your Nokia device switches off when you are not trying to connect, not connected to an access point, or not scanning for available networks. To further reduce battery consumption, you can speci fy that your device does not scan, or scans less often, for av ailable networks in the background. â If you have set Packet data connection to When available in connection settings, and there is no packet data coverage (GPRS), the device periodically tries to establish a packet data connection . To prolong the operating time of your device, select Packet data connection > When needed . â The Maps application downloads new map informat ion when you move to new areas on the map, wh ich increases the demand on battery po wer. You can prevent th e automatic download of n ew maps. â If the signal strength of th e cellular network varies much in your area, your device must scan for the available network repeatedly. This i ncr eases the demand on battery power. If the network mode is set to dual mode in the network settings, the device searches for the UMTS network. You can set the device t o use only the GSM net work. To only use the GSM network, select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > Netw ork > Network mode > GSM . â The backlight of the displa y increases the demand on battery power. In the display settings, you can change t he Find help é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 20
time-out after which the backlight is switched off, and adjust the light sensor t hat observes lighting conditions and adjusts the display brigh tness. Select Menu > Settings and Phone > Display > Light time- out or Light sens or . â Leaving applications running in the background increases the demand on battery power. To close the applications you do not use, press and hold the menu key, select Options > Show open apps. , and navigate to the application with the menu ke y. Press and hold the menu key, a nd select Exit . Free memory To view how much space is a vai lable for different data types, select Menu > Applications > File mg r. . To remove data you no longer need, use File manager or go to the respective application. You can remove the following: â Messages in the folders in Me ssaging an d retrieved e-mail messages from the mailbox â Saved web pages â Contact information â Calendar notes â Applications shown in Application manager that you do not need â Installation files (.sis or .sisx) of applications you have installed. Transfer the insta llation files to a compatible computer. â Images and video clips in Galle ry. Back up the files to a compatible computer using Nokia PC Suite. 3. Your device Welcome When you switch on your de vice for the first time, the Welcome application is displayed. To access the Welcome appl ication later, select Menu > Applications > Welcome . Select from the following: â Settings wi zard â Configure various settings of your devic e. â Phone switch â Tran sfer content, such as contacts an d calendar entries, from a compatible Nokia device. â E-mail setu p â Configure e-mail settings. Transfer content You can use the Switch application to copy content such as phone numbers, addresses, cale ndar items, and images from your previous Nokia device to your device. Your device é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 21
The type of content that can be transferred depends on the model of the device from which you want to transfer content. If that device supports synchronisation , you can also synchronise data between the devices. Your device notifies you if the other device is not compatible. If the other device cannot be sw itched on without a SIM card, you can in sert yo ur SIM card in it . When you r device is switched on without a SIM card, the Offline profile is automatically activated, and t ransfer can be don e. Transfer content for the first time 1. To retrieve data from the ot her device for the first time, on your device, select Phone sw itch in the Welcome application, or select Menu > Appli cations > Switch . 2. Select the connect ion type you want to use t o transfer the data. Both devices must supp ort the selected connection type. 3. If you select Bluet ooth connectivity as the connection type, connect the two devices. To have your device search for devices with Bluetooth connectivity, select Continue . Select the device from which you want to transfer content. You are asked to enter a code on your device. Enter a code (1-16 digits), and select OK . Enter the same code on the other device, and select OK . The devices ar e now paired. Some earlier Nokia devices may not have the Switch application. In this case, the Switch application is sent to the other device as a mess age. To install the Switch application on the other devi ce, open the message, and follow the instructio ns on the display. 4. On your device, select the content you want to transfer from the other device. When the transfer has starte d, you can cancel it and continue later. Content is transferred from th e memory of the other device to the corresponding location in your device. The transfer time depends on the amount of data to be transferred. Display indicators The device is being us ed in a GSM network (network service). The device is being used in a UMTS network (network service). You have one or more un read messages in the Inbox folder in Messaging. You have received new e- mail in the remote mailbox. There are messages waitin g to be sent in the Outbox folder. You have missed calls. The ringing type is set to Silent, and the message and e- mail alert tones are turned off. A timed profile is active. The touch screen and keys are locked. A clock alarm is active. The second phone line is being used (network service). Your device é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 22
All calls to the device are diverted to another number (network service). If you have two phone lines, a number indicates the active line. A compatible headset is connected to the device. A compatible TV out cabl e is connected to the device. A compatible text phone is connected to the device. A data call is active (network service). A G P R S p a c k e t d a t a c o n n e c t i o n i s a c t i v e ( n e t w o r k s e r v i c e ) . indicates tha t the conn ection is on hold and that a connection is available. A p a c k et d a t a c on n e c t i on i s active in a part of the network that suppo rts EGPRS (n etwork servi ce). indicates that the connection is on hold and that a connect ion is available. The icons indicate that EGPRS is available in the network, but your device is not necessarily using an EGPRS connection to transfer data. A U M T S p a c k e t d a t a c o n n e c t i o n i s a c t i v e ( n e t w o r k s e r v i c e ) . indicates tha t the conn ection is on hold and that a connection is available. High-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) is supported and active (network service). indicates that the connection is on hold and that a connection is ava ilable. You have set the device to scan for wireless LAN s, and a wireless LAN is availabl e (networ k service). A wireless LAN connection is active in a network that uses encryption. A wireless LAN connection is active in a network that does not use encryption. Bluetooth connectivity is on. Data is being tran smitted using Bluetooth connectivity. When the indicator is blinking , your device is trying to connect with another dev ice. A USB connection is acti ve. Synchronisation is in progress. Memory card Use only compatible microSD and microSDHC cards approved by Nokia for use with this device. Nokia uses approved industry standards for memory cards, but some brands may not be fully compatible with th is device. Incompatible cards may damage the card and the de vice and corrupt data stored on the card. Insert the memory card A memory card may be already in serted in the device. If not, do the following: Your device é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 23
1. Open the cover of the memory card slot. 2. Insert a com patible memory card in the slot. Ensure that the contact area is facing up. Push the card in. You can hear a click when the card locks into p lace. 3. Close the cover of the memory card slot. Ensure that the cove r is properly closed. Remove the memory card Important: Do not remove the memory card in the middle of an operation when the card is being accessed. Removing the card in the middl e of an operation may damage the memory card as well as the device, and data stored on the card may be corru pted. 1. If the device is switched on , before you remove the card, press the power key, and select Remove memory card . 2. When Removing memory card will close all open applications. Remove anyway? is displayed, select Yes . All applications are closed. 3. When Remove memory card and press 'OK' is displayed, open the cover of the memory card slot. 4. Press the memory card to release it from the slot. 5. Pull out the memory card. If the device is switched on, select OK . Volume and loudspeaker control Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. Continuous exposure to hi gh volume may damage y our hearing. Do not hold the device near your ea r when the loudspeaker is in use, becaus e the volume may be extremely loud. To adjust the volume level wh en you have an active call or are listening to a sound clip, us e the volume key. Your device é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 24
The built-in loudspeaker allo ws you to speak and listen from a short distance without having to hold th e device to your ear. To use the loudspeaker during a call, select Activate loudsp. . To turn off the lo udspeaker, select Activate handset . Shortcuts To switch between open applications, p ress and hold the menu key. Leaving application s runn ing in the background increases the demand on ba ttery power and reduces the battery life. To start a web connection ( net work service), in the dialler, tap and hold 0 . To access applicat ions available in the media bar, such as the music player and web browser, in any view, press the media key. To change the profile, press the power key, and select a profile. To call your voice mailbox (network service), in the dialler, tap and hold 1 . To open a list of last dialle d numbers, in the home screen, press the call key. To use voice commands, in the home screen, press and hold the call key. Antenna locatio ns Your device may have internal and external antennas. As with any radio transmitting device, avoid touching the antenna area unnecessarily while the antenn a is transmitting or receiving. Contact with such an antenna affects the communication quality and may cause the device to operate at a higher power level than otherwise needed and may reduce the battery life. Cellular antenna Bluetooth and WLAN antenna GPS antenna Contacts bar Start using the contacts bar To start using the contacts ba r and add your contacts to the home screen, in the home screen, select > Add cont. to Home scr. , and follow the instructi ons. Your device é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 25
To add a contact to the home screen in contacts bar mode, select and either select a cont act from your contacts, or create a new contact, and a dd a photo to the contact information. To communicate with your conta ct, select the contact a nd from the following: â â Make a phone call. â â Send a message. â â Modify contact information. â â Refresh the contact's web feeds. To view past communication even ts with a conta ct, select a contact. Select a comm unication event to view event details. To close the view, select . Offline profile To activate the Offline profil e, press the power key briefly, and select Offline . The Offline profile lets you us e the device without connecting to the wireless network. When you activate the Offline profile, the connection to the wireless network is turned off, as indicated by in the signal streng th indicator area. All wireless RF signals to a nd from the device are prevented. If you try to send messages, t hey are placed in the Outbox folder to be sent later. When the Offline profile is ac tive, you can use your device without a SIM card. I f t h e S I M c a r d i s n o t p r op e r l y i n p l a c e , t h e d e v i c e s t a r t s i n t h e Offline profile. Important : In the offline profile you cannot make or receive any calls, or use other features that require cellular network coverage. Calls may sti ll be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. To make calls, you must first activate the phone function by changing profiles. If the device has been locked, enter the lock code. When you have activated the offlin e profile, you can still use the wireless LAN, for example, to read your e-mail or browse on the internet. Re member to comply with any applicable safety requirements when esta blishing and using a wireless LAN connection. You can also use Bluetooth con nectivity while in the offline profile. To switch to another profile, press the power key briefly, and select another profile. The device re-enables wireless transmissions (providing ther e is sufficient signal st rength). Sensor settin gs and disp lay rotatio n When you activate the sensors in your device, you can control certain functions by turning the device. Select Menu > Settings and Pho ne > Sensor settings . Select from the following: â Sensors â Activate the sensors. â Turning control â S elect Silencing calls and Snoozing alarms to mute calls and snooz e alarms by turning your device so that the d isplay faces down. Selec t Au t o -r o ta te Your device é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 26
display to rotate the di splay content automatically when you turn the device on its left side or back to a vertical position. Some applications and features may n ot support rotating the display content. Headset You can conn ect a compa tible headset or comp atible headphones to your device. You may need to select the cable mode. Some headsets come in two pa rts, a remote control unit and headphones. A remote control unit has a microphone and keys to answer or end a phon e call, adjust the volume, and play music or video files. To use the headp hones with a remote control unit, connect the unit to the Nokia AV Connector in the device, then connect the headphones to the unit. Warning: When you use the headset, your ability to hear outside sounds may be a ffected. Do not us e the headset where it can endanger your safety. Do not connect products that create an output sig nal as this may cau se damage to the device. Do not connect any voltage source to the Nokia AV Connector. When connecting any external device or any headset, other tha n those approved by Nokia for use with this device, to the Nokia AV Connector, pay special attention to volume levels. Remove the SIM card 1. Remove the back cover by lifting it from the bottom end of the device. 2. Remove the batt ery. Your device é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 27
3. Open the cover of the SIM card slot. Place the tip of the stylus in the opening under the battery, and push the S IM card sideways to slide it out of the slot. Pull the SIM card out. 4. Replace the battery and the back cover. Attach a wrist s trap Tip: Atta ch the plectrum stylus to the device like a wrist s trap. Remote lock To prevent unauthorised use of your device, you can lock your device and memory card remote ly using a text mes sage. You must define the message text, and to lock your device, sen d that text message to your device. To unlock your device, you need the lock code. To enable remote locking an d to defi ne the text message conte nt to be u sed, select Menu > S et ti ng s a nd Pho ne > Phone mgmt. > Security > Phone and SIM card > Remote phone locki ng > Enabled . Tap the text inpu t field to enter the text message content ( 5 to 20 characters), select , and veri fy the message. Enter the lock code. Your device é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 28
4. Make calls Proximity sensor To prevent accidental selections , the touch screen is disabled automatic ally during calls when you place the device next to your ear. Voice calls 1. In the home screen, select to open the dialler, and enter the phone number, in cluding the area code. To remove a number, select C . For international calls, select * twice for the chara cter (which replaces the internation al access code), and enter the country code, area code (omit the leading zero if necessary), and phone number. 2. To make the call, press the call key. 3. To end the call (or to cancel the call at tempt), press the end key. Pressing the end key always en ds a call, even if another application is active. To make a call from the contacts list, select Menu > Contacts . Scroll to the desired name. Or, tap the search field to enter the first letters of the name, and scroll to the na me. To call the contact, press the call key. If you have s aved several numbers for a contact, select the desired number from the list, and press the call key. During a call To mute or unmute the microphone , select or . To put the call on hold or unhold it, select or . Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To activate the loudspeaker, select . If you have attached a compatible headset with Bluetooth conn ectivity, to route the sound to the headset, select Options > Activate BT handsfree . To switch back to the handset, select . To end the call, select . To switch betw een the active and the held call, selec t . Tip: When you have only one active voice call, to put the call on hold, press the call key. To activate the call, press the call key again . To send DTMF tone strings (for example, a password), select Options > Send DTMF . Enter the DTMF string or search for it in the contacts list. To enter a wai t character (w) or a pause character (p), press * repeatedly. To send the tone, select OK . You can add DTMF tones to the phone number or DTMF field in contact details. To end an active call and repla c e it by answering the waiting call, select Options > Replace . Make calls é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 29
To end all your calls, select . Many of the options t hat you can use during a voic e call are network services. Voice mailbox To call your voice mailbox (network service), in the home screen, select to open the dialler, and tap and hold 1 . 1. To change the phone number of your voice mailbox, select Menu > Settings an d Calling > Call mailbox , a mailbox, and Options > Change number . 2. Enter the number (obtained from your network service provider), and select OK . Answer or reject a call To answer a call, press the ca ll key. To mute the ringing tone of an incoming call, select . You can send a t ext message w ithout rejecti ng the call, informing the caller that you ca nnot answer the call. To send the reply message, select Send msg. , edit the message text, and press the call key. If you do not want to answer a call, press the end key. If you activate the Call divert > Voice calls > If busy function in phone settings to divert calls, rejecting an incoming call also diverts the call. You can send a t ext message w ithout rejecti ng the call, informing the caller that yo u cannot answer the call. To activate the text message opt ion and write a standard reply message, select Menu > Settings and Calling > Call > Reject call with message , and Message text . Make a conference call Your device sup ports confer ence calls between a maximum of six participants, including yourself. 1. Make a call to the first part icipant. 2. To make a call to another particip ant, select Opti ons > New call . The first call is put on hold. 3. When the new call is answered , to join the first participant in the conference call, select . To add a new person to the call, make a ca ll to another participant, and add t he new call to the conference call. To have a private conversation with one of the participants, select . Scroll to the participant, a nd select . The conference call is put on hold on your devi ce. The other participants can still continue the conference call. To return to the conf erence call, select . To drop a participant, select , scroll to the participa nt, and select . 4. To end the active conference call, press the end key. Speed dial a phone number Select Menu > Settings and Cal ling . To activate the feature, se lect Call > Speed di alling . Make call s é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 30
1. To assign a phone number to one of the number keys, select Speed dialling . 2. Scroll to the key to which you wa nt to assign the phone number, and select Options > Assign . 1 is reserved for the voice mailbox. To call in the home screen, select to open the dialler, select the assigned key number, and press the call key. To call in the home screen when speed dialling is active, select to open the dialler, and tap and hold the assign ed key number. Call waiting You can an swer a call wh en you have an other call in progr ess. To activate call waiting (n etwork service), select Menu > Settings and Calling > Call > Call wa iting . 1. To answer the waiting call, pr ess the call key. The first call is put on hol d. 2. To switch between the two calls, select Options > Swap . 3. To connect an incoming call or a call on hold with an active call, and to disconnect yo urself from the calls, select Options > Transfer . 4. To end the active call, press the end key. 5. To end both calls, select Options > End all calls . Voice dialling Your device supports enhanced voice comma nds. Enhanced voice commands are not depend ent on the speakerâÂÂs voice, s o y o u d o n o t n e e d t o r e c o r d v oice tags in advance. The device creates a voice tag for the entries in the contacts and compares the spoken voice tag with it. The voice recognition in the device adapts to the main userâÂÂs voice to r ecognise the voice commands better. The voice tag for a contact is the name that is saved for the contact. To listen to th e synthesised voice tag, select a contact and Options > Voice tag details . Scroll to a conta ct detail, and select Options > Play voice ta g . Make a call with a voice tag Note: Using voice tags may be difficult in a noisy environment or during an emer gency, so you should not rely solely upon voice dialli ng in all circumstances. When you use voice dialling, th e loudspeaker is in use. Hold the device at a shor t distance awa y when you sa y the voice tag. 1. To start voice dialling, in the home screen, press and hold the call key. If a comp atible headset with the h eadset key is attached, press and hold the headset key to start voice dialling. 2. A short tone sounds, and Speak now is displayed. Say clearly the name that is saved for the cont act. 3. The device plays a synth esised voice tag for the recognised contact in the se lected device language, an d Make calls é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 31
displays the name and num ber. To cancel the voice dialling, select Quit . If several numbers are saved for a name, you can say a lso the name and the number type, su ch as mobile or telephone. Make a video ca ll When you make a video call (network service), you can see a real-time, two-way video betw een you and the recipient of the call. The live video image, or video image captured by the camera in your device is sh own to the video call recipient. To be able to make a video call, you must have a USIM card and be in the coverage of a UM TS network. For availability, pricing and subscription to video call services, contact your network service provider. A video call can only be made b etween two parties. The video call can be made to a compatible mobile device or an ISDN client. Video calls cannot be ma de while another voice, video, or data call is active. Icons You are not receiving video (the recipient is not sending video or the network is not transmitting it). You have denied video sending from your device. To send a still image instead, select Menu > Settings and Calling > Call > Image in video call . Even if you denied video sendin g during a video call, the call is still charged as a video ca ll. Check the pricing with your service provider. 1. In the home screen, select to open the dialler, and enter the phone number. 2. Select Options > Call > Video call . The secondary camera on the front is used by default for video calls. Starting a v ideo call may take a while. If the call is not successful (for example, video calls are not supported by the network, or the receiving device is not compatible), you are asked if you want to try a normal call or send a message inst ead. The video call is active when you see two video images, and hear the sound through the loudspeaker. The call recipient may deny video sending (indica ted by ), and you only hear the voice of the caller and may see a still image or a grey screen. 3. To end the video call, press the end key. During a video call To change between showing video or hearing the voice of the caller only, select or . To mute or unmute the microphone , select or . Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To activate the loudspeaker, select . If you have attached a compatible headset with Bluetooth conn ectivity, to route the sound to the headset, select Options > Activate BT handsfree . To switch back to the handset, select . Make call s é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 32
To use the camera in the back of your device to send video, select Options > Use secondary camera . T o s wi tc h b ac k t o the camera in the front of your device, select Options > Use main camera . To take a snapshot of the vi deo you are sending, select Options > Send snapshot . Video sending is paused and the snapshot is shown to the recipi ent. Th e snapshot is not saved. To zoom your image in or out, select Options > Zoom . To change the video quality, select Options > Video preference > Normal quality , Clearer detail or Smoother motion . Answer or reject a video call When a video call arr ives, is displayed. 1. To answer the video call, press the call key. 2. To start sending live video image, select Yes . If you do not activate the video call, you only hear the voice of the caller. A grey screen replaces the video image. To replace the grey screen with a still image captured by the camera in your device, select Menu > Sett ings and Calling > Call > Image in v ideo call . Video shari ng Use video sharing (net work service) to send live video or a video clip from your mobile device to another compatible mobile device during a voice call. The loudspeaker is active when you activate video sharing. If you do not wa nt to use th e loudspeaker for the voice call while you share vi deo, you can also use a com patible headset. Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. Continuous exposure to hi gh volume may damage y our hearing. Video sharing requirements Video sharing requires a UMTS connection. Your ability to use video sharing depends on the availa bility of the UMTS network. For more information on the service, UMTS network availability, and fees as sociated with us ing this service, contact your service provider. To use video sharing, ensure the following: â Your de vice is set u p for person-to-person connections. â You have an active UMTS connection and a re within UMTS network coverage. If y ou move outside the UMTS network during a video sh aring sess ion, the sharing stops while your voice call continues. â Both the sender and recipient are registered to the UMTS network. If you invite someone to a sharing session and the recipientâÂÂs device is not within UMTS network coverage or does not have video sharing installed or person-to-person connections set up, the recipient does not receive invitations. You receive an error message that indicates that the recipient can not accept the invitation. Make calls é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 33
Settings To set up video sharing, you need person-to- person and UM TS connection settings. Person-to-person connec tion settings A person-to-person connection is also known as a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) conn ection. The SIP profile settings must be configured in your device before you can use video sharing. Ask your service provid er for the SIP profile settings , and save them to your device. Your service provider may sen d you the settings or give you a list of the needed parameters. To add a SIP address to a cont act: 1. Select Menu > Contacts . 2. Open the contact or create a new contact. 3. Select Option s > Edit . 4. Select Option s > Add detail > Share video . 5. Enter the SIP address in the forma t username@domainname (you can use an IP address instead of a domain name). If you do not know the SIP address for the contact, you can use the phone number of the recipient, including the country code, to share video (if supported by the network service provider). UMTS connection settings To set up your UMTS connection: â Contact your service provider to establish an agreement for you to us e the UMTS netw ork. â Ensure that the UMTS a ccess point connection setti ngs for your device are configured properly. For more information about the settings, contact your service provider. Share live video or video clips During an active voice call, s elect Option s > Share video . 1. To share live video during the call, select Li ve vid eo . To share a video clip, select Video clip and the clip you want to share. You may need to convert the video clip into a suitable format to be able to share it. If your device notifies you that the video clip must be con verted, select OK . Your device must have a video editor for the conversion to work. 2. If the recipient has se veral SIP addresses or phone numbers including the countr y code saved in Contacts, select the desired address or number. If the SIP address or phone number of the recipi ent is not available, enter the address or number of the recipient including the country code, and select OK to send the in vitation. Your device sends the invitation to the S IP address. Sharing begin s automatica lly when the reci pient accepts the invitation. Options during video sharing or to mu te or unmute the m icrophone or to switch the loudspeaker on and off or to pause and resume video sharing Make call s é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 34
to switch to full screen mode (available for receiver only) 3. To end the sharing session, select St op . To end the voice call, press the end key. Wh en you end the call, video sharing also ends. To save the liv e video you shared, select Yes when pr ompted. The device notifies you of th e location of the saved video. If you access other applications while you are sharing a video clip, the sharing is paused. To return to the video sharing view and to continue sh aring, in the home screen, select Options > Continue . Accept an invitation When someone sends you a vi deo sharing invitati on, the invitation message displays th e senderâÂÂs name or SIP address. If your device is not set to silent, it rings wh en you receive an invitation. If someone sends you a share invita tion and you are not within UMTS network coverage, you will not know t hat you received an invitation. When you receive an invitation , select from the following: â Yes â Accep t the invitation and activat e the sharing session. â No â Reject the invi tation. The sender receives a message that you rejected the invitation. You can al so press the end key to reject the invitation and end the voice ca ll. Select Options and from the following: â Pause â Pause the playing of a video clip. â Continue â Resume the playing of a video clip. â Mute â Mute the sound of the video clip. To end the sharing session, select Stop . To end the voice call, press the end key. When you en d the call, video sharing also ends. Log The Log application stores information about the communication history of the device. The device registers missed and received calls only if the ne twork supports these functions, the device is switch ed on, and within the network service area. To open the Log application, select Menu > Log . Recent calls To view missed, received, and dialled voice calls, select Recent calls . To clear all recent call lists, select Options > Clear recent calls . To clear one of the call regis ter s, open the register you want to erase, and select Options > Clear list . To clear an individual event, open a register, scroll to the event, and select Options > Delete . Recent calls toolbar Select Missed calls , Received calls , or Dialled nu mbers . On the toolbar, select from the following: Make calls é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 35
â Call â Call the desired contact. â Create message â Send a message to the desired contact. â Open Conta cts â Open the cont acts list. Call durat ion To view the approximate durat ion of received and dialled calls, select Call duration . Note: The actual invoice for calls and services from your service provider may vary, depending on network features, rounding off for bi lling, taxes, and so forth. Packet data You may be charged for your packet data connection s by the amount of data sent and re ce ived. To check the amount of data sent and received during packet data connections, select Packet data . Monitor all communication events To open the general log where you can monitor all v oice calls, text messages, or da ta and wireless LAN con nections registered by the device, open the general log tab . Subevents, such as a text message sen t in more than one pa rt and packet data connection s, are logged as one communication event. Connecti ons to your mailbox, multimedia messaging centre , or web pages are shown as packet data connections. To add a phone number from the log to your contacts, select Options > Save to Contacts . To copy a phone number from the log to the clipboard, and paste it into a text message, for example, select Op tions > Use number > Copy . To view how much data was trans ferred and how long a certain packet data connection lasted, scroll to an incoming or outgoing event indicated by GPRS , and select Options > View . To filter the log, select Options > Filter and a filter. To open the contacts list, select Options > Open Contac ts . To set the log duration, select Option s > Settings > Log duration . If you select No l og , no communication information is saved in the log. 5. Write text You can enter letters, numbers, and special characters in several different ways. The on -screen keyboards allow you to enter characters by tapping th em with your fingers or the stylus. Handwriting recognit ion allows you to write characters directly onto the sc reen using the stylus as a pen. Tap any text input field to enter letters, numbers, and special characters. Write text é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 36
Your device can complete words based on the built-in dictionary for the selected te xt input language. The device also learns new words from your input. On-screen keyboard To activate the on-scre en keyb oard in portrait mode, select and Mini QWERTY keybo ard . To activate the on-screen key board in landscape mode, select and Full screen QWERTY . When using the on-screen keyboa rd in portrait mode, tap the keys of the keyboard with th e stylus. When using the on- screen keyboard in landscape mode and in full-screen, you can tap the keys with your fingers. For an explanation of each key and its function, see the following figure. 1 â Close - Closes the on-screen keyboard view. 2 â Input me nu - Opens th e touch inpu t options menu, which includes commands such as Writing language . 3 â On-screen keyboard 4 â Shift and Caps Lock - Allows you to enter an uppercase character when you write in lowercase using the on-screen keyboard. When you tap this key in handwriting recognition mode, the last lowercase character switches to uppercase, and vice versa. To turn Caps Lock on, tap the key twice. The key will have a line under it. 5 â Numbers and symbols - Switches between numbers, most commonly used special charact ers, and alphabet characters in the on-screen keyboard. 6 â Character accents - Open s a pop-up window, in wh ich you can select language character a ccents. 7 â Space bar - Inserts a space. 8 â Enter - Moves the cursor to the next row or text input field. Additional functions ar e based on the current context (for example, in the web addre ss field of the web browser, it acts as a Go butt on). 9 â Move - Moves the touch i nput window. Drag the key to move the touch input window around the screen. 10 â Backspace - Deletes the previously entered character. 11 â Input mode - Opens a pop-up window, in which you can select from the available input methods. When you tap an item, the current input method view closes, and the selected one opens. Handwriting To activate handwriting mode, ta p and Handwriting . Write text é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 37
You can use the stylus as a pen to write as you would write text on paper . Write legible, upright characters on the text input area, and leave a space between each character. To teach the device your handwriti ng style, tap and Handwriting training . To enter letters and numbers (default mode), write words as you would n ormally. To select number mode, tap in the right pane of the input area. To enter non-Latin chara cters, tap the corresponding icon, if available. To write special characters, write them as you would normally. You can also tap in the right pane of the input area, and se lect a desired character from the pop-up table. To delete characters or move the cursor back, swipe backwards (see Figure 1). To insert a space, swipe forwards (see Figure 2). Alphanumeric keypa d Icons and functions Use the on-screen keypad ( Alphanumeric keypad ) to enter characters like you would with a trad itional phone keypad with numbers on the keys. For an explanation of each icon and its function, see the following figure. 1 â Close - Closes on-screen keypad ( Alphanumeric keypad ). 2 â Input menu - Opens th e touch input menu, which includes commands such a s Activate predicti ve text and Writing language . 3 â Text input indica tor - Open s a pop-up window, in which you can turn predictive text input modes on or off, change the character case, and swit ch between letter and number mode. 4 â Input mode - Opens a pop-up window, in which you can select from the available input modes. When you tap an item, Write text é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 38
the current input method view closes, and the selected one opens. 5 â Arrow keys - Moves th e cursor left or right. 6 â Backspace - Deletes the previously entered character. 7 â Number keys - Enters the desired numbers or characters according to the current case and input mode. 8 â Star - Opens a special characters table. 9 â Shift - Changes the chara cter case, turns predictive tex t input modes on or off, and switches between the alphabet and number modes. Traditional text input Tap a number key (1-9) repeat edly until the desired charact er appears. There are more chara cters available for a number key than are visible on the key. If the next letter is located on the same key as the present one, wait until the cursor appears (or move the cursor forward to end the time-out period), and enter the letter. To insert a space, tap 0 . To move the cursor to the next line, tap 0 three times. Predictive text input With predictive tex t input, you can enter any letter wit h a single tap of a key. Predictive text input is based on a built- in dictionary to which you can add new words. 1. To activate predictive text input for all editors on the device, tap , and select Activat e prediction , or quickly tap # twice. You can also tap , and select Activate pred ictive text . 2. To write the desired wor d, tap the keys 2-9. Tap each key only once for one letter. Fo r example, to write "Nokia" when the English dictionary is selected, tap 6 for N, 6 for o, 5 for k, 4 for i, and 2 for a. The word suggestion changes after each tap of a key. 3. When you finish writing th e word correctly, mo ve the cursor right to confirm it, or tap 0 to add a space. If the word is not correct, tap * repeatedly to view t he matching words the dictionary has found one by one. If the ? character is s hown after the word, the word is not in the dictionary. To add a wo rd to the dictionary, select Spell , enter the word using traditional text inpu t, and select OK . The word is added to the dict ionary. When th e dictionary is full, a new word replaces the oldest added word. 4. Start writing the next word. Switch betwee n text modes To turn predictive text input o ff for all editors in your device, tap , and select Deactivate predi ction or quickly double-tap # . Alternatively, you can ta p , and select Predicti ve text > Of f . Touch input settings Select Menu > Settings and Pho ne > Touch input . Write text é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 39
To configure text inpu t settings for the touch screen, select from the following: â Handwritin g training â Open the handwriting training application. Train the device to recogni se your handwriting better. This opt ion is not available in all languages. â Writing language â Define which language-specific characters in your handwrit ing are recognised and how your on-screen keyb oard is laid out. â Writing speed â Adjust the speed at which handwriting is recognised. â Guiding line â Show or hide the guiding line in the writing area. The guiding line helps you write in a straight line, and it also helps the device recognise your writing. â Pen trail widt h â Change the thickness of the text written with the st ylus. â Writing colour â Chan ge the colour of the text written with the stylus. 6. Contacts (phonebook) You can save and update conta c t information, such as phone numbers, home addresses, or e-mail addresses of your contacts. You can add a personal ringing ton e or a thumbnail image to a contact. Y ou can also create contact groups, which allow you to send text messages or e-ma il to many recipients at the same time. To open the contacts list, in the home screen, select . Save and edit names and numbers 1. To add a new contact to th e contacts list, s elect Options > New contact . 2. Tap a field to enter the information in the field. To close the text inpu t, select . Fill in the fields that you want, and select Done . To edit contacts , select a contact an d Option s > Edit . Contacts toolbar On the contacts list toolbar, select from the following: â Call â Call the desired contact. â Create message â Send a message to the desired contact. â New con tact â Create a new contact. Manage names and numbers To copy or delete a contact, or to send a contact as a busines s card to another device, tap and hold a contact, and select Copy , Delete , or Send business card . To delete several contacts at the same time, select Op tions > Mark/Unmark to mark the desired contacts, and to delete, select Option s > Delete . Contacts (phonebook) é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 40
To listen to the voice tag assigned to a contact, select the contact and Opti ons > Voice tag details > Options > Play voice tag . Default numbers and addresses You can assign defa ult numbers or addresses t o a contact. If a contact has se veral numbers or addresses , you can easily call or send a message to a cert ain number or address . The default number is also used in voice dialling. 1. In the contacts li st, select a c ontact. 2. Select Option s > Defaults . 3. Select a default to which you want to add a number or an address, and select Assign . 4. Select a number or an address you want to set as a default. The default number or address is underlined in the contact view. Ringing tones, imag es and call text for contacts You can define a ringing ton e for a contact or group , and an image and a call text for a contact. When the contact calls you, the device plays the selected ringing tone and sh ows the call text or image (if the callerâÂÂs ph one number is sent with the call and your device recognises it). To define a ringing tone for a cont act, select the c ontact, Options > Ringing tone , and a ringing tone. To define a ringing tone for a contact group, scroll to the contact group, select Opti ons > Ringing tone and a ringing tone. To define a call text for a contact, select the contact, select Options > Add call alert text . Tap the text field to enter the call text, and select . To add an image for a conta ct saved in the device memory, select the contact, Options > Add imag e , and an imag e from Gallery. To remove the ringing tone, select Default tone from the list of ringing tones. To view, change or remove the imag e from a contact, select the contact an d Option s > Image > View , Change , or Remove . Copy contacts When you open the contacts list for the first time, the device asks if you want to copy names and numbers from the SIM card to your device. To start copying, select OK . If you do not want to copy the contacts from the S IM card to your device, select Cancel . The device asks if you want to view the SIM card contacts in the contacts di rectory. To vi ew the contacts, select OK . The contacts list opens, and the names stored on your SIM card are indicated with . Contacts (phonebook) é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 41
SIM services For availability and informat ion on using SIM card services, contact your SIM card v endor . This may be the service provider or other vendor. SIM contacts To set the names a nd numbers stored on th e SIM card to be shown on the contacts list, select Options > Settings > Contacts to disp lay > SIM memory . You can add and edit SIM contacts, or call them. The numbers you save in th e contacts list may not be automatically sa ved to your SIM card. T o save numbers to the SIM card, select a contact and Options > Copy > SIM memory . To select whether the new contacts you enter are saved to your device o r your S IM card, select Options > Settings > Default saving memory > Phone memory or SIM memory . Fixed dialling You can restrict calls from yo ur device to selected phone numbers. To open the list of fixed dialling numbers, in the contacts list, select Opt ions > SIM numbe rs > Fixed dial contacts . This option is only show n if supported by your SIM card. You need your PIN2 code to activate and deactiv ate fixed dialling or edit your fixed dialling contacts. When fixed dialling is activate d, calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. To activate or deactivate fi xed dialling, select Options > Activate fixe d dialling or Deacti vate fixed dialling , and enter your PIN2 code. To add new numbers to the fixed dialling list, select Options > New SIM contact , or Options > Add from Contacts . When you us e fixed dialling, pa cket data connections are not possible, except when sending text messages over a pac ket data connection. For this, th e message centre number and the recipientâÂÂs phone number must be included on the fixed dialling list. 7. Messaging Only devices that have compat ible features can receive and display multimedia m essages. The ap pearance of a message may vary depending on the receivi ng device. Messaging main view Select Menu > Messaging (network service). Messag ing é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 42
To create a new message, select New message . Tip: To avoid rewriting message s that you send often, use texts in the Templates fold er in My folders. You can also create and save your own temp lates. Messaging contains the following folders: â Inbox â Received messages, except e-mail and cell broadcast messages, ar e stored here. â My folders â Organise your messages into folders. â Mailbox â Connect to your remote mailbox to retrieve your new e-mail messages, or view your previously retrieved e-mail messages offline. â Drafts â Draft messages tha t have not been sent are stored here. â Sent â The last mess ages that have been sent, excluding messag es sent using Bluet ooth connectivit y, are stored here. You can change the number of message s to save in this folder. â Outb ox â Messag es waiting to be sent are tem porarily stored in the outbox, for example, when your device is outside network coverage. â Delivery reports â You can request the network to send you a delivery report of the text messages and multimedia messa ges you have sen t (network service). Write and send messages Select Menu > Messaging . Important : Exercise caution when opening messages. Messages may contain ma licious software or othe rwise be harmful to your device or PC. Before you can create a multim edia message or write an e- mail, you must have the correct co nnection settings defined. The wireless network may limit the size of MMS messages. If the inserted picture exceeds this limit the device may make it smaller so that it can be sent by MMS. Check the size limit of e-mail messages wi th your service provider. If you attempt to send an e-mail messag e that exceeds the size limit of the e-mail server , the message is left in the Outbox folder, and the device attempts to resend it periodically. Sending an e-mail requires a da ta connection, and continuous attempts to resen d the e-mail may incur charges from your service provider. In the Outbox folder, you can delete such a message or move it to the Drafts folder. 1. To send a message, select New message . To send an audio or e-mail message, select Options > Create message , and the relevant option. 2. To select recipients or groups from the contacts list, select To . To enter the number or e- mail address manually , tap the To field. 3. In the Subject field, enter the subject of the e-mail. To change the fields that are visible, select Options > Message header fields . 4. To write the message, tap the message field. Messag ing é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 43
5. To add an object to a message, s elect and the relevant type of cont ent. The message typ e may change to multimedia message based on the inserted content. 6. To capture an image or record a video or sound clip for a multimedia message, select Options > Insert content and New image , New vi deo clip , or New sou nd clip . 7. To add an attachment to an e-mail, select Options > Insert content and the relevant type of content. E-mail attachments a re indicated by . 8. To send the messag e, select , or press the call key. Your device supports text me ssages beyond the limit for a single me ssage. Longer me ssages are sent as two or more messages. Your se rvice provid er may charge accordingly. Characters with accents or oth er marks, and charac ters from some language options, take up more space, and limit the number of characters that can be sent in a single message. You may not be able to send video clips that are saved in the MP4 file format or that exceed the size limit of the wireless network in a multimedia message. Messaging inbox Receive messages Select Menu > Messaging and Inbox . In the Inbox folder, indicates an unread text message, an unread mult imedia message, an unread audio message, and data received through Bluetooth connectivity. When you receive a message, and 1 new mes sage are displayed in the home screen. To open the message, select Show . To open a message in the Inbox folder, select the message. To reply to a received message, select Options > Reply . Multimedia messages Important : Exercise caution when opening messages. Messages may contain ma licious software or othe rwise be harmful to your device or PC. You may receive a notification that a multimed ia message is waiting in the multimedia messa ge centre. To start a packet data connection to retrieve the message to your device, select Options > Retrieve . When you open a multimedia message ( ), you may see an image and a mess age. is shown if sound is included, or if video is included. To play the sound or the video, select the indicator. To see the media objects that have been included in the multimedia message, select Option s > Objects . If the message includes a multimedia presentation, is displayed. To play the presen tation, select the indicator. Messag ing é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 44
Data, settings, and web service messages Your device can receive many ki nds of messages that contain data, such as business cards, rin ging tones, operator logos, calendar entries, and e-mail notifications. You may also receive settings from your service provider in a configuration message. To save the data from the messag e, select Options and the corresponding option. Web service messages are notifications (for example, news headlines) and m ay contain a text message or a link. For availability and subscription, contact your service provider. Mailbox Define e-mail settings Select Menu > Messaging and Mail box . To use e-mail, you must have defined a valid internet access point (IAP) in the device an d have defined your e-mail settings correctly. You must have a separat e e-mail account. Follow the instructions given by your remote mailbox and internet service provider (ISP). If you select Messagi ng > Mailbox and have n ot set up your e-mail account, you are prompted to do so. To start creating the e-mail settings with the mailbox guide, select Start . When you create a new mailbox, the n ame you give to the mailbox replaces Mailbox in the Messaging main view. You can have up to six mailbox es. Open the mailbox Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. When you open the mailbox, th e device asks if you want to connect to the mailbox . To conn ect to y our ma ilbox an d retrieve new e-mail headers or messages, select Yes . When you view messages online, you are continuously connected to a remo te mailbox using a data connection. To view previously retrieved e-mail messages offline, select No . To create a new e-mail message, select Options > Create message > E-mail . Retrieve e-mail messages Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. If you are offline, select Options > Connect to open a connection to the remote ma ilbox. Important : Exercise caution when opening messages. Messages may contain ma licious software or othe rwise be harmful to your device or PC. 1. When you have an open connection to a remote mailbox, select Options > Retrieve e-mail > New to retrieve all new messages, Selected to retrieve only selected messages, or All to retrieve all messages from the mailbox. To stop retrieving messag es, select Cancel . Messag ing é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 45
2. To close the connection an d view the e-mail messages offline, select Options > Disconnect . 3. To open an e-mail message, select the message. If the e- mail message has not been retrieved and you are offline, you are asked if you want to retrieve th is message from the mailb ox. To view e-mail attachments, open the message, and select the attachment field indicated by . If the attachment has not been retrieved to the device, select Options > Ret rieve . To retrieve e-mail messages automatica lly, select Op tions > E-mail sett ings > Automatic re trieval . Setting the device to retrieve e-mai l automatically may involve the transmission of la rge amounts of data through your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information abou t data transmission cha rges. Delete e-mail messages Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. To delete the con tents of an e-mail message from the device while still retaining it in the remote mailbox, select Options > Delete > Phone only . The device mirrors the e-mail headers in the remote mailbox. Although you delete the messag e content, the e-mail header stays in your device. If you want to remove the header as well, you must be co nnected to th e s erver when deleting the message from your device and the remote ma ilbox. It there is no connection to the server , the header is deleted when you make a connection from your device to the remote mailbox again to upda te the status. To delete an e-mail from the device and the remote mailbox, select Option s > Delete > Phone and serve r . To cancel deleting an e-mail that has been marked to be deleted from the device and server during the next connection ( ), select O ptions > Restore . Disconnect from the mailbox When you are online, to end the data connection to the remote mailbox, select Opt ions > Disconnect . View messag es on a SIM card Select Menu > Messaging and Options > SIM messages . Before you can view SIM messag es, you must copy them to a folder in your device. 1. Select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark or Mark all to mark messages. 2. Select Options > Copy . A list of folders opens. 3. To start copying, selec t a folder. To view the messages, open the folder. Cell broadcast messages Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Cell broadcast . Cell broadcast (network service) allows you to receive messages on various topics, su ch as weather or traffic conditions, from your service provider. For available topics and relevant topic numbers, co ntact your service provider. Messag ing é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 46
Cell broadcast messages cannot be received in UMTS networks. A packet data co nnection may prevent cell broadcast reception. Service commands Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Service commands . With service comman ds (network service) you can enter and send service requests (also known as USSD commands), such as activation comman ds for netw ork services, to your service provider. Messaging settings The settings may be preconfigured in your device, or you may receive them in a messa ge. To enter settings manua lly, fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or an asterisk. Some or all message centres or access points may be preset for your device by your service provide r, and you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. Text message settings Select Menu > Messaging and Opti ons > Settin gs > Text message . Select from the following: â Message centres â View a list of all text message centres that have been defined. â Message centre in use â Select which mess age centre to use to deliver text messages. â Character encoding â To use character conversion to another encoding syst em when available, select Re duced support . â Receive report â Select whether the network sends delivery rep orts on your messages (network service). â Message validity â Select how long the message centre resends your message if the first attemp t fails (network service). If the message cannot be sent within the validity period, the mes sage is deleted fro m the message cent re. â Message sent as â To learn if your message centre is able to convert text messag es into these other format s, contact your service provider. â Preferred connection â Select the connection to use. â Reply via same centre â Select whet her you want the reply message to be sent using the same text message centre number (net work service). Multimedia message settings Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settings > Multimedia message . Select from the following: â Image size â Define the size of the image in a multimedia message. â MMS creation mode â If you select Guided , the device informs you if you try to send a mess age that may not be supported by the recipient. If you select Restricted , the device prevents you from sending mes sages that may not be supported. To include co ntent in your messages without notifi cations, select Free . Messag ing é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 47
â Access point in use â Select which access point is used as the preferred connection. â Multimedia retrie val â Select how you want to receive messages. To receive m essages automati cally in your home network, select Auto in home netw. . Outsid e your home network, you receive a notification th at there is a message to retrieve in the multimedia message centre. If you select Always automatic , your device automatically makes an active packet data connection to retrieve t he message both in and outs ide your home network. â Allow anonymous msgs. â Select whether you want to reject messages from an anonymous sender. â Receive adverts â Select whe ther you want to receive multimedia message adv ertisements. â Receive reports â Select whether you wa nt the status of the sent message to be shown in the log (network service). â Deny report sending â Select whether you wa nt to prevent your device from sending delivery reports of received messages. â Message validity â Select for how long the message centre resends your message if the first attempt fails (network service). If the me ssage cannot be sent wi thin this time period, the message is deleted from the message centre . E-mail settings Manage mailboxes Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settin gs > E- mail . To select which mailbox you want to use to send and receive e-mail, select Mailbox in use and a mailbox. To remove a mailbox and its messages from your device, select Mailboxes , tap the mailbox to be removed if it is not already highlight ed, and select Options > Delete . To create a new mailbox, select Mailboxes > Options > New mailbox . The name you give to the new mailbox replaces Mailbox in the Mess aging main view. You ca n have up to six mailboxes. Select Mailboxes and a mailbo x to change the con nection settings , user sett ings, r etr ieval settings, and automatic retrieval settings. Instant messaging Select Menu > Applications > IM . Instant messaging (I M) (network service) allows you to chat with other people using instan t messages and join discussion forums (IM groups) with spec ific topics. Various service providers maintain compatible IM servers th at you can log in to after you register to an IM service. Service providers may differ in their support of features. Before you can us e Instant messaging, y ou must save t he settings to access the service that you want to use. The settings may be preconfigured in your device, or you may receive the settings as a co nfiguration messa ge from the service provider that offers the IM service. You can also e nter the settings manually. Personal ise your de vice é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 48
8. Personalise your device You can personalis e your device by chan ging the home screen, tones, or themes. Change t he look of yo ur device Select Menu > Settings and Pe rsonal > Themes . You can use themes to change the look of the display, such as wallpaper and main menu lay out. To change the theme tha t is used for all the applications in your device, select Gen eral . To preview a theme before activating it, scroll to the theme, and wait for a few second s. To activate the theme, select Op tions > Set . The activ e theme is indicated by . To change the layout of the main menu, select Menu . To change the look of the home screen, select Home screen theme . To have a wallpaper image or a slide show of changing images as the background in the home screen, select Wallpaper > Image or Slide sh ow . To change the image displayed in the home screen when a call is received, select Call image . Profiles Select Menu > Settings and Pe rsonal > Profiles . You can use profiles to set and customise the ringing tones, message alert tones, and ot her tones for different events, environments, or caller groups . The name of the selected profile is displayed at the top of the home screen. If the General profile is in use, only the date is displayed. To change a profile, scroll to the profile, and select Options > Activate . To personalise a profile, scroll to the profile, and select Options > Personalise . Select the setting you wa nt to change. To set the profile to be active until a certain time within the next 24 hours, scroll t o the profile, select Options > Timed , an d set the time. When the time expires, the profile changes back to the previously active non-timed profile. When the profile is timed, is displayed in the home screen. The Offline profile cannot be timed. To create a new profile, select Op tions > Cre ate new . Personali se your de vice é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 49
9. Music folder Music player Warning: Listen to mu sic at a mod erate level. Continuous exposure to high volume m ay damage your hearing. Do not hold the device near your ea r when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. Music player supports file format s such as AAC, AAC , eAAC , MP3, and WM A. Music pl ayer does not n ecessarily s upport all features of a file format or a ll the variations of file formats. You can also use Music playe r to listen to podcasts. Podcasti ng is the method for delivering au dio or video content over the internet using either RSS or Atom technologies for playback on mobil e devices an d computers. You can transf er music from other compatible devices t o your device. Play a song or a podcast To open Music player, select Menu > Music > Music player . You may have to refresh the music and podcast libraries after you have updated the song or podcast selection in your device. To add all av ailable items to the library, select Options > Refresh library . To play a song or a podcast: 1. Select categories to navigate to the song or podcasts you want to hear. 2. To play an item, select the item from the list. To pause playback, tap ; to resume, tap . To fast-forward or rewind, tap and hold or . To go to the next i tem, tap . To return to the beginning of the item, tap . To sk ip to th e previous item, tap again within 2 seconds after a s ong or podcast has started. To turn random play ( ) on or off, select Options > Shuffle play . To repeat the current item ( ), all items ( ), or to turn repeat off, select Options > Repeat . If you play podcasts, shuffle and repeat are auto matically turned off. To adjust the volu me, press the volume key. To modify the tone of the music playback, select Options > Equaliser . Music folder é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 50
To modify the balance and ster eo image or to enhance the bass, select Options > Settings . To return to the home screen and leave the player playing in the background, press the end key. To close the player, select Option s > Exit . Playlists Select Menu > Music > Music player and Playlist s . To view details of the playlist, select Optio ns > Playli st details . Create a playlist 1. Select Option s > New playl ist . 2. Enter a name for the playlist, an d select OK . 3. To add songs now, select Yes ; or to add the songs later, select No . 4. If you select Yes , select artists to find the songs you want to add to the playlist. Select Add to add items. To show the song list un de r an artist title, select Expand . To hide the song list, select Collapse . 5. When you have made your selections, select Done . If a compatible memory card is inserted, the playlist is saved to the memory card. To add more songs later, when viewing the playlist, select Options > Add song s . To add songs, albums, a rtists, genres, and composers to a playlist from the different view s of the music menu, sele ct an item and Options > Add to playlist > Saved playlist or New playlist . To remove a song from a playlist, select Options > Remove . This does not delete the song from the device; it only removes it from the playlist. To reorder songs in a playlist, select the song you want to move, and Optio ns > Reorder playlist . To grab a so ng and drop it to a new position, se lect the song in the desired position and Drop . To finish reordering the playlist, select Done . Podcasts Select Menu > Music > Music player an d Podcasts . The podcast menu displays the podcasts available in the device. Podcast episodes have three s tates: never played, pa rtially played, and completely played . If an episode is partially played, it plays from the last playback position the next time it is played. If an episode has never been played or completely played, it plays from the beginn ing. Transfer music from a computer You can use the followi ng methods to tran sfer music: â To view your device on a computer as a mass memory device where you can transfer any data files, ma ke the connection with a compatible USB data cable or Bluetooth connectivity. If you are using a USB c able, select Mass storage as the connection mode. A compatible memory card must be insert ed in the device. Music fo lder é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 51
â To synchronise music wi th Windows Media Pla yer, connect a compatible USB data cable and select Media transfer as the connection mode. A compatible memory card must be inserted in the device. To change the defaul t USB connection mode, select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > USB > USB conn ection mode . Nokia Music Store Select Menu > Music > Music store . In the Nokia Music Store (network service) you can search, browse, and purchase music to download to your device. To purchase music, you first need to register for the service. To access the Nokia Music Store, you mus t have a valid internet access point in the device. Nokia Music Store is not availabl e for all countries or regions. Nokia Music Store settings The availability and appeara nce of the Nokia Music Store settings may vary. The settings may also be predefined and not editable. You may be asked to select the access point to use when connecting to the Nokia M usic Store. Select Default access point . In the Nokia Music Store, you m ay be able to edit the settings by selecting Options > Settings . Nokia Podcasting With the Nokia P odcast ing appl ication (network service), you can search, discover, subscrib e to, and download podcasts over the air, and play, manag e, and share audio and video podcasts with your device. Podcasting settings To open Nokia Podcasting, select Menu > Music > Podcast ing . Before using Nokia Podcasting, define your connection and download settings. The recommended connection method is WLAN. Check with your service provider for term s and data service fees before using different connection methods. For example, a flat rate data plan can allo w large data transfers for one monthly fee. Connection settings To edit the connection settings, select Options > Settings > Connection and from the fo llowing: â Default access point â Select the access point to define your connection to the internet. â Search service URL â Define the podcast se arch service URL to be used in searches. Download settings To edit the download settings, select Options > Settings > Download and from the following: â Save to â Define the location where you want to save your podcasts. Music folder é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 52
â Update interval â Define how of ten podcasts a re updated. â Next update d ate â Define the date of the next automati c update. â Next update ti me â Define the time of the next automati c update. Automatic updates only occur if a specific default access point is selected and Nokia Podc asting is running. If Nokia Podcasting is not running, t he automatic updates are not activated. â Download limit (%) â Define the percentage of memory that is reserved for podcast downloads. â If li mit excee ds â Define what to do if the downloads exceed the download limit. Setting the application to retrieve podcasts automatically may involve the tran smission of large amounts of data through your serv ice providerâÂÂs network. Contact your service provider for information abou t data transmission cha rges. To restore the defau lt settings, select Options > Restore default in the settings view. Downloads After you have subscribed to a podcast, from directories, search, or by entering a URL , you can manage, download , and play episodes in Podcas ts . To see the podcasts you have subscribed to, select Podcasting > Podcasts . To see individual episode titl es (an episode is a particular media file of a podca st), select the podcast title. To start a download, select the episode title. To dow nload or to continue to download select ed or marked episodes, select Download . You can downlo ad multip le episodes at the same time. To play a portion of a podcast during download or after partial downloading, se lect th e podcast and Opt ions > Play preview . Fully downloaded podcasts can be found in the Podcasts folder, but are not shown unti l the library is refreshed. Radio Listen to the radio Select Menu > Music > Radio . The FM radio depends on an an tenna other than the wireless device antenna. A com patible headset or ac cessory needs to be attached to the device for the FM radio to function properly. When you open the application for the first time, you can choose to ha ve the local st ations tuned automatically. To listen to the next or the previous station, select or . To mute the radio, select . Select Options and from the following: â Stations â View saved radio stations. â Tune stations â Search for radio stations. â Save â Save the radio station. Music fo lder é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 53
â Activate loudspeaker or Deactivate loudsp eaker â Turn the loudspeaker on or off. â Alternativ e frequenc ies â Select wheth er you want the radio to automatically search for a better RDS frequency for the station if the frequency level becomes low. â Play in background â Return to the home screen wit h the radio playing in th e background. Manage radio stations Select Menu > Music > Radio . To listen to saved stations, select Options > Stations , and select a station from the list. To remove or rename a station, select Options > Stations > Options > Delete or Rename . To set the desired frequency manually, select Options > Tune stations > Options > Manual tuning . 10. Gallery To store and organise your images, video clips, sound clips, and streaming links, s elect Menu > Gallery . Tip: To access the images and video clips view q uickly, tap the media key ( ) to open the media bar, and select . View and organise files Select Menu > Gallery and from the following: â Image s & videos â View images in the image viewer and videos in Video centre. â Songs â Open Music player. â Sound clips â Listen to sound clips. â Other med ia â View presentations. You can browse, open, and crea te folders; and mark, copy, move, and add items to folders. Files stored on your compatible memory card (if inserted) are indicated with . To open a file, select a file fr om the list. Video clips and files with the .ram file extension op en and play in Video centre, and music and soun d clips in Music player. To copy or move files to the memory card (if inserted) or device memory, select a file, Options > Organise > Copy or Move , and from the available options. View images and videos Select Menu > Gallery and Images & vide os . The images, video clips, and fo lders are displayed in a loop and ordered by date and time. To browse the files one by one, swipe left or right. To browse files in groups, swipe up or down. Gallery é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 54
To open a file, select a file from the list. To zoom in an image, use the volume key in your device. Select Options and from the following: â Edit â Edit a video clip or an image. â Use file â To use the image as wallpaper in the home screen, select Set as wall paper . To set the image as a generic call image, select Set as call image . To set the image as a call image for a contact, select Ass ign to contact . To set the video clip as a ringing tone, select As ri nging tone . To assign the video clip as a ringing tone for a contact, select Assign to contact . The toolbar helps you select fr equently used functions with images, video clips, and folders. From the toolbar, sele ct from the following: â Send â Send the selected image or video clip. â Edit â Edit the selected image or video clip. â Delete â Delete the selected image or video clip. Organise images and videos Select Menu > Gallery and Images & video s > Opti ons and from the following: â Folder options â T o move files to folders, select Move to folder . To create a new folder, select New folder . â Organise â To copy files to folders, select Copy . To move files to folders, select Move . â View by â View files by date, title, or size. TV-out mode Select Menu > Settings . To view the captured images and video clips on a compatible TV, use a Nokia V ideo-Out Cable. Before viewing the images an d video clips on TV, you may need to configure the TV-out settings for the applicable TV system and TV aspe ct ratio. Select Phone > Accessories > TV-Out . In TV-out mode, you cann ot use the TV a s the camera viewfinder. To watch images and video cl ips on TV, do the following: 1. Connect a Nokia Video-Out Cable to the vi deo input of a compatible TV. 2. Connect the other end of the Nok ia Video-Out Cable to the Nokia AV Connector of your device. 3. You may need to select the cable mode. 4. Select Menu > Gallery , and browse for the file you want to view. Gallery é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 55
The images are shown in the image viewer, and the video clips are played in RealPlayer. All audio, including the active calls, stereo video clip sound, key tone, and ringing tone, is routed to the TV when the Nokia Video -Out Cable is connected to the device. You can use the device microphone nor mally. The opened image is displayed in full-s creen on the TV. When you open an image in the thumbnail view while it is viewed on the TV, zooming in is not available. When you open a highlighted video clip, RealPlayer starts playing the video clip on the de vice display and the TV sc reen. You can view images as a slide show on TV. All items in an album or marked images are displayed on the TV in full- screen. The quality of the TV image may vary due to different resolution of the devices. Wireless radio signals, such as incoming ca lls, may cause interference in the TV image. 11. Camera Your Nokia 5800 XpressMusic has two cameras, a high resolution camera on the back of the device, and a lower resolution camera on the fron t. You can u se both cameras to capture images and record videos. Your device supp orts an image capture resolution of 2048x1536 pixels. The image resolution in this guide may appear different. Activate the camera To activate the camera, press t he capture key. To activate the s econdary camer a, activate the main camer a, and select Option s > Use secondary came ra . Image capture On-screen controls and indicators for still image capture The still image viewfinder displays the following: 1 â Capture mode indicator Camera é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 56
2 â Zoom slider. To turn the zoom slider on and off, tap the screen. 3 â Capture icon. Tap to capture an image. 4 â Flash mo de. Tap to chan ge settings. 5 â Capture settings. T ap to change settings. 6 â Battery charge level indica tor 7 â Image resolution indicator 8 â Image counter (the estimated num ber of images you can capture using the curr ent image quality settin g and available memory) 9 â Memory in use. Depending on the setup of your device, there are the following op tions: device memory ( ), memory card ( ), or mass memory ( ). 10 â GPS signal indica tor Capture and recording settings To open the capture and recording settings view before capturing an image or recording a video clip, select Menu > Applications > Camera and . The capture and recording setti ngs view provides you with shortcuts to different items and settings before capturing an image or recording a video clip. The capture and recording setti ngs return to the default settings after you close th e camera. Select from the following: â Select the scene. or â Switch between video and image mode. or â Sho w or hi de the viewfin der gr id (imag es only ). â Activate the self-timer (images only). â Open Gallery. Image se ttings: â Select a colour effect. â Adjust the white balanc e. Select the current lighting conditions. This allows the ca me ra to repro duce colour s more accurately. â Adjust the ex posure compensation (images only). If you are shooting a da rk subject against a very light background, such as snow, adju st the exposure to 1 or 2 to compensate for the backgr ound brightness. For light subjects against a dark ba ckground, use -1 or -2. Adjust light sensitivity (i mages only). Increase the light sensitivity in low light condit ions to avoid too dark images and blurry imag es. Increasing the ligh t sensitivity may also increase the image noise. Adjust contrast (images only). Adjust the difference between the lightest and da rkest parts of the image. Adjust sharpness (images only) . The screen display changes to match the settings you define. The capture settings are shoo ting-mode specific. Switching between the modes does not reset the defined settings. Camera é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 57
If you select a new scene, th e capture settings are replaced by the selected scene. You ca n change the capture settings after selecting a scene if needed. Saving the captured image may ta ke longer if you change the zoom, lighting, or colour settings. Capture images When capturing an i mage, note the following: â Use both hands to keep the camera still. â The quality of a digita lly zoomed image is lower than that of a non-zoomed image. â The camera goes into battery saving mode if there are no actions for about a mi nute. To continue captu ring images, slide the lock switch on the side of the device. To capture an image: 1. To switch from video mode to image mode, if necessary, select > . 2. To lock the focus on an object, press the capture key halfway down (not available in landscape or sport scene modes). A green locked focus in dicator is displayed. If the focus was not locked, a yellow focus indicator is displayed. Release the capture key, and pres s it halfway down again. You can also captu re an imag e without locking the focus. 3. To captur e an image, press the capture key. Do not move the device before the image is saved and the fina l image displayed. To zoom in or out when capturing an image, use the zoom key in your device. To leave the camera open in the background and use other applications, press the menu ke y. To return to the camera, press and hold the capture key. After capturing an image After you capt ure an image, sele ct from the following options (available only if you have selected Options > Settings > Show captured image > Yes ): â Send â Send the image in a multimedia or e-mail message, or through connection methods such as Bluetooth connectivity. To send the image to th e person you are talking to, select Send to caller during a call. â Delete â Delete the image. â â Open Gallery. To use the image as wallpaper in the home screen, select Options > Use image > Set as wallpaper . To set the image as a defau lt call image to be used for every call situation, select Options > Use image > Se t as call image . To assign the image to a co ntact, Options > Use image > Assign to contact . To return to the viewfinder to capture a new im age, press the capture key. Camera é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 58
Flash and video light Keep a safe distance when usin g the flash. Do not use the flash on people or animals at close range. Do not cover the flash while taking a picture. The camera of your device has a dual LED flash f or low light conditions. To select the desired flash mo de, tap the current flash mode indicator, which is one of the following: Automatic , Reduce red , On , and Off . Avoid touching the flash LEDs when the back cover has been removed. The LEDs may get hot after prolonged usage. Video light To increase light levels when recording video in low light, select Scenes A scene helps yo u to find the right colo ur and lighting set tings for the current environment. Th e settings of each scene have been set according to a ce rtain style or environment. The default scene in image mode is Automa tic , and in video mode Automatic (bo th indicated with ). To change the scene, select > Scene modes and a scene. To make your ow n scene suitab le for a certain environment, scroll to User defined , and select Change . In the user defined scene you can adjust different lighting and colour settings. To copy the settings of another scene, select Based on scene mode and the desired scene. To save the changes and return to the sc enes list, select Back . To act ivate your own scene, select User defin ed > Select . Location information You can automati cally add capt ure location information to the file details of the captured material. Select Menu > Applications > Camera . To add location information to all captured material, select Options > Settings > Show GPS info > On . Location information indicators: â â Location information un available. GPS sta ys on in the background for several minutes. If a satellite connection is found an d the indicator changes to within that time, all the images captured and video clips recorded during that time are tag ged based on the received GPS positioning information. â â Location information is available. Location information is added to the file details. You in the image â self-timer Use the self-timer to delay the capture so that you can include yourself in the image. To set the self-timer delay, select > , and the delay needed before the image is captured. To activate the self-timer, select Activate . The stopwa tch icon on the screen blinks and the remaining time is displayed when the timer is ru nning. The camera captures the image after the selected delay elapses. Camera é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 59
To switch off the self-timer, select > > . Tip: Select 2 seco nds to keep your hand steady when capturing an image. Capture images in a sequence Select Menu > Applications > Camera . The sequence mode is availabl e only in the main camera. To start capturing images in a quick sequence, select Menu > Applications > Camera and > Sequence . T o close the settings window, tap t he screen above the window. Press an d hold the capture key. The devi ce captures images until you release the key or until the memory runs out. I f you press the capture key br iefly, the devi ce captures six image in a sequence. To capture two or more images in defined intervals, select the desired time interval. To capture th e images, press the capture key. To stop ca pturing images, select Cancel . The number of images captured depends on the available memory. The captured images are displayed in a grid. If yo u used a time interval, only the last ca ptured image is displayed. You can view the other images in Gallery. You can also use sequence mode with the self-timer. To return to the sequence mode viewfinder, press the captur e key. To deactivate sequence mode, select > Seque nce mode > Off . Video recording Record videos 1. To switch from image mode to video mode, if necessary, select and the video mode . 2. To start recording, pre ss the capture key or tap . A red record icon is displayed, and a tone sounds. 3. To pause recording at any time, s elect Paus e . To resume, select Conti nue . If you pause recording and do not press any key within one minute, the recording stops. To zoom in or out of the subject, use the zoom key in your device. 4. To stop recording, press the capture key. The video clip is automatically saved in Gallery . The maximum leng th of a video clip is approximately 30 seconds with sharing quality and 90 minutes with other quality se ttings. Video recording on-screen co ntrols and indicators The video viewfinder displays the following: 1 â Capture mode indicator Camera é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 60
2 â Audio mute on indicator 3 â Capture icon. Tap to record video. 4 â Video light on/off. 5 â Recording settings. Tap to change settin gs. 6 â Battery charge level indica tor 7 â Video quality indicator. To change this setting, select Options > Settings > Video quality . 8 â Video clip file type 9 â Available recording time. When you are recording, the current video length i ndicator also shows the e lapsed and remaining time. 10 â The location to which the video clip is saved. After recording a video clip After you record a video clip, select from the following options (available only if you have selected Options > Settings > Show last captured video > Yes ): â Play â Play the video clip you just recorded. â Delete â Delete the video clip. â Send or press the call key â Send the video clip in a multimedia or e-mail mess age, or through connection methods such as Bluetooth connectivity. You may not be able to send vide o clips save d in the MPEG4 file format in a multimedia message. To send the video clip to the person you are ta lking to, select ( Send to cal ler ) during a call. To return to the viewfinder to record a new video clip, press the capture key. 12. Positioning (GPS) You can use applications su ch as Maps and GPS data to find out your location, or measure distances and coordinates. These applications requ ire a GPS connection. About GPS The coordinates in the GPS are expressed in the degrees and decimal degrees format usin g the international WGS-84 coordinate system. The Global Positioning System (GPS) is operated by the government of the United States , which is solely responsible for its accuracy and maintenanc e. The accuracy of location Positioning (GPS ) é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 61
data can be affected by adju stments to GPS satellites made by the United States government and is subject to change with the United States Departmen t of Defense civil GPS policy and the Federal Radionavigation Plan. Accuracy can also be affected by poor satellite geom etry. Availability and quality of GPS signals may be affected by your location, bui ldings, natural obstacles, and weather conditions. The GPS receiver should only be used outdoors to allow reception of GPS signals. Any GPS should not be used for precise location measurement, and you should ne ver rely solely on location data from the GPS receiver an d cellular radio networks for positioning or navigation. To enable or disable different positioning methods, select Menu > Applicatio ns > Locat ion and Posi tioning > Position ing metho ds . Assisted GPS (A-GPS) Your device also supports Assisted GP S (A-GPS). A-GPS is a network service. Assisted GPS (A-GPS) is used to ret rieve assistance data over a packet data connection, whic h assists in calculating th e coordinates of your current lo cation when your device is receiving signals from satellites. When you activat e A-GPS, your device receives useful satellite information from an assistan ce data server over the cellular network. With the help of assisted data, your device can obtain the GPS position faster. Your device is preconfigured to use the Nokia A-GPS service, if no service provider-specific A-GPS settings are available. The assistance data i s retrieve d from the Nokia A-GPS service server only when needed. You must ha ve an internet a cce ss point defined in the device to retrieve assistance data from the Nokia A-GPS service over a packet data connection. To defi ne an access point for A-GPS, select Menu > Applicat ions > Loca tion and Positio ning > Positi oning server > Access point . A wireless LAN (WLAN) access p oint cannot be used for this service. Only a packet data internet access point can be used. Your device asks for the inte r net access point when GPS is used for the first time. Hold your device correctly When using the GPS receiver, ensure you do not cover the antenna with your hand. Establishing a GPS connection may take from a couple of seconds to several min utes. Establishing a GPS connection in a vehicle may take longer. The GPS receiver draws its power from the device battery. Using the GPS receiver may drain the battery faster. Position ing (GPS ) é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 62
Tips on creating a GPS connection Check satellite signal status To check how many satellites you r device has found, and whether your device is receiv ing satellite signals , select Menu > Applicatio ns > Locat ion and GPS dat a > Position > Optio ns > Satel lite status . If your device has found satellites, a bar for each satellite is shown in the satellite info view. The longer the bar, the stronger the satellite signal. When your device has received enough data from the satellite signal to calcula te the coordinates of your location, the bar turns blue. To view the positions of found sate llites, select Chg. vi ew . Initially your device must rece ive signals from at least fou r satellites to be able to calculate th e coordinates of your location. When the in itial calculation has been made, it may be possible to continue calc ulating the coordinates of your location with three satellite s. However, the accuracy is generally better when more satellites are found. If your device cannot find the satellite sig nal, consider the following: â If you are indoors, go outdoors to receive a better signal. â If you are outdoors, move to a more open space. â Ensure that your hand does not cover the GPS antenna of your device. â If the weather conditions are ba d, the signal strength may be affected. â Some vehicles have tinted (athermic) w indows, which may block the satellite signals. Position requ ests You may receive a request from a network service to receive your position information. Service providers may offer information about local topics, such as weather or traffic conditions, based on the location of your device. When you receive a position request, a message is displayed showing the service that is making the request. Select Accept to allow your position information to be sent or Reject to deny the request. Landmarks Select Menu > Applications > Location and Landm arks . With Landma rks, you can sav e the position information of specific locations in your device. You can sort the saved locations into different categories, such as business, and add other information to them, s uch as addresses. You can use your saved landmarks in compatib le applications, su ch as GPS data. GPS coordinates are expressed in the degrees and decimal degrees format using the inte rnational WGS-84 coordinate system. Select Options and from the following: Positioning (GPS ) é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 63
â New landma rk â Create a new landmark. To ma ke a positioning request for your current location, select Current positio n . To enter the position information manually, select Enter manually . â Edit â Edit or add information to a saved landmark (for example, a street address). â Add to category â Add a landmark to a category in Landmarks. Select each catego ry to which you w ant to add the landmark. â Send â Send one or several landmarks to a compatible device. Your received landmarks are placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging. You can sort your landmarks into preset categories, and create new categories. To ed it and create new landmark categories, open the cate gories tab, and select Options > Edit categori es . GPS data GPS data is designed to prov ide route guidance information to a selected destination, position information about your current location, a nd traveling information, such as th e approximate distance to the destination and app roximate duration of travel. Select Menu > Applications > Location and GPS data . Positioning settings Select Menu > Appli cations > Location and Positioning . Positioning methods â Integrated GPS â Use the integrated GPS receiver of your device. â Assisted GPS â Use Assisted GP S (A-GPS ) to receive assistance dat a from an assistance dat a server. â Bluetooth GPS â Use a compatible external GPS receiver with Bluetooth connectivity. â Network based â Use information from the cellular network (network service). Positioning server To define an access point, an d positioning server for A-GPS, select Positionin g server . The positioning server may be preset by your service provider, and you may not be able to edit the settings. Notation settings To select which measurement system you want to use for speeds and di stances, select Measurement system > Metric or Imp erial . To define in which format the coordinate information is shown in your device, select Coordinate format , and the desired format. Maps é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 64
13. Maps Maps Select Menu > Maps . With Maps, you can see you r current location on the map, browse maps for different cities and countries, search for addresses and different points of interest, plan routes from one location to another, and save locations and send them to compatible devices. You can also purchase licences for extra services, such as travel guides, traffic informa tion, and navigation service with voice guidance. These services are not available for all countries or regions. When you use Maps for the first time, you may need to select an internet access poin t for downloading maps. If you browse to an area whi ch is not covered by maps al ready downloaded in your device, a map for the area is automatically dow nloaded through the internet. Some maps may be available in your device or memory card. You can also use the Nokia Map Loader PC software to download maps. To install Nokia Map Loader to a compatible PC, see www.nokia.com/maps . Tip: To avoid data transfer co sts, you can also use Maps without an internet connection, and browse the maps that are saved in your device or on a memory card. Almost all digital ca rtography is inaccurate and incomplete to some extent. Never rely solely on the ca rtography that you download for use in this device. Downloading maps an d extra services may inv olve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. For more information on data transmission charges, contact your service provider. Network positioning You can use the mobile network to find your current location even indoors. This is faster bu t less accurate than with GPS, and you canno t use the location as a starting point for navigation. To use the mobile network fo r positioning, start the Maps application, and select Network bas ed as the positioning method. When your GPS connec tion is ready, it replaces mobile network as th e positioning method. Move on a map Select Menu > Maps . To z oo m i n t o yo u r GP S po s it i o n o r y ou r la s t k n o wn lo c a ti o n, select Option s > My positi on . When the GPS connection is active, shows your current location on the map. To move on the map, drag the map. The map is oriented towards north by default. Maps é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 65
When you have an active connection and browse th e map on the display, a new ma p is automatically downloaded if you scroll to an area which is not covered by maps already downloaded. The maps are automatically sa ved in the device memory or on a compatible memory ca rd (if inserted). To zoom in and out on the map, select and - . Display indicators The GPS indicator shows the availability and strength of the satellite s ignal . One bar is one satellite. When the device tries to find a satellite, the bar is yellow. When the device receives enough data from the satellite to establis h a GPS connection, the bar turns green. The mor e green bars, the stronger the GPS connection. Initially, your device must rece ive signals from at least four satellites to calculate the coordina tes of your location. After the initial calculation, signal s from three satellit es may be enough. The data transfer indicator shows the intern et connection used and the amount of data t ransferred since the application started. Find locations Select Menu > Maps . To find a location in the city or area displayed on the map, enter the full or partial address of the location in the sear ch field. Tap the green arrow, and select Search . To find a location in another city, enter the city and the full or partial address, such as London Oxford Street . For the best results, enter the name of the city in the local langua ge. Tip: If unsure of the name of the location, enter only the first characters of th e search word. For the best search results, ente r at least three characters . To find a specific address, or an address in another cou ntry, select Option s > Search > Addresses . Country/Region * and City/Pos t code * are mandatory. Tip: To search for locations in another country using the search field, enter also the name of the country in the search field: Rome Italy . Enter th e name of the country in English, or use the three letter ISO-code (ITA for Italy, GBR for Great Britain, CHN for China). To import a location address from the Contacts application, select Options > Search > Addres ses > Optio ns > Select from Contacts . If you search for locations wi thout an internet connection, the search results are limited to a radius of 50 km (31 miles). Search by ca tegories The search result s are grouped by categories. T o limit the search to one category, select Options > Search > Places and the category. Example: To find restaurants close to your location, select Options > Search > Places > Eat & Dr ink > Restaurants . Example: To find a specific hotel, select Options > Search > Places > Accommodation . Enter the name of the hotel in the search field, and select Search all . Maps é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 66
Plan a route Select Menu > Maps . To plan a route, select your start poin t on the map, ta p the information area on the top of the map , and select Add to route . To define the destin ation and add more locations for your route, search for the location, and select Opti ons > Add route point . To change the order of the loca tions in the route, tap a location, and select Move . Move to the place where you want to move the location, and select Select . To edit the route, tap a locat ion, and select Edit route . To define the settings for the route, select Options > Settings . To show the route on the map, select Options > Show route . To navigate to the destinat ion by car or on foot, if you have purchased a licence for these extra services, select Options > Start driving or Start walking . To save the route, select Options > Save route . Save and send loca tions To save a location to your device, select the location, tap the information are on the top of the map, and select Add t o My places . The location is saved in Favourites > My places . To send a location to a compat ible device, tap the location, and select Send . If you send the location in a text message, the information is converted to plai n text. View your saved items To view the items you have saved to your device, select Options > Favourites . Places To view the locations you have saved to your device, select My places . To organise the sav ed locations, select Options > Sort . To view the selected loca tion on the map, select Show on map . To add the location to a route, tap the location, and select Add > Add to route . History To check which locations you ha ve searched for on the map, select History . To view the selected loca tion on the map, select Show on map . To send the location to a comp atible device, tap the location , and select Send . Collections To create a collection of your favourite places, such as restaurants or museums , select Collections > Options > New collection . Maps é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 67
To add locations to your collection , open My places , tap the location, and select Add > Add to colle ction . To view the selected loca tion on the map, select Show on map . Routes To view the routes you have saved, select Routes . To open the selected route, select Option s > Open . Navigate to the destination Select Menu > Maps . To navigate to your destinat ion, you must purchase a licen ce for the navigation service. To purchase a licence for pede strian and car navigation with voice gui dance, select Drive & Walk . To purchase a licence for pedestrian naviga tion only, select Walk . The licence is region-specific and can be used only in the selected area. You can pay for the licence through a credit card or in your phone bill, if supported by your service provider. You can transfer the licence from your device to another compatible device, but the licence can on ly be used in one device at a time. When you use na vigation for th e firs t time, you are asked to select the language of the v oice guid ance and download th e related voice guidance files. To change the la nguage later, in the main view, select Opti ons > Tools > Settings > Navigation > Voice guidance . Voice guidance is not available for pedestrian navigation. To start navigatin g, select a location an d Drive to or Walk to . To stop navigating, select Options > Stop navigati on . Update maps To update the maps on your device, select Options > Tools > Settings > Map > Option s > Check for map updates , or use No kia Map Loader. To update the Maps appli cation, go to http:// maps.nokia.com. Nokia Map Loader With the Nokia Map Lo ader application, you can download maps and voice guidan ce files from the internet to the device memory or a compatible memory card. You must use the Maps application and browse maps at least once before using Nokia Map Loader, as Nokia Map Loader uses the Maps information to check which vers ion of the maps to download. To inst all No kia Ma p Loader to a co mpatib le PC or Mac, g o to http://maps .nokia.com, and fo llo w the instructions on the screen. Maps é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 68
14. Connectivity Your device offers several opt ions to connect to the internet or to another compatible device or PC. Data connections and access p oints Your device supports packet data connections (network service), such as GPRS in the GSM network. W hen you use your device in GSM and UMTS networ ks, multiple data connections can be active at the same time, and a ccess points can share a data connection. In the UMTS network, data connections remain active during voice calls. You can also use a WLAN dat a connection. O nly one connection in one wireless LAN can be active at a time, but several applications can use t h e same internet access point. To establish a data connection , an access point is required. You can define differen t kinds of access points, such as the following: â MMS access point to send and receive multimedia messages â Internet access point (IAP ) to send and receive e-mail and connect to the internet Check the type of access poin t you need with your service provider for the service you want to access. For availability and subscription to packet data connection services, contact your service provider. Network settings Select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > Ne twork . Your dev ice can aut omaticall y switch between GSM and UMTS networks. GSM networks are indicated with . UMTS networks are indicated with . Select from the following: â Network mode â Select which network to use. If you select Dual mode , the device uses the GSM or UMTS network automatically, a ccording to the network parameters and the roamin g agreements between the wireless service providers. For details and roaming costs, contact your network service provider. This option is shown only if supported by th e wireless service provider. A roaming agreement is an agreement between two or more service providers to enable the users of one service provider to use the services of other service providers. â Operator select ion â Sele ct Automatic to set the device to search for and select one of the available ne tworks, or Manual to manually select the ne twork from a list. If the connection to th e manually se lected network is lost, the device sounds an error tone and asks you to reselect a network. The selected net work must have a roaming agreement with your home netw ork. â Cell info display â Set the device to indicate when it is used in a cellular network ba sed on microcellular network (MCN) technology and to activate cell info reception. Connectivity é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 69
Wireless LAN Your device can detect and connect to wireless local area networks (WLAN). Using a WL AN, you can c onnect your dev ice to the internet and compatib le devices that have WLAN support. About WLAN To use a wireless LAN (WLAN) conn ection, it must be available in the location, and your device must be conn ected to the WLAN. Some WLANs ar e protecte d, and you need an access key from the service provider to connect to them. Some places, like Fr ance, ha ve restrictions on the use of wireless LAN. Check with your local authorities for more information. Features that use WLAN, or that are allowed to run in th e background while using ot her features, increase the demand on battery power and redu ce the battery life. Your device supp orts the following WLAN features: â IEEE 802.11b/g sta ndard â Operation at 2.4 GHz â Wired equivalent privacy (W EP) with keys up to 128 bits, Wi-Fi protected access (WPA), and 802.1x authentication methods. These functions can be used only if they are supported by the network. Important: Always enable one of the available encryption methods to increase the security of your wireless LAN connection. Using encryp tion reduces the risk of unauthorised access to your data. WLAN connections To use a wireless LAN (WLAN) connection, you must create an internet access poin t (IAP) for WLAN. Use the acc ess point for applications that need to connect to the internet. A WLAN connection is establis hed when you create a data connection using a WLAN inte rnet access point. The active WLAN connection ends when you end the data connection. You can use WLAN du ring a voice call or when packet data is active. You can only be connected to one WLAN access point device at a time, but several applications can use the same internet access point. When the device is in the offline profile, you can still use WLAN (if available). Remember to comp ly with any applicable safety requirements when establ ishing and using a WLAN connection. Tip: To check the unique media access control (M AC) address that identifies your device, open the dialler and enter *#62209 526# . WLAN wizard Select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > Wi reless LAN . The WLAN wizard helps you to connect to a w ireless LAN (WLAN) and mana ge your WLAN connections. Connectivity é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 70
If the search finds WLANs, to create an internet access point (IAP) for a connection and start the web browser using th is IAP, select the connection and Start web browsin g . If you select a secured WLAN, you are asked to enter the relevant password. T o connect to a hidden n etwork, you must enter the correct network name (service set identifier, SSID ). If you already have th e web browser running using the currently active WLAN connection, to return to the web browser, select Continue web browsing . To end the active connection, select the connection and Disconnect WLAN . WLAN internet access points Select Menu > Settings and Co nnectivi ty > Wireless LAN > Options . Select from the following: â Filter WLAN networks â Filter out wireless LANs (WLANs) from the list of found networks. The selected networks are not displayed the next ti me the application searches for WLAN s. â Detai ls â View the details of a network shown in the list. If you select an active con nection, the connection details are displayed. Operating modes There are two operating modes in WLAN: infrastructure and ad hoc. The infrastructure operating mode allows two kinds of communication: wireless devices are connected to each other through a WLAN acces s poin t device, or wireless devices are connected to a wired LAN through a W LAN access point device. In the ad hoc operating mode, devices can send and receive data directly wi th each other. Wireless LAN settings Select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > Wi reless LAN > Optio ns > Settings . Select from the following: â Show WLAN availa bility â Select whether is displayed when a wireless LAN (WLAN) is available. Tip: To access the WLAN Wizard appli cation and view the available options, select the WLAN icon, and in the pop-up win dow, select the highlighted text next to the WLAN icon. â Scan for networks â If you set Show WLAN availability to Yes , you can select how often the device searches for available WLAN s and updates the indicator. â Internet connectivity te st â Select whether you want the device to test the intern et capability of the selected WLAN automatically, to ask for permission every time, or to never perform the connecti vity test. If you select Run automatically or allow the test to be performed when the device asks for it, and the co nnectivity test is performed successfully, the access point is saved to the interne t destinations. To view advanced settings, select Options > Advanced settings . Changing the advanced sett ings for the WLAN is not recommended. Connectivity é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 71
Access points Create a new access point Select Menu > Settings and Co nnectivi ty > Destinations . You may recei ve access point settings in a message from a service provider. Some or all access points may be preset for your devi ce by your s ervice pro vider, an d you may no t be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. When you open one of the access point groups ( , , , ), you can see the access point types: indicates a protected access point indicates a packet data access point indicates a wireless LAN (WLAN) access point Tip: You can create intern et access points in a WLAN with the WLAN wizard. To create a new acc ess point, select Access point . The device asks to check for av ailable connections. After the search, connections that are already ava ilable are shown and can be shared by a new a ccess point. If you ski p this step, you are asked to select a connection method and to define the settings needed. To edit the settings of an acce ss point, open one of the access point groups, an d select an access point. Follow the instructions from your service provider. â Connecti on name â Enter a name for the connection. â Data b earer â Select the data connection type. Depending on the data connect ion you select, only certain setting fields are available. Fi ll in all fields marked with Must be defined or with a red *. Other fields can be left empty, unless your service provider has instructed otherwise. To use a data connect ion, your service provider must support this feature, and if necessary, activate it for your SIM card. Create access point groups Select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > Destinations . Some applications allow you to use access point groups for network connections. To avoid selecting a single access point every time the device makes a network connection, yo u can create a group that contains various access points to connect to that net work and define the order in which the access points are used. For example, you can add wireless LAN (WLAN) and packet data access points to an intern et access point group, and use the group for browsing the web. If you give WLAN the h ighest priority, the device connects to the internet throug h WLAN, if available, and through a packet dat a connection if not. To create a new access point group, select Option s > Manage > New destination . To add access points to an access point group, select the group and Options > New access point . To copy an existing access point from another group , select the group, t ap the relevant access point if it is not already high lighted, and select Option s > Organise > Copy to other dest. . Connectivity é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 72
To change the priority of an access point within t he group, select Options > Organise > Change priority . Packet data access points Select Menu > Settings and Co nnectivi ty > Destinations > Access point , and follow the instructions on the screen. To edit a packet data access p o int, open one of the access point groups, an d select an access point marked with . Follow the instructions from your service provider. Select from the following: â Access point name â You obtain the access point name from your service provider. â User na me â The user name may be needed to make a data connectio n, and is usually provided by your service provider. â Prompt passwo rd â If you must enter the password every time you log in to a server, or if you do not want to save your password in the device, sele ct Yes . â Password â A password may be needed to make a data connection and is usually provided by your service provider. â Authentication â Select Secure to always send your password encrypted or Normal to send your password encrypted when possible. â Homepage â Depending on th e access point you are setting up, enter the web address or the a ddress of the multimedia message centre. â Use access point â Sele ct After confirmati on if you want the device to ask for confirmation before the connection using this acce ss point is created, or Automatically if you want the device to connect to the destination using this a ccess point automatically. Select Options > Advanced settings and from the following: â Network type â Select the internet protocol type to transfer data to and from your device. The other s ettings depend on the selected network type. â Phone IP addr ess (for IPv4 only) â Enter the IP address of your device. â DNS addresses â Enter the IP addresses of the primary and secondary DNS servers, if required by your service provider. To obtain these addresses, contact your internet service provider. â Proxy server add ress â Enter the address of the pro xy server. â Proxy port number â Enter the port number of the proxy server. WLAN internet access points Select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > Destinations > Access point , and follow th e instructions on the screen. To edit a wireless LA N (WLAN) access point, open one of the access point groups and select an access point marked with . Follow the instructions from your WLAN service provider. Connectivity é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 73
â WLAN network name â Select Enter manu ally or Search for networks . If you select an exist ing network, WLAN network mode and WL AN security mode are determined by the settings of its access point device. â Networ k status â Defi ne whether the network name is displayed . â WLAN network mode â S elect Ad-hoc to create an ad hoc network and to allow devices to send and receive data directly; a WLAN ac cess point device is not needed. In an ad hoc network, all devices must use the s ame WLAN network name. â WLAN security m ode â Select the encryption used: WEP , 802.1x (not for ad hoc networks), or WPA /WPA2 . If you select Open network , no encr yption is used. The WEP, 802.1x, and WPA functions can be used only if the network supports them. â Homepage â Enter the web address o f the starting page. â Use access point â Select After confirmation if you want the device to ask for confirmat ion before the connection using this a ccess point is created or Automatically if you want the device to connect to the destination us ing this access point au tomatically. To enter the settings for the selected se curity mode, select WLAN security sett ings . Security settings for WEP â WEP key in use â Select the wired equivalent privacy (WEP) key number. You can create up to four WEP keys. The same settings must be entered on the WLAN acce ss point devic e. â Authenti cation typ e â Select Open or Shared for the authentication typ e between your device and the WLAN access point device. â WEP key settings â Enter WEP encryption (length of the key), WEP key format ( ASCII or Hexadecimal ), a nd WEP key (the WEP key data in the selected format). Security settings for 802.1x and WPA/WPA2 â WPA/WPA 2 â Select the means of authen tication: EAP to use an extensible authentica tion prot ocol (EAP ) plug-in, or Pre-shared key to use a password. Complete the appropriate settin gs: â EAP plug-in setti ngs â Enter the settings according to the instructions from your service provider. â Pre-shared key â Enter a password. The same password must be entered on the WLAN access point device. â WPA2 only mode â Only WPA2 enabled devices are allowed to establish a co nnection in this mode. Advanced WLAN settings Select Options > Advanced settings and from the following: â IPv4 settin gs â Enter the IP address of your device, the subnet IP address, the de fault gateway, and the IP addresses of the prima ry and secondary DNS s ervers. Contact you r internet s ervice provider for these addresses. â IPv6 settin gs â Define the type of DNS address. â Ad-hoc channel (only for Ad-hoc ) â To enter a channel number (1-11) manually, select User define d . Connectivity é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 74
â Proxy server addres s â Enter the address for the proxy server. â Proxy port numbe r â Enter the proxy port number. Active data connections Select Menu > Settings and Co nnectivi ty > Connection mgr. . In the active data connections vi ew, you can see the open data connect ions: data calls packet data connections wireless LAN (WLAN) connections Note: The actual invoice for calls and services from your service provider may vary, depending on network features, rounding off for bi lling, taxes, and so forth. To end a connection, select Option s > Disconnect . To end all open connections, select Optio ns > Disconnect all . To view the details of a connection, select Options > Details . Synchronisation Select Menu > Settings and Co nnectivi ty > Data transfer > Sync . The Synchronisation application enables you to sync hronise your notes, calendar entries, text and multimedia messages, browser bookmarks, or contac ts with various compatible applications on a compatible co mputer or on the internet. You may receive synchronisation settings in a special message from your service provider. A synchronisation profile contai ns the necessary se ttings for synchronisation. When you open the application , the default or previously used synchronisation profile is displayed. To modify the profile, tap a synchronisation item to include it in the profile or to leave it out. To manage synchronisat ion profiles, select Options and the desired option. To synchronise data, select Options > Synchroni se . To cancel synchronisation before it finishes, select Cancel . Bluetooth connectivity About Bluetooth co nnectivity With Bluetooth connectivity, yo u can make a wireless connection to other compatible devices, such as mobile phones, computers, headsets , and car kits. You can use the connection to se nd images, video clips, music and sound clips, and n otes, transfer files from your compatible PC, and print images with a compatible printer. Since devices with Bl uetooth wireless technology communicate using radio waves, they do not need to be in di r ec t li ne - o f- s ig h t. H ow e ve r , t h ey mu s t be wi t hi n 10 me t re s Connectivity é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 75
(33 feet) of each other, al though the connection may be subject to interference from obstructions such as w alls or from other electronic devices. This device is compliant with Bluetooth Specification 2.0 EDR supporting the following profiles: advanced audio distribution, basic imaging, de vice identification, dial-up networking, file transfer, generic access, generic audio/video distribution, generic object exchange, hands-free, headset, object push, phone book access, se rial port, and SIM access. To ensure interoperability be twee n other devices supporting Bluetooth technolo gy, use Noki a approved accessories for this model. Check with th e manufacturers of oth er devices to determine their compatibil ity with this device. Features using Bluetooth techno logy increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life. When the device is locked , you cannot use Bluetooth connectivity. Settings Select Menu > Settings and Co nnectivi ty > Bluetooth . When you open the application for the first time, you are asked to define a name for your device. You can change the name later. Select from the following: â Blueto oth â Turn Bluetooth connectivity on or off. â My phone's visibili ty â T o a l l o w y o u r d e v i c e t o b e f o u n d by other devices with Blue tooth wireless technology, select Shown to all . To set a time period after which the visibility is set from shown to hidden, select Set v isibility period . To hide your device from other devices, select Hidden . â My phone's name â Edit the name shown to other devices with Bluetoot h wireless technology. â Remote SIM mode â Enable or disable another device, such as a compatible car kit a ccessory, to use the SIM card in your device to connect to the ne twork. Security tips Select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > Blu etooth . When you are not using Bluetooth connectivity, t o control who can find your device and connect to it, select Bluetooth > Off or My phone's visibility > Hidden . Do not pair with or accept connection requests from an unknown device. This helps to protect your device from harmful content. Send data using Bluetooth connectivity Several Bluetooth connecti ons can be active at a time . For example, if you are c onnected to a co mpatible headset, you can also transfer files to a nother compatible device at the same time. 1. Open the application where th e item yo u want to send is stored. For example, to se nd an image to another compatible device, select Gallery > Images & vide os . 2. Tap an it em, and select Options > Send > Via Bluetooth . Devices with Bluetooth wireless technology that are within range are displayed. Device icons are as follows: Connectivity é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 76
computer phone audio or video device other device To interrupt th e search, select Stop . 3. Select the device with which you wa nt to connect. 4. If the other device requires pairing before data can be transmitted, a tone sounds, and you are as ked to enter a passcode. The same passcode must be entere d in both devices. When the connection is established, Sending data is displayed. Tip: When searching for devices, some devices may show only the unique addre ss (device address ). To find the unique address of your device, enter *#2820# . Pair devices Select Menu > Settings and Co nnectivi ty > Bluetooth . To pair with compatible dev ices and view your paired devices, open the Paired de vices tab. Before pairing, create your own p a s s c o d e ( 1 t o 1 6 d i g i t s ) , a n d agree with the owner of the other device to use the same code. Devices that do not have a user interface have a factory- set passcode. The passcode is used only once. 1. To pair with a device, select Options > New paired device . Devices that are within range are displa yed. 2. Select the device, and en ter the pas scode. The same passcode must be entered on the other device, as well. 3. Some audio accessories connect a utomatically to your device after pairing. Othe rwise, to connect to an accessory, select Opt ions > Connect to audio device . Paired devices are indicated by in the device search. To set a device as authorised or unauthorised, select from the following: â Set as author ised â Connections between your device and the authorised device ca n be made without your knowledge. You will not be asked for authorisation or acceptance sepa rately. Use t h is status only for your own devices, such as yo ur compatible headset or PC, or devices that belong to so meone you trust . indicates authorised devices in the paired devices view. â Set as unauthorise d â Connection requests from this device must be accepted separately every time. To cancel a pairing with a device, select Options > Delete . To cancel all pairings, select Options > Delete all . Receive data using Bluetooth connectivity When you receive data t hrough Bluetoot h connectivity , a tone sounds, and you a re asked if you want to accep t the message. If you accept, is displayed, and the item is placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging. Messages receive d through Bluetooth connectivity are indicated by . Connectivity é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 77
Block devices Select Menu > Settings and Co nnectivi ty > Bluetooth . To block a device from establishing a Bluetooth connection to your device, open the Paired devices tab. Tap a device you want to block, if it is not already highlighted, and select Options > Block . To unblock a device, open the Blocked devices tab, tap a device, if it is not already highlighted, and select Op tions > Delete . To unblock all blocked devices, select Options > Delete all . If you reject a pairing reques t from another device, you are asked if you want to block all future connection requests from this device. If y ou accept the query , the remote device i s added to the list of blocked devices. Remote SIM mode Select Menu > Settings and Co nnectivi ty > Bluetooth . Before the remote SIM mode can be activated, t he two devices must be paired and th e pairing initiated from the other device. When pairing, us e a 16-digi t passcode, and set the other device as authorised. To use the remote SIM mode with a compatible ca r kit accessory, activate Bluetooth connectivity, and enable the use of the remote SIM mode with your device. Activate the remote SIM mode from the other device. When the remote SIM mode is on in your device, Remote SIM mode is displayed in the home sc reen. The connection to the wireless network is turned off, as indicated by in the signal strength indicator a rea, and you cannot use SIM card services or features requiring ce llular network coverage. When the wireless device is in the remote SIM m ode, you can only use a compatible connected accessory, such as a car kit, to make or receive calls. Your wireless device will not make any calls while in this mode, except to the emergency numbers programmed into your device. To ma ke calls from your device, you must leave the remote S IM mode. If the device is locked, enter the lock code to unlock it. To leave the remote SIM mode, press the power key, and select Exit remote SIM mode . USB Select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > US B . To have the device ask the purpose of the connection each time a compatible data cable is connected, select Ask on connecti on > Yes . If the Ask on connection option is turned off or you want to chan ge the mode during an acti ve connection, select USB connection mode and from the following: â PC Suite â Use Nokia PC applications such as Nokia Ovi Suite, and Nokia Soft ware Updater. Connectivity é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 78
â Mass storage â Transfer data between your device a nd a compatible PC. â Image transfer â Print images with a compatible printer. â Media transfer â Synchronise m usic with Windows Media Player. PC connections You can use your mo bile device with a variety of compatible PC connectivity and data communicat ions applications. With Nokia Ovi Suite you can, for exam ple, transfer files and images between your device and a comp atible computer. To use Ovi Suite with USB connection mode, select PC Su ite mode . For more information about Ov i Suite and the download link in the support area on the Nokia website, see www.ovi.nokia.com. Administrative settings Select Menu > Settings and Co nnectivi ty > Admin. settings . To set the online time for the da ta call connection, select Data call . The data call settings affect all access points that use a GSM data call. SIP settings Select Menu > Settings and Co nnectivi ty > Admin. settings > SIP settings . Session Initiation Protocol (S IP) settings are needed for certain network services using SIP. You may receive the settings in a special text mess age from your service provider. You can view, delete, or create these setting profiles in SIP settings. Access point name control Select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > Admin. settings > APN control . With the access point name co ntrol service, you can restrict packet data connections and a llow your device to use only certain packet data access points. This setting is only availa ble if your SIM card supports the access point control service. T o t u r n t h e c o n t r o l s e r v i c e o n o r o f f , o r t o c h a n g e t h e a l l o w e d access points, select Options and the corresponding option. To change the options, you need your PIN2 code. Contact your service provider for the code. Packet data settings Select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > Admin. settings > Packet data . The packet data set tings affe ct all access points using a packet data connection. Select from the following: â Packet data connection â If you select When available and you are in a net work that suppor ts packet data, the device regist ers to the packet data network. Connectivity é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 79
Starting an active packet data connection ( for example, to send and receive e-mail) is quicker than if the device establishes a packet data connection when needed. If there is no packet data cove rage, the dev ice peri odical ly tries to establish a packet data connection. If you select When needed , the device uses a packet data connection only if you start an app licat ion or action that needs it. â Access point â The access point name is needed to us e your device as a packet data modem to a compatible computer. â High speed packet access â Enable or disable the use of HSDPA (network servic e) in UMTS networks. 15. Share online Share online Select Menu > Internet > Share o nline . With Share online, yo u can po st images, video clips, and sound clips from your device to compatible online sharing services, such as albums and blogs. You can also view and send comments to the p osts in these services, and download content to your compatible Nokia device. The supported cont ent types may vary depending on the service provider. The availability of the Sh are online service may vary depending on your country or sales area . Subscribe to services Select Menu > Internet > Share o nline . To subscribe to an online shar ing service, go to the service provider's website, and check that your Nokia device is compatible with the service. Create an ac count as instructed on the website. You receive a user name and password needed to set up your device with the account. 1. To activate a se rvice, open the Sha re online application in your device, select a service and Option s > Activate . 2. Allow the device to create a network connection. If you are prompted for an internet access point, select one from the list. 3. Sign in to your account as instructed on the service providerâÂÂs website. Nokia's services in the online sharing service are free of charge. Any data t ransferred over the network may incur charges from your service provider. For the availability and cost of the third party services and dat a transfer costs, contact your service provider or the relevant third party. Manage your accounts To view your accounts, select Options > Settings > My accounts . Share online é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 80
To create a new acc ount, select Options > Add new account . T o ch a n g e y o u r u s e r n a m e o r p a s s w o r d f o r an a c c o u n t , s e l ec t the account and Options > Open . To set the account as the defau lt when sending post s from your device, select Opt ions > Set as default . To remove an account, se lect the account and Options > Delete . Create a post Select Menu > Internet > Share o nline . To post multimedia files to a service, select a service a nd Options > New post . If the online sharing service provides channels for posting files, select the desire d channel. To add an image, video clip, or sound clip to the post, select Options > Insert . To add a title or description to the post, enter text directly to the fields, if available. To add tags to the post, select Tags: . To select whether to enab le the posting of location information contained in the file, select Location: . To set the level of privacy f or a file, select Privacy: . To allow everyone to view your file, select Public . To restrict others from seeing your files, select Private . You can define the Default setting on the service provider's website. To send the post to the service, select Options > Post to web . Post files from Galle ry You can post files from Gallery to an online sharing service. 1. Open Gallery, and select th e files you want to post. 2. Select Options > Send > Post to web and the desired account. 3. Edit your post as required. 4. Select Options > Post to web . 16. Nokia Video Centre With Nok ia Video Centre (netwo rk service), you can download and stream video clips over th e air from compatible internet video services using a packet data or WLAN connection. You can also transfer video clips from a compatible PC to your device and view them in Video centre. Using packet data access poi nts to download videos may involve the transmission of la rge amounts o f data through your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information abou t data transmission charge s. Your device may have predefined s ervices. Nokia Video Centre é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 81
Service providers may provide free content or charge a fee. Check the pricing in the service or from the service provider. View and downlo ad video clips Connect to video services 1. Select Menu > Applicatio ns > Video centre . 2. To connect to a servi ce to install video services , select Video di rectory and the desired video service from the service catalogue. View a video clip To browse the content of in stalled video services, select Video feeds . The content of some video servic es is divided into categories. To browse video clips, select a category. To search for a video clip in the service, select Video search . Search may not be available in all services. To view information abou t the selected video clip, select Options > Video details . Some video clips can be streamed over the air, but others must be first downloaded to your device. To download a video clip, select Options > Download . Downloads continue in the background if you exit the application. The downloaded video clips are save d in My videos. To stream a video clip or view a downloaded one, select Options > Play . When the video clip is play ing, to use the contro l keys for controlling the player, tap the screen. To adjust the volume, use the volume key. Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. Continuous exposure to hi gh volume may damage y our hearing. Schedule downloads Setting the application to download video clips aut omatically may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. For information about data transmission charges, contact your service provider. To schedule an automa tic download for video clips in a service, select a category and Options > Schedule downloads . Video centre automatically downloads new video clips daily at the time you define. To cancel scheduled downloads for a category, select Manual download as the download method. Video feeds The content of the installed vide o services is distributed using Atom or RSS feeds. To view and manage your feeds, select Video feeds . Select Options and from the following: â Feed sub scription s â Check your current feed subscriptions. â Refresh feed s â Refresh the content of all feeds. â Add feed â Subscribe to new feeds. Select Via Video directory to select a feed from the services in the video directory, or Add manually to add a video feed address. â Feed details â View information about a video. Nokia Video Centre é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 82
â Manage account â Manage your account options for a given feed, if available. â Remove fee d â R em o v e a f e e d fr o m y o u r s u b sc r i p t i o n s . You may not be able to remove some preinstalled feeds. To view the videos available in a feed, select a feed from the list. My videos My videos is a storage place fo r all videos in the Video centre application. You can list downlo aded videos and video clips recorded with the device camera in separate views. 1. To open a folder and view vi deo clips, select the folder. When a video clip is playing, to use the control keys for controlling the play er, tap the screen. 2. To adjust the volume, press the volume key. Select Options and from the following: â Mute or Unmute â Turn sound on or off. â Resume dow nload â Resume a paused or failed download. â Cancel download â Cancel a download. â Video details â View file details. â Change aspect ratio â Select the aspect ratio of the video clip. Select Natural , Stretch , or Z oom . â Memory status â View the amount of free and used memory. To move or copy video clips to a compatible memory card, select Options > Move and copy > Copy or Move and the memory card. Transfer vi deos from your PC Transfer your own video clips to Video centre from compatible devices using a comp atible USB data cable. Video centre will display only the vi deo clips which are in a format supported by your device. 1. To view your device on a PC as a mass memory device where you can transfer any data files, make the connection with a USB data cable. 2. Select Mass storage as the connection mode. A compatible memory card needs to be inserted in the device. 3. Select the video clips you wan t to copy from your PC. 4. Transfer the video clips t o E:\My Videos in the memory card. The transferred video clips appear in the My videos folder in Video centre. Video files in other folders of your device are not displayed. Video centre settings In the Video centre main view, select Options > Settin gs and from the following: â Video service select ion â Select the video services that you want to app ear in Vide o centre. You can also add, remove, edit, and view the details of a video service. You cannot edit preinstalled video services. â Connection settings â To define the network destination used for the network connection, select Network connection . T o select the connection manually Nokia Video Centre é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 83
each time Video centre open s a network connection, select Always ask . To set GPRS connection on or off, select Confirm GPRS usage . To set roaming on or off, select Confirm roaming . â Parental control â Set an age limit to v ideos. The required password is the same as the device lock code. The factory setting for the lock code is 12345 . In video-on- demand services, videos which have the same or a hi gher age limit than you have set, are hidden . â Preferred memory â Select whether downloaded videos are saved in the device memory or on a compatible memory card. â Thumbnails â Select whether to download and view thumbnail images in video feeds. 17. Web browse r With the web browser, you can view hypertext markup language (HTML) page s on the web as originally designed. You can also browse web pages t hat are designed spe cifically for mobile devices, and use extensible hypertext markup language (XHTML ), or the wireless markup langua ge (WML). To browse the web, you need to have an internet access point defined in your device. Tip: To access the browse r, tap the media key ( ) to open the media bar, and select . Browse the web Select Menu > Internet > Web . Important: Use only services that you trust and that offer adequate security and protection against harmful software. Important : Only install and use applications and other software from trusted sources, such a s applications tha t are Symbian Signed or hav e passed the Java Verified⢠testing. To browse a web page, in the bookmarks view, select a bookmark, or enter the address in the field ( ), and select Go to . Some web pages may cont ain material, such as gr aphics and sounds, that requires a large amount of memory to view. If your device runs out of memo ry while loading such a web page, the graphics on the page are not shown. To browse web p ages withou t graphics t o save memory, select Options > Settings > Page > Load c ontent > Tex t only . To enter a new web address you want to visit, select Options > Go to > New we b page . Web browser é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 84
To refresh the content of the web page, selec t Options > Web page options > Reload . To save the current web page a s a bookmark, select Options > Web page option s > Save as bookmark . To view snapshots of the web pages you hav e visited during the current browsing s ession, select Back (available if History list is set on in the browse r settings and the current web page i s not th e first web page you vi sit). Select the web page y ou want. To open a sublist of commands or actions for the current web page, select Options > Servi ce options (if supported by the web page). To prevent or allow the automatic opening of multiple windows, select Op tions > Web page options > Block pop-ups or Allow pop-ups . Tip: To take the browser to the background, press the end key once. To end the connection, press and hold the end key. Browser toolbar The browser toolbar helps yo u select frequently used functions of the browser. From the toolbar, sele ct from the following: â Expand toolbar â E x p a n d t h e t o o l b a r t o a c ce s s m o r e toolbar functions. â Go to web address â Enter a new web address. â Show zoom â Zoom in or out on the web page. To use the expanded toolbar, select Expand t oolbar and from the following: â Go to feeds â View your current feed subscriptions. â Full screen â Switch to the full screen view. â Subsc. feeds â View a lis t of available web feeds on the current web page, and subscribe to a web feed. â Settings â Edit the settings. â Save bkmrk. â Save the current web page as a bookmark. â Reload â Refresh the web page. â Overview â View an overview of the current web page. â Homepage â Go to the homepage (if defined in the settings). â Bookmarks â Open the bookmarks view. â Find keywd. â Search on the current web page. Navigate pages When you are bro wsing a web page t hat contains a larg e amount of information, you can use Page overview t o view what kind of information th e web page contains. To see an overview of the curre nt web page, open the toolbar, and select > . Web feeds and blogs Web feeds are XML files on web pages that are used to share, for example, the latest news headlines or blogs. Blogs or Web browse r é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 85
weblogs are web diaries. It is common to find web feeds on web, blog, and wiki pages. The Web application automatically detects if a web page contains web feeds. To subscribe to a web feed, select a feed and Options > Subscribe to we b feeds . To update a web feed, select a feed and Option s > Refresh . To define how the web feeds are updated, select Op tions > Settings > Web feeds . Widgets Your device supp orts wi dgets. Widgets are small, downloadable web applicati ons that deliver multimedia, news feeds, and other in formation, such as weather reports, to your device. Installed widgets appear as separate applications in the Applications folder. You can download widgets us ing the Download! application or from the web. You can also inst all widgets on a compatible memory card (if available). The default access point for widgets is the same as in the w eb browser. When active in the background, some widgets may update informat ion automa tically to you r device. Using widget s may invo lve the transmission of large amounts of data through your servic e provider's network. For information about data transm ission charges, contact your service provider. Content search To search for text, phone nu mbers, or e-mail addresses within the current web page, select Options > Ke yword and the desired option. To go to the previous match, select Options > Find previous . To go to the next ma tch, select Options > Find next . Tip: To search for text within the current web page, open the toolbar, and select > . Download and purchase items You can download items such as ringing tones, im ages, operator logos, themes, and vi deo clips. These items can be provided free of charge, or you can purchase them. Downloaded items are handled by the respective applicati ons in your device, for example, a downloaded photo can be saved in Gallery. Important : Only install and use applications and other software from trusted sources, such a s applications tha t are Symbian Signed or hav e passed the Java Verified testing. To download an item: 1. Select the link. 2. Select the appropriate option to purch ase the item (for example, Buy ). 3. Carefully read all th e information provided. 4. To continue or canc el the download, selec t the appropriate option (for example, Accept or Cancel ). Web browser é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 86
When you star t a download, a list of ongoing and completed downloads from the current br owsing session is displayed. To modify the list, select Options > Downloads . In t he list, select an item an d Options to cancel ongoing downloads, or open, save, or d elete completed d ownloads. Bookmarks The bookmarks view opens when you open the Web application. You can select web addresses from a list or from a collection of bookmarks in the Recently visited pages folder. The toolbar helps you select freq uently used functions of the browser. On the toolbar, select from the following: â Add bookmark â Add a new bookmark. â Go to web address â Enter a new web address. â Delete â Delete a bookmark. Select Options and from the following: â Go to â Enter a new web address, go to the previous web page, or view saved link s to web feeds and blogs. â Bookmark options â Send and add boo kmarks, and set bookmarks as a homepage. â Bookmark manager â Edit, move, and delete bookmarks. Web also keeps track of the we b pages you visit during browsing. In the Recently vi sited pages folder, you can view the list of the v isited web pages . Empty the cache The information or services yo u have accessed are st ored in the cache memory of the device. A cache is a memory location that is used to sto re data temporarily. If you have tried to access or have accessed confidential information requ iring passwords, empty the cache after each use. To empty the cache, select Options > Clear privacy data > Cache . Connection security If the security indicator ( ) is displayed duri ng a connection, the data transmi ssion between the device and the internet gateway or server is encrypted. The security icon does not indi cate that the data transmission between the gateway and the co ntent server (or the place where the requested resource is stored) is secure. The service provider secures the data transmission between the gateway and the content server. Security certificates may be re quired for some services, such as banking services. You are noti fied if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your device. For more information, contact your service provider. Important : Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote co nnections and software installation considerably smaller, they must be used correctly Web browse r é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 87
in order to benefit from increased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer any protecti on by itself; the certificate manager must co ntain correct, authentic, or trusted certificates for increa sed secur ity to be available. Certificates have a restricted li fetime. If "Expired certificate" or "Certificate not valid yet" is shown, even if the certificate should be valid, check that the current date and time in your device are correct. Before changing any certificat e sett ings, you must make sure that you really trust the owner of the certificate an d that the certificate really belong s to the listed owner. 18. Search About Search Select Menu > Internet > Search . Search enables yo u to use va rious internet-based search services to find, for example, websites, and images . The content and availability of the services may vary. Start a search Select Menu > Internet > Search . To search the contents of your mobile device, en ter search terms in the search field, or browse the content categories. While you enter the search terms, the results are organised into categories. The most recently accessed results appear at the top of the result list, if they match your search terms. To search for web pages on the internet, select Search the Internet , a search provider, an d enter your search term s in the search field. The search provider you selected is set as your default internet search provider. If a default search provider is already set, select it to start a search, or select More search s ervices to use another search provider. To change the default service provider, select Options > Select service . To change the country or region setting to find more search providers, select Optio ns > Settings > Country or region . 19. Download! Some features may not be available in your region. Please check the availability with local operator. About Download! Select Menu > Download! . Search é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 88
With Dow nload!, you can di scov er, pr eview, buy, download, and upgrade cont ent, services, and applications. Games, ringing tones, wallpapers, applications, and much more are easily accessible. T he items ar e categorised under catalog ues and folders from different serv ice providers. The available content depends on your service provider. Download! uses yo ur network serv ices to access the most up - to-date content. For inform ation on additional items available through Dow nload!, contact you r service provider or the supplier or manu facturer of the item. Download! receives updates conti nuously and provides you with the latest content your se rvice provider offers for your device. Items may be charg eable, but you can usua lly preview them free of charge. For more information about the charges, contact your service provider or the provider of the item. To update the content in Download! manually, select Options > Refresh content . Purchase a nd download items To buy the selected item in the main view, a folder, or a catalogue, select Options > Buy . A submenu opens where you can select the version of the item and view price information. The available opt ions depend on the service provider. To download an item that is free of charge, select Optio ns > Get . 20. Other applications Clock Select Menu > Applications > Clock . Alarm clock To view your active and ina ctive alarms, select Alarms . When the alarm is acti ve, is displayed. When the alarm is repeated, is displayed. To set a new alarm, se lect New alarm . To set a one-time alarm within 24 hours, on a certain da y, or a repeated alarm, select Repeat . To remove an alarm, select Alarms , scroll to the alar m, and select Option s > Remove alarm . To turn off the sounding alarm, select Stop . To stop the alarm for a certain time period, select Snooze . If your device is switched off when an alarm is du e, you r device switches itself on and starts sounding the alarm tone. Other applic ations é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 89
To define the time period after whi ch the alarm sounds again when you set it to snooze, select Options > Se ttings > Alarm snooze time . To change the time, dat e, and clock type settings, select Options > Sett ings . To automatically update the time, date, and time zone information for yo ur device (network service), select Automatic tim e update > On . World clock To view the cu rrent time in different locations, select World clock . To add locations to the list, select Op tions > Add location . To set your current location, scroll to a location, and select Options > Set as current location . The time in your device is changed according to the selected location. Ensure th at the time is correct and matches your time zone. Calendar To open the calendar, select Menu > Calendar . Calendar views To switch between month, week , day, and to-do note view, select Options > Change view > Month view , Week , Day or To-do . To change the star ting day of the week, the view that is shown when you open the calendar, or th e calendar alarm settings, select Option s > Settings . To go to a certain date, select Op tions > Go to date . Calendar toolbar On calendar toolbar, you may select from the following: â Next v iew â Select the month view. â Next v iew â Select the week view. â Next v iew â Select the day view. â Next vi ew â Select the to-do view. â New meeti ng â Add a new meeting reminder. â New to-do note â Add a now to-do note. File manager About File manager Select Menu > Applications > File mgr. . With File manager, you can brow se, manage, and open files on your device, memory car d, or a compatible external drive. The available options depend on the memory you select. Find and organise file s Select Menu > Applications > File mgr. . To find a file, select Opt ions > Find . Enter a search text tha t matches the file name. To move and copy files and folders, or to create new folders in the memo ry, select Options > Organise and the desired option. To sort files, select Options > Sort by and the desire d category. Other applications é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 90
Edit memory card Select Menu > Applications > File mgr. . These options are available only if a compatible memory card is inserted in the device. Select Options and from the following: â Memory card opti ons â Rename or format a memory card. â Memory c ard pass word â Password protect a memo ry card. â Unlock memory card â Unlo ck a memory card. Back up files on a memory card Select Menu > Applications > File mgr. . To back up files, select the fi le types you w ant to back up o n a memory card and Options > Back up now . Ensure that your memory card has enough free memory for the files that you have chosen to back up . Application manager With Application mana ger, you can see the software packages installed in your de vice. You can view details of installed applications, remo ve applications, and define installation settings. You can install two types of ap plications and software to your device: â JME applications based on Java⢠technology with the .j ad or .jar file extensions â Other applications and software suit able for the Symbian operating system with the .s is or .sisx file extensions Only install software that is compatible with your device. Install applications You can transfer installation files to your device from a compatible computer, download them during browsin g, or receive them in a multimed ia message, as an e-mail attachment, or using other co nnectivity methods, such as Bluetooth connectivity. You can use N okia Application I nstaller in Nokia Ovi Suite to install an application to your device. Icons in Application manage r indicate the following: SIS or SISX application Java application widgets application installed in the memory card Important : Only install and use applications and other software from trusted sources, such a s applications tha t are Symbian Signed or hav e passed the Java Verified testing. Before installation, note the following: â To view the application ty pe, v ersion number, and the supplier or manufacturer of the application, select Options > View details . Other applic ations é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 91
To view the security certific ate details of the application, select Details: > Certificates: > View details . Control the use of digital certificates in Certificate management. â If you install a file that contains an update or repair to an existing application, you ca n only restore the original application if you have the origin al installation file or a full backup copy of the removed software package. To restore the original application, remove the application, and install the application ag ain fr om the original installation file or the backup copy. The JAR file is required for inst alling Java appl ications. If it is missing, the device may ask you to download it. If there is no access point defined for the application, you are asked to select one. To install an application: 1. To locate an insta llation file, select Menu > Settings and Application mgr. . Alternatively, search installation files using File manager, or select Messaging > Inbox , and open a message th at contains an installation file. 2. In Application manager, select Opt ions > Install . In other applications, select the installation file to start the installation. During installation, the devi ce shows information about the progress of the installation. If you i nstall an application without a digital signature or certification, the device displays a warning. Continue installation only if you are sure of the or igin and contents of the application. To start an installed applica tion, locate it in the menu, an d select it. If th e applic ation does not have a default fold er defined, it is installed in the Installed apps. fo lder in the main menu. To see which software packages are installed or removed and when, select Opt ions > View log . Important : Your device can only support one antivirus application. Having more than one app lication with antivirus functionality could affect performance and operation or cause the device to stop functi oning. After you install applications to a compatible memory card, installation files (.si s, .sisx) remain in the dev ice memory. The files may use large amounts of memory and prevent you from storing other fi les. If the .sis file is a message att achment, delete the message from the Messaging inbox. Remove applications Select Menu > Settings and Application mgr. . To remove a software package, select Installed apps. > Options > Remove . Select Yes to confirm. If you remove software, you can only reinstall it if you have the original software package or a full backup of the removed software package. If you remo ve a software package, you may no longer be a ble to open documents created with that software. If another software packag e depends on the software package that you removed, the other software pa ckage may Other applications é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 92
stop working. Refer to the do cumentation of the installed software package for details. Application manager settings Select Menu > Settings and Ap plication mgr. . Select Installatio n settings and from the following: â Software ins tallation â Select whether Symbian software that has no verified digital signature can be installed. â Online certificate check â Select to check the online certificates before inst alling an ap plication. â Default w eb addres s â Set the default web address used when checking online certificates. Application Update Select Menu > Applications > App. upd ate . With Application Upda te, you can check the available upda tes for applications and download th em to your device. After updating your device software using Application Update, the functiona l instructions related to t he updated applications in the user guide or the helps may not be up to date. To download the available updates, select Options > Start update . To unmark updates, select the updat es. To view information on an update, select Options > View details . To change the settings , select Options > Settings . RealPlayer With RealPlayer, you can pla y video clips or stream medi a files over the air without saving them to the device firs t. RealPlayer does not necessarily support all file formats or all the variations of file formats. Select Menu > Applications > RealPlayer . RealPlayer toolbar In the Video clips, Streaming li nks, and R ecently played v iews, the following toolbar icons may be available: â Send â Send a video clip or streaming link. â Play â Play the video clip or video stream. â Delete â Delete the video clip or streaming link. â Remove â Remove a file from the recently played list. Play video clips To play a video clip, select Video clips , and a clip. To list recently played files, in the application main view, select Recently played . In the list of video clips, scroll to a clip, select Op tions and from the following: â Use video clip â Assign a video t o a contact or set it as a ringing tone. â Mark/Unmark â Mar k item s in th e list t o send or dele te multiple items at the same time. Other applic ations é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 93
â View details â View details of the selected item, such as format, resolution, and duration. â Settings â Edit settings for video playba ck and streaming. Stream content over the air In RealPlayer, you can only open an RTSP link. However, RealPlayer plays a RAM fi le if you open an HTTP link to it in a browser. To stream content over th e air (network service), in RealPlayer, select Streaming links and a link. You can also receive a streaming link in a text message or multimedia message, or open a link on a web page. Before live content begins streaming, your device conn ects to the site and starts loading the content. The content is not saved in your device. Recorder Select Menu > Applications > Recorder . With the Recorder application, you can record voice memos and telephone conversations. The recorder cannot be used when a data call or GPRS connection is active. To record a sound clip, select . To stop recording a sound clip, select . To listen to the sound clip, select . To select the recording qualit y or where you want to save your sound clips, se lect Optio ns > Settings . Recorded sound clips are saved in the Sound clips folder in Gallery. To record a telephone conversa tion, open recorder during a voice call, and select . Both parties hear a tone every 5 seconds during recording. Write notes Select Menu > Applications > Notes . To write a no te, select Options > New note . Tap the note field to enter text, and select . You can sav e plain text files (. txt file format) you receive to Notes. Calculator Select Menu > Applications > Calculator . This calculator has limited ac curacy and is designed for simple calculations. To make a calculation, enter the first number of the calculation. To rem ove a number, select C . Select a function such as add or subtract. Enter the second number of the calculation, and select = . Converter With Converter, you can convert measures from one unit to another. The converter has limited accu racy, and rounding errors may occur. Other applications é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 94
Select Menu > Applications > Converter . Dictionary Select Menu > Applications > Dictionary . To translate words from one la nguage to another, enter text in the search field. As you en ter text, s uggestions of words to translate are disp layed. To translate a w ord, select the word from the list. Select Options and from the following: â Listen â Listen to the selected word. â History â Find previously translated words from the current session. â Languages â Change the source or targ et language. â Languages â Download languages from the internet or remove a language from the dictionary. You cannot remove the English langua ge from the dictionary. You can have two additional la nguage s installed, be sides English. â Speech â Edit the voice feature settings. You ca n adjust the speed and volume of the voice. 21. Settings Some settings may be preset fo r the device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change them. Phone settings Date and time settings Select Menu > Settings and Ph one > Date and time . Select from the following: â Time â Enter the current time. â Time zone â Select your location. â Date â Enter the date. â Date for mat â Select the date format. â Date s eparator â Select the sy mbol that separates day s, months, and years. â Time format â Select the time format. â Time separator â Select the symbol tha t separates hours and minute s. â Clock type â Select the clock type. â Clock alarm tone â Select the to ne for the alarm clock. â Alarm snooze time â Adjust the snooze time. â Workdays â Select your working days. You can then set an alarm only for working day mornings, for example. â Automatic time update â To update the time, date, and time zone, select On . This network service may not be available on all networks . Language settings Select Menu > Settings and Pho ne > Language . To change the device language, select Phone l anguage . To change the writing lan guage, select Writing language . Settings é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 95
To turn predictive text input on or off, select Predictive text . Display settings Select Menu > Settings and Ph one > Display . Select from the following: â Light s ensor â Adjust the light sensor sensitivity of your device. The light sensor turns the light s on when the lighting of your location is dim and off when it is bright. â Font size â Select the size of text and icons on the display. â Welcome note / logo â Select whether you wa nt to display a note or image when you switch on the device. â Light t ime-out â Set how long the lig ht stays on when you stop using the dev ice. Voice commands You can use enhanced voice com mands to control your device. To activate enhanced voice commands to start applica tions and profiles, press and hold th e call key in the home screen. To use enhanced voice commands , press and hold the call key in the home screen, and speak a voice command. The voice command is the name of the application or profile displayed in the list. Select Menu > Settings and Ph one > Voice commands . To edit the voice commands, select Options > Change command . To listen to the synthe sised voice tag, select Options > Playback . To remove a voice command that you added manually, select Options > Remove voic e command . Select Options > Settings and from the following: â Synthesise r â Turn on or off th e synthesiser that plays recognised voice tags an d commands in the selected device language. â Playback volume â Adjust the playback volume for the voice commands. â Recognition sens itivity â Adjust how easily the synthesiser recognises speech. If the sensitiv ity is set too high, it may not accept comma nds because of background noise. â Command verification â Select whether the s poken command is accepted ma nually, by voice, or automatically. â Reset voice adaptation â Reset voice recognition learning, for example, when the main user of the device has changed . Accessory settings Select Menu > Settings and Pho ne > Accessories . Some accessory connectors indi cate which type of accessory is connected to the device. Select an accessory and from the following: â Default profile â Set the profile that you want activated each time you connect a certain compatible accessory to your device. Settings é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 96
â Automatic answ er â Select whether you want the device to answer an incomi ng call automatically after 5 seconds. If the ringing type is set to Beep o nce or Silent , automatic ans wer is disabled. â Lights â Set whether lights remain on after the time-out. The available settings depend on the type of accessory. TV-out settings To change the sett ings for a TV-out connect ion, select TV- Out and from the following: â Default pr ofile â Set the profile that you want activated each time you connect a Noki a Video Connectivity Cable to your device. â TV screen size â Select the aspect ratio of the TV: Normal or Wides creen for widescreen TVs. â TV system â Select the analogue video signal system that is compatible with your TV. â Flicker fil ter â To improve image quality on the screen of your TV , selec t On . The flicker filter may not diminish image flicker on all TV screens. Application settings Select Menu > Settings and Ph one > Application sett. . In application settings , you can edit the settings of some of the applications in your device. To edit the settings, you can also select Opt ions > Settings in each application. Device updates Select Menu > Settings and Pho ne > Phone mgmt. > Device updates . Use Device updates to check for software updates, t o connect to a server and receive configuration settings for your d evice, to create new server profiles, or to view existing software version and device inform ation and v iew and manage existing server profiles. You may receive server profil es and different configuration settings from your service providers and company information management depa rtment. These configuration settings may include connection and other settings used by different applications in your device. To check for software updates, select Option s > Check for updates . To connect to the server and receive configuration sett ings for your device, select Options > Se rver profiles , a profile, and Options > Start configuration . To create a server profile, select Options > Server profiles > Option s > New se rver profile . To delete a server profile, select the profile and Options > Delete . Security settings Phone and SI M Select Menu > Settings and Pho ne > Phone mgmt. > Security > Phone an d SIM card . Select from the following: Settings é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 97
â PIN cod e request â When active, the code is requested each time the device is switched on. Deactivating the PIN code request may not be a llowed by some S IM cards. â PIN cod e and PIN2 code â Change the PIN and PIN2 code. These codes can only include numbers. Avoid using access codes similar to the emergency numbers to prevent accidental dialling of the em ergency number. If you forget the PIN or PIN2 code, contact your service p rovider. If you forget the lock code, contact a Nokia Care point or your service provider. â Lock code â The lock code is used to unlock the device. To avoid unauthorised use of your device, change the lock code. The preset code is 12345. The new code can be 4-255 characters long. Alph anumeric characters and both uppercase and low ercase char acters can be used. The device notifies you if the lock code is not properly formatted. Keep th e new code secret and separate from your device. â Phone autolock period â To avoid unauthorised use, you can set a t ime-out af ter which the device automatically locks. A locked device cannot be used until the correct lock code is entere d. To turn o ff autolock, select None . â Lock if SIM card changed â Set the device to ask for the l o c k c od e w he n a n u nk no wn SI M c ar d i s i ns er t e d i n to yo ur device. The device maintains a li st of SIM cards that are recognised as the ownerâÂÂs cards. â Remote ph one lockin g â Enable or disable remote lock. â Closed u ser group â Specify a group of people to whom you can call and who can call you (network service). â Confirm SIM services â Set the device to display confirmation messages when you are using a SIM card service (network service). In the offline or flight profiles , you may need to unlock the device and change to the calling profile before making a call. When calls are limited to closed user groups, calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Certificate management Select Menu > Settings and Pho ne > Phone mgmt. > Security > Certificate management . Digital certificates should be used if you wan t to connect to an online bank or another site or remote server for actions that involve transferri ng confidential informati on. They should also be used if you want to reduce the risk of viruses or other malicious software and be sure of the authenticity of software when downloadin g and installing software. Select from the following: â Authority certifi cates â View and edit authority certificates. â Trusted site ce rtificates â View and edit trusted site certificates. â Personal certificates â View and edit personal certificates. â Phone certificates â View and edit device certificates. Digital certificates do not guar antee safety; they are used to verify the origin of software. Settings é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 98
Important: Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote connections and software installation considerab ly smaller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer any protecti on by itself; the certificate manager must co ntain correct, authentic, or trusted certificates for increa sed secur ity to be available. Certificates have a restricted li fetime. If "Expired certificate" or "Certificate not valid yet" is shown, even if the certificate should be valid, chec k that the curren t date and tim e in your device are correct. View certificate details â check authenticity You can only be s ure of the co rrect identity of a server when the signature and the validity pe riod of a server certificate have been checked. You are notified if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the corre ct security certificate in your device. To check the details of a certificate, select Options > Certificate det ails . The validity of the certificate is checked, and one of the following notes may be displayed: â Certificate not trus ted â You have not set any application to use the certificate. â Expired certificate â The certificate validity period has ended. â Certificate not valid y et â The certificate validity period has not yet begun. â Certificate corrupted â The certificate cannot be used. Contact the certificate issuer. Change the trust settings Before changing any certificat e sett ings, you must make sure that you really trust the owner of the certificate an d that the certificate really belong s to the listed owner. To change the settings for an authority certificate, select Options > Trust settings . Depending on the certificate, a list of the applications tha t ca n use the selected certificate is shown. For example: â Symbian installation : Yes â The certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Symbian operating system application. â Internet : Yes â The certificate is able to certify servers. â App. installation : Yes â The certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Java⢠application. To change the value, select Op tions > Change trust setting . Security module Select Menu > Settings and Pho ne > Phone mgmt. > Security > Security module . To vi ew or edit a s ecuri ty mod u le (if available), select it from the list. To view detailed information about a security module, select Options > Security details . Settings é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 99
Restore original settings Select Menu > Settings and Ph one > Phon e mgmt. > Factory settings . You can reset some of the settings to their original values. To do this, you need the lock code. After resetting, the device may take a long er time to power on. Documents and fi les are unaffected. Protected cont ent To manage digital righ ts licences, select Menu > Settings and Phone > Phone mgmt. > Se curity > Prot ected content . Digital rights management Content owners may use different types of digital rights management (DRM) technologies to protect their intellect ual property, including copyrights. Th is device uses various types of DRM software to acces s DRM-protected content. With th is device you can access content protected with WMDRM 10, OMA DRM 1.0, and OMA DR M 2.0. If certain DRM software fails to protect the content, conten t owners may ask that su ch DRM software's ability to access new DRM-protected con tent be revoked. Revocation may also prevent renewal of such DRM- protected content already in yo ur device. Revocation of such DRM software does not affect the use of content protected with other types of DRM or the use of non-DRM-protected content. Digital rights manag ement (DRM) protected content comes with an ass ociated activ ation key th at defines your rights to use the content. If your device has WMDRM-p rotected content, both the activation keys and the content will be lost if the device memory is formatted. You may also lose the activation key s and the content if th e files on your device get corrupted. Losing the activation key s or the content may limit you r ability to use the same content on your device again. For more information, contact your service provider. Some activation keys may be co nnected to a specific S IM card, and the protected content can be accessed only if the SIM card is inserted in the device. Notification light Select Menu > Settings and Pho ne > Notifica tion light . When the notification light is turned on, the menu key lights up periodically to notify of missed eve nts, such as missed calls or unread messages. To turn the notifica tion light on or off, select No tification light . Call settings Call settings Select Menu > Settings . Select Calling > Call and from the following: â Send my caller ID â Select Yes to show your phone number to the person you are calling. To use the setting agreed upon with your service provider, select Set by network ) (network service). Settings é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 100
â Call waitin g â Activate your device to notify you of incoming calls while you are in a call (network service), or check whether the function is activa ted. â Reject call with me ssage â Activate rejecting a call wit h a text message to inform the caller wh y you could not answer the call. â Message text â Write the standard text mess age that is sent when you reject a call. â Own video in recvd. call â Select to allow or deny video sending during a video call from your device. â Image in v ideo call â If video is not sent during a video call, you can select a still im age to be displayed instead. â Automatic r edial â Set your device to ma ke a maximum of 10 attempts to connect the call after an unsuccess ful call attempt. To stop automatic redialling, press the end key. â Show call duration â Set the length of a call to be displayed during the call. â Summary after call â Set the length of a call to be displayed after the call. â Speed dial â Activate speed dialling. â Anykey answ er â Activate anykey answer. â Line in use â This setting (network service) is shown o nly if the SIM card supports two subscriber numbers, that is, two phone lines. Select which phone line yo u want to u se for making calls and sending text messages. Calls on both lines can be answered irresp ec tive of the selected line. If you select Line 2 and have not subscribed to this network service, you are not able to make calls. When line 2 is selected, is shown in the home screen. â Line change â Select to prevent line selection (network service), if supported by yo ur SIM card. To change this setting, you need the PIN2 code. Call divert Select Menu > Settings and Cal ling > Call divert . Call divert allows you to divert incoming calls to your voice mailbox or another phone numb er. For details, contact your service provider. To activate call divert, select Activate . To check whether the option is active, select Check status . Several diverting options can be active at the same time. When all calls are diverted, is displayed in the home screen. Call barring and call diverting ca nnot be active at the same time. Call barring Select Menu > Settings and Cal ling > Call ba rring . Call barring (network service) a llows you to restrict the calls that you make or receive with the device. For example, you can restrict all outgoing intern ational calls or incoming calls when you are abroad . To change the settings, you need the barring password from your service provider. Call barring and call diverting ca nnot be active at the same time. Settings é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 101
When calls are barred, calls may be possible to certain official emergency numbers. Voice call barring Select the desired barring option and Activate , Deactivate , or Check status . Call barring affects a ll calls, including data calls. 22. Troubleshooting To view frequently asked ques tions about your device, see the product support pages a t www.nokia.com/support . Q: What is my password for the lock, PIN, or PUK codes? A: The default lock code is 12345 . If you forget the lock code, contact your device dealer. If you forget a PIN or PUK code, or if you have not received such a code, contact your network service provider. For information about passwords, contact your access point provider, for exam ple, a commercial internet service provider (ISP ) or network service provider. Q: How do I clo se an application that is no t responding? A: Press and hold the menu key, select Option s > Show open apps. , and navigate to the app lication with the menu key. Press and hold the menu key, and select Exit . Q: Why do images look smudg y? A: Ensure that the camera len s protection windows are clean. Q: Why do missing, discoloured, or bright dots appear on the screen every time I swit ch on my device? A: This is a characteristic of this type of display. Some displays may contain pixels or dots that remain on or off. This is normal, not a fau lt. Q: Why can't my No kia device establish a GPS connection? A: Establishing a GPS co nnection may t ake from a couple of seconds to several minutes. Establishing a GPS connection in a vehicle may take longer. If you are indoors, go outdoors to receive a better signal. If you are outdoors, move to a more open space. Ensure that your hand does not cover the GPS antenna of your device. If the weather cond itions are bad, the signal strength may be affecte d. Some vehicles have tinted (athermic) windows, whi ch may block the satellite signals. Q: Why canâÂÂt I find my f riendâÂÂs device while us ing Bluetooth connectivity ? A: Check that both devices are compatible , have activated Bluetooth connectivity, and are not in hidden m ode. Check Troubl eshootin g é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 102
also that t he distance betw een the two devices is not over 10 metres (33 feet) and that there are no walls or other obstructions between the devices. Q: Why canâÂÂt I end a Bluetooth co nnection? A: If another dev ice is connected to your devic e, you can end the connection from the other device or deactivate Bluetooth connectivity in your device. Select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > Bluetooth > Bluetooth > Off . Q: Why can't I see a wireless LAN (WLAN) acc ess point even though I know I'm within its range? A: The WLAN access point may use a hidden service set identifier (SSID). You ca n only access networks that use a hidden SSID if you know t he correct SSID, and hav e created a WLAN internet access point fo r the network on your Nokia device. Q: How do I turn the wireless LAN (WLAN) off on my Nokia device? A: The WLAN on your Nokia device turns off when you are not connected or trying to connect to another access point , or not scanning for availa ble networ ks. To further reduce battery consumption, yo u can specify that yo ur Nokia device does not scan, or scans less often, for availa ble networks in the background. The WLAN turns off in between background scans. To change the backg round scan settings: 1. Select Menu > Settings and Wireless L AN . 2. To increase th e background scan time interval, adjust the time in Scan for networks. To stop background scans, select Show WLAN availability > Never . 3. To save your chan ges, select Back . When Show WLAN availabilit y is set to Never , the WLAN availability icon is not shown in the home screen. However, you can still manua lly scan for available WLAN networks, and connect to WLAN networks as usual. Q: What do I do if th e memory is full? A: Delete items from the memory. If Not enough memory to perform operat ion. Delete so me data first. or Me mory low. Delete som e data from phone memory. is displayed when you are deleting several items a t the same time, delete items one by one, beginning with the smallest ite ms. Q: Why canâÂÂt I select a con tact for my message? A: The contact card does not have a phone number, address, or e-mail address. Select Menu > Contacts and the relevant contact, and edit the contact ca rd. Q: How can I end the data connection when the device starts a data connection again and again? A: The device may be trying to retrieve a multimedia message from the multimedia message ce ntre. To stop the device from making a data connection, select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settings > Multimed ia message > Multimedi a retrieval . Select Manual to have the multimedia messaging centre sa ve messages to be retrieved later, or Off to ignore all incoming multimedia m essages. If you select Manual , you receive a notification when you have Troubleshooting é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 103
a new message in the mu ltimed ia message centre. If you select Off , the device does not make any network connect ions related to multimedia messaging. To set the device to use a packet data connection only if you start an application or action that needs it, select Menu > Settings and Admin. settings > Packet data > Packet data connection > When nee ded . If this does not help, switch the device off and then on again. Q: Can I use my Nokia device as a f ax modem with a compatible PC? A: You cannot use your device as a fax modem. However, with call diverting (network service) , you can divert incom ing fax calls to a fax number. Q: How do I calibrate the screen? A: The screen is calibrated at th e factory. If it is necessary to recalibrate the screen, select Menu > Settings and Pho ne > Touch input > Touch scree n calibration . Follow the instructions on the display. Troubl eshootin g é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 104
Accessories Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and accessories approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The use of any othe r types ma y invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. For availability of approved accessories, please check with your dealer. When you disconnect the power cord of any accessory, grasp and pull the plug , not the cord. Battery Battery and charger information Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. Th e battery intended for use with this de vice is BL- 5J. Nokia may make additional battery models av ailable for this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from the following chargers: AC-8, AC-5. The exact charger model number may vary depending on the type of plug. The plug variant is identified by one of the following: E, EB, X, AR, U, A, C, or UB. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times, but it will eventually wear out. When th e talk and standby times are noticeably shorter tha n normal, replace the battery. Use only N okia approved batteries, an d recharge your battery on ly with Nokia ap proved chargers desig nated for this device. Use of an unapproved battery or charger may present a risk of fire, explos ion, leakage, or other hazard. If a battery is being used for the first time or if the battery has not been us ed for a prolonge d period, it may be nec essary to connect the charger, then disconn ect and reconnect it to begin charging the battery. If the batt ery is completely discharged, it may take severa l min utes before the charging indicator appea rs on the displa y or before any calls can be made. Always switch the device o ff and disconnect th e charger before removing the battery. Unplug the charger from the el ectrical plug and the device when not in use. Do not le ave a fully charged battery connected to a ch arger, since overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time. Always try to keep the battery between 15ðC a nd 25ðC (59ðF and 77ðF). Extreme temperatures reduce the capacity and lifetime of the battery. A device w ith a hot or cold battery may not wor k tempor arily. Batt ery performa nce is part icularly limited in temperatures well below freezing. Do not short-circuit the battery. Accidenta l short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object suc h as a coin, clip, or pen é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 105
causes direct connection of th e po sitive ( ) and negativ e (-) terminals of the battery . (These look like metal strips on the battery.) This might happ en, fo r example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals ma y damage the batter y or the connecting object. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire as they may explode. Batteries may also explode if damaged. Dispose of batteries according to local re gulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household w aste. Do not dismantle, cut, open, crus h, bend, deform, puncture, or shred cells or batteries. In the event of a battery leak, do not allow the liquid to come in contact with the skin or eyes. In the event of such a leak , flush your skin or eyes immediately with water, or seek medical help. Do not modify, remanufacture, attempt to insert foreign objects into the battery, or immerse or expose it to wate r or other liquids. Improper battery use may result in a fire, explosion, or other hazard. If the device or batter y is dropped, especially on a hard surface, and you believe the battery has been damaged, take it to a service centre for inspection before continuing to use it. Use the battery only for its in tended purpose. Never use any charger or battery that is dama ged. Keep your battery out of the reach of small children. Nokia battery authentication guidel ines Always use original Nokia batter ies for your safety. To check that you are getting a n original Nokia battery, pu rchase it from a Nokia authorised service centre or dealer, and inspect the hologram label usin g the following steps: Successful completion of the steps is not a total assurance of the authenticity of the bat tery. If you have any reason to believe that your battery is not an au thentic, original Nokia battery, you should refrain from using it, and take it to the nearest Nokia authorised service centre or dealer for assistance. If authenticity cannot be verified, return the battery to the place of purchase. Authenticate hologram 1. When you look at the hologram on the label, you should see the Nokia connecting hands symbol from one angle and the No kia Origin al Enhancements logo when looking from another angle. Battery é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 106
2. When you angle the hologram left, right, down and up , you should see 1, 2, 3 and 4 dots on each side respectively. What if your battery is not authentic? If you cannot confirm that your Nokia battery with the hologram on the label is an au thentic Nokia battery, please do not use the battery. Take it to the nearest Nokia authorised service centre or dealer for assistance. The use of a batte ry that is not approv ed by Nokia may be dang erous and may result in poor performance and damage to your device and its accessories. It may also inva lidate any approval or warranty applying to the device. To find out more about origin al Nokia batt eries, see www.nokia.com/battery. Care and maintenance Your device is a product of su perior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with ca re. The following suggestions will help you protect your warranty coverage. â Keep the device dry. Precipi tation, humidity , and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If your device does get wet, remove the battery, and allow the device to dry completely before replacing it. â Use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clean any lenses, such as camera, proximity sensor, and light sensor lenses. â Do not use or store the device in dusty, dirty ar eas. Its moving parts and electronic components can be damaged. â Do not store the device in hot areas. High temperatures can shorten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. â Do not store the device in cold areas. When the device returns to its normal temp erature, moisture can form inside the device and damage electronic circuit boards. â Do not attempt to open the device other than as instructed in this guide. â Do not drop, knock, or shake the device. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards and fine mechanics. â Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the device. â Do not paint the device. Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operation. â Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauth orised antennas, modifications, or attachments could damage th e devi ce and may violate regulations govern ing radio devices. Care and maintenance é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 107
â Use chargers indoors. â Always create a backu p of data you want to keep, s uch as contacts and calendar notes. â To reset the device from time to time for optim um performance, power off the device and remove the battery . These suggestions a pply equally to your device, battery, charger, or any accessory. If any device is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorised s ervice facility for service. Recycle Always return your used elec tronic products, batteries, and packaging materials to a dedica ted collection point. This way you help prevent uncontrolled waste disposal and promote the recycling of materials. More detailed information is available from the product retailer, local waste authorities, national producer responsibility organisations, or your local Nokia representative. Check how to recycle your Nokia products at www.nokia.com/werecycle, or if browsing on a mobile device, www.nokia.mobi/werecycle. The crossed-out wheeled-bin symbol on your product, battery, literature, or pack aging reminds you that all electrical and electronic products, batteries, and accumulators must be take n to separate collection at the end of their working life. Th is requirement applies in the European Union. D o not dispose of these produc ts as unsorted municipal waste. For more environmental information, see the product Eco-Declarations at www.nokia.com/envi ronment. Additional safety information Small children Your device and its accessories may contain small part s. Keep them out of the reach of small children. Operating environment This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used either in the normal use position agai nst the ear or when positioned at least 1.5 cent imetres (5/8 inch) away from the body. W hen a carry case, belt clip, or holder is used for body-worn operation, it should not cont ain metal an d should position the device the above-stated dis tance from your body. To transmit data files or messa ges, this device requires a quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data files or messages may be delayed until such a connection is available. En sure the above separation distance instructions are follo wed until the transmission is completed. Parts of the device are magnetic. Meta llic materials may be attracted to the device. Do no t place credit cards or other Additiona l safe ty info rmatio n é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 108
magnetic storag e media near the device, because information stored on them may be erased. Medical devices Operation of any radio transm itting equipment, including wireless phones, may interfer e with the functionality of inadequately protected medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medica l device to determine if they are adequately shielded fr om external RF energy or if you have any questions. S w i tc h o f f yo u r de v i c e i n he a l t h ca r e facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health ca re facilities may be using equipment that could be sen sit ive to external RF energy. Implanted medical devices Manufacturers of medical devices recommend that a minimum separation of 15.3 ce ntimetres (6 inches) should be maintained between a wirele ss device and an implanted medical device, such as a pacemaker or implanted cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential interference with the medical device. Pers ons who have such devices should: â Always keep the wireless device more than 15.3 centimetres (6 inches) from the medical device when the wireless device is turned on. â Not carry the wireless devi ce in a breast pocket. â Hold the wireless device to the ear opposi te the medical device to minimise the potential for in terference. â Turn the wireless device off immediately if there is any reason to suspect that interference is ta king place. â Read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of their implanted medical device. If you have any questions about using your wireless device with an implanted medical device, con sult your health care provider. Hearing aids Some digital wireless devices may interfere with some hearing aids. If interference occurs, consult your service provider. Vehicles RF signals may affect improper ly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection systems, electronic antiskid (antilock) braking syste ms, electronic spee d control systems, and air bag systems. For more information, check with the manufactur er, or it s repres entativ e, of your veh icle or any equipment that has been added. Only qualified personnel should service the device or install the device in a vehicle. Fau lty installation or service may be dangerous and may inva lidate any warranty that may apply to the device. Check regula rly that all wireless device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, ga ses, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the device, its parts, or accessories. For vehicles equipped with an air Additional safety information é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 109
bag, remember that air bags in flate with great force. Do not place objects, including inst alled or portable wireless equipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is improperly installed and the ai r bag inflates, serious injury could result. Using your device while flying in aircraft is prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an airc raft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, di srupt the wireless telephone network, and may be illegal. Potentially explosive environments Switch off your device when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere, and obey all sig ns and instructions. Potentially explosive atmosphe res include areas where you would normal ly be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such ar eas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the device at refuelling points such as near gas pumps at service stations. Observe restrictions on the us e of radio equipment in fuel depots, storage, and distribut ion areas; chemical plants; or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They include be low deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facilities and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust, or metal powders. You should check with the manufacturers of vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (suc h as propane or but ane) to determine if this device can be safely used in their vicinity. Emergency calls Important : This device operates using radio signals, wireless networks, landline networks, and user-programmed functions. If your device suppor ts voice calls over the internet (internet calls), activate both the internet calls and the cellular phone. The device wi ll attempt to make emergency calls over both the cellula r networks and through your internet call provider if both ar e activated. Conn ections in all conditions cannot be guaranteed. You should never rely solely on any wireless device for essential communica tions like medical emergencies. To make an emergency call: 1. If the device is not on, sw itch it on. Check for adequate signal streng th. Depending on your device, you may also need to complete the following: â Insert a SIM card if your device uses one. â Remove certain call restrict ions you have ac tivated in your device. â Change your profile from offline profile mode to an active profile. â If the screen and keys are locked, slide the lock switch on the side of the device to unlock them. 2. Press the end key as many ti mes as needed to clear the display and ready the device for calls. 3. Open the dialler by selecting the dialler icon ( ). Additiona l safe ty info rmatio n é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 110
4. Enter the official emergency number for your present location. Emergency numbers vary by location. 5. Press the call key. When making an emergency ca ll, give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless device may be the only means of commu nication at the scene of an accident. Do not end the call un til given permission to do so. Certification information (SAR) This mobile device meets gu idelines for expos ure to radio waves. Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio waves recommended by internati onal guidelines. These guidelines were developed by the indepe ndent scientific organisation ICNIRP and include safety margins designed to assure the protection of all persons, re gardless of age and health. The exposure guidelines for mo bile devices employ a unit of measurement known as the Specif ic Absorption Rate or SAR. The SAR limit stated i n the IC NIRP guidelines is 2.0 watts/ kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Tests for SAR are conducted using s tandard operating posit ions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The actual SAR level of an operating device can be belo w the maximu m value because the device is designed to use only the power required to reach the network. Tha t amount ch anges dep ending on a number of factors such as how close you are to a network base station. The highest SAR value under the ICNIRP guidelines for use of the device at the ear i s 0.99 W/kg. Use of device accessories may re sult in different SAR values. SAR values may vary dependin g on national reporting and testing requirements and the network ban d. Additional SAR information may be provided under product information at www.nokia.com. Additional safety information é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 111
Index A access codes 19 access points 71, 72 groups 72 accessories 96 active toolbar 58 alarm calendar note 90 alarm clock 89 answering calls 30 antennas 25 application manage r 91 settings 93 application set tings 97 application s 91 updating 93 assisted GP S (A-GPS) 61 attachments 44, 46 audio messages 43 auto-update for time/date 89 B backing up device me mory 90 battery saving p ower 20 blogs 85 Bluetooth connectivity blocking devices 78 device address 77 device visibility 76 pairing devices 77 receiving data 77 security 76 sending data 76 settings 76 turning on/off 76 bookmarks 87 browser bookmarks 87 browsing pages 84, 85 cache memory 87 downloads 86 searching content 86 security 87 toolbar 85 widgets 86 C cable connection 78 cache memory 87 calculator 94 calendar 90 toolbar 90 call log 36 call waiting 31 calls 29 answering 30 conference 30 duration of 36 missed 35 options during 29 received 35 redialling 100 rejecting 30 settings 100 video calls 32 camera flash 59 image mode 58 indicators 56 location information 5 9 options 58 recording 61 scenes 59 self-timer 59 sequence mode 60 video mode 60 capture settings in camera 5 7 cell broadcast messages 46 certificates 98 clock 89 computer connections 79 See also data connections conference calls 30 é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 112
contacts copying 41 default information 41 deleting 4 0 editing 40 images in 40 names and num bers 40 ringing tones 41 saving 40 sending 40 synchronising 75 voice t ags 40 copyright protectio n 100 D data connectio ns cable 78 device updates 97 PC connectivity 79 synchronisation 75 date and time 89 date and time settings 95 declining calls See reje cting ca lls device updat es 97 dialled numbers 35 dictiona ry 95 dismissing calls 3 0 display rotation 2 6 display setti ngs 96 double-tap 16 Download! 88 purchasing and downloading items 89 downloads 86 drag 16 DRM (digital right s managemen t) 100 duration of calls 36 E e-mail messages 45 end all calls option 31 F factory settings restoring 100 feeds, news 85 file manager 90, 91 backing up files 91 organising files 90 G gallery 54 organising 54 viewing 54 viewing images 5 4 viewing videos 54 general information 18 GPS position requests 63 GPS (Global Positioning System) 61 H headset 27 help application 18 I IAPs (internet access points) 71 inbox message 44 inbox, mess age 44 indicators and icons 22 installing applications 91 instant messagin g 48 internet co nnection 84 See also browser J Java applications 91 JME Java application support 91 K keypad lock 15 keys and parts 12 L landmarks 63 language settings 95 licences 100 Index é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 113
location inform ation 61 lock code 19 lock switch 15 locking device with SMS 28 locking the keys 15 loudspeaker 24 M mailbox e-mail 45 voice 3 0 Maps browsing 65 Favourites 67 finding locations 66 indicators 66 navigatin g 68 network positioning 65 Nokia Ma p Loader 6 8 routes 67 saved items 67 saving locations 67 sending locations 67 updating 68 maps 65 media music player 50 RealPlayer 93 media bar 17 media key 17 memory clearing 21 web cache 87 memory card backing up files 91 editing 91 menu 16 message s e-mail 45 folders for 42 icon for incoming 44 multimedia 44 settings 47 voice 30 Mini Map 85 MMS (multimedia message service) 43, 44 multimedia messages 43, 44 music p layer 50 playlists 5 1 transferring music 51 muting sound 30 N navigation tools 6 1 network settings 69 news feeds 85 Nokia Care 18 Nokia Map Loader 68 Nokia Music Store 52 notes 94 notification light 100 O offline profil e 26 outbox, m essage 43 P packet data connection access point settings 73 counters 36 settings 79 page overview 85 personal certif icates 98 personalisat ion 49 photos See camera PIN code 19 PIN2 code 19 podcasting downloads 53 settings 52 positionin g information 61 positionin g settings 64 presentations, m ultimedia 44 profiles 49 offline restrictions 26 proximity sensor 29 proxy settings 73 PUK codes 19 Index é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 114
R radio listening 53 stations 54 RealPlayer 93 recording settings in camera 5 7 recording vi deo clips 60 rejecting calls 30 remote lock See locking device with SMS remote mailbox 45 remote SIM mode 78 removing applications 92 removing SIM card 27 roaming 69 S scenes image and video 5 9 searching 88 security certificates 98 web browser 87 WEP 74 WPA 74 security code 19 security module 99 select 16 self-tim er camera 59 sensors 26 sent messages folder 43 service commands 47 service mes sages 45 settings 57, 95, 96 access point name control 79 access points 72 applications 97 Bluetooth connectivity 76 call barring 101 call divert 101 calls 100 certificates 98 date and time 95 display 96 language 95 network 69 packet data 79 packet data access poin ts 73 podcasting 52 positioning 64 SIP 79 tv-out 97 video centre 83 video sharing 34 WLAN 71, 74 WLAN internet access points 73 Share online 80 accounts 80 activating services 80 creating posts 81 posting 81 subscribing 80 shared video 33 shooting modes camera 59 SIM card 27 inserting 13 messages 46 SIM card security 97 SIP 79 SMS (short message service) 43 software applications 91 software updat e 19 songs 50 speakerphone 24 speed di alling 30 stylus 15 swipe 16 Symbian applicat ions 91 synchronisation of dat a 75 T tap 16 text messages receiving and reading 44 replying to 44 sending 43 settings 47 SIM messages 46 themes 49 time and date 89 transferring content 21 Index é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 115
troubleshootin g 102 TV configuration 97 tv-out mode 55 U UPIN code 19 UPUK code 19 USB cable connection 78 useful information 18 V video ca lls 32, 33 options during 32 Video Centre 81 video centre downloading 82 my videos 83 transferring videos 83 video feeds 82 viewing 82 video clips shared 33 video sharin g accepting in vitation 35 requirements 33 sharing live v ideo 34 sharing v ideo clips 34 voice applications 96 voice calls See calls voice commands 31, 96 volume cont rols 24 W wallpaper 49 web connection 84 web logs 85 week settings calendar alarm 90 Welcome 21 WEP 74 widgets 86 wireless LAN (WLAN) 70 wireless LAN settings 71 WPA 7 4 wrist strap 28 Z zooming 58, 60 Index é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 116
DECLARATIO N OF CONFORMI TY Hereby, NOKIA CORPOR ATION declares that this R M-356 product is in compliance with the essential requirements and ot her relevant provisions of Directive 1999/ 5/EC. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can b e found at http://www. nokia.com/phones/ declaration_of_conformity/. é 2008 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia, Nokia Connecting Peop le, Nokia Care, and XpressMusic are trad emarks o r registered trademarks of Nokia Corpor ation. Nokia tune is a sound mark of Nokia Corporation. Other product and company names mentioned herein ma y be trademarks or tradenam es of their respective owners. Reproduction, transfer, di stribution , or storage of par t or all of the contents in this document in any form without t he prior written permission of Nokia is prohibited . This product inclu des software licensed fro m Symbian Software Ltd é1998-2008. Symb ian and Symbi an OS are trademarks of Symbian Ltd . This software is based in part of the work of the FreeType Team. This product is covered by one or more of the following patent s: United States Paten t 5,155,805, United States Patent 5,325,4 79, United States Patent 5,1 59,668, United States Pa tent 2232861 and France Pa tent 9005712. US Patent No 5818437 and other pending pa tents. T9 text input software Copy right é 1997-2008. Tegic Communica tions, Inc. All ri ghts reserved. Java and all Java-based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. Portions of the Nokia Maps softwar e are é1996-2008 The FreeType Project. All rights reserved. This product is licensed under the MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio License (i) for personal and nonco mmercial use in conne ction with information which has been encoded in compli ance with the MPEG-4 Visual Standard by a cons umer engaged in a personal and no ncommercial activity and (ii) f or use in connection with MPEG-4 video provided by a licensed video provider. No licens e is granted or shall be implied fo r any other use. Additional informatio n, including that related to promotional, internal, and commercial uses, ma y be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. See http: //www.mpegla.com . Nokia operates a policy of ongoing d evelopment. Nokia res erves the right to ma ke changes and improv ements to any of the product s described in thi s document without prior notice. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERM ITTED BY APPL ICABLE LAW, UNDER NO CI RCUMSTANCES SHALL NOK IA OR ANY OF ITS LICENSOR S BE RESPONSIBLE FO R AN Y LOSS OF DAT A OR INCOME OR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUE NTIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES HOWSOEVER CAUSED.
THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT AR E PROVIDED "AS IS". EXCEPT AS RE Q U I RE D B Y A P PL I C A B L E L A W , N O W A RR A N T I E S OF A N Y K I N D, E I T H E R E X P RESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITE D TO, THE IMP LIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT ABILITY AND FITNE SS FOR A PARTICULA R PURPOSE, A RE MADE IN RELATI ON TO THE ACCURACY, RELIABILITY OR CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT . NOKIA RE SERVES THE RIGHT TO REVISE THIS DOCU MENT OR WITHDRA W IT AT ANY TIM E WITHOUT PRIO R NOTICE. Reverse engineering of any software in the No kia device is prohibited to the extent permitt ed by applicable l aw. Insofar as thi s user guide contains an y limitations on Nokia's represen tations, warrantie s, damages and liabilities, such limitations shall likewise limit an y representations, wa rran ties, dama ges and liabilities of Nokia's licensors. The third-party applications provided wit h your device may have been created and may be owned by persons or entiti es not affili ated with or related to Nok ia. Nokia does not own the copyrights or intellectual property rights to the third-party a pplications. As such, Nok ia does not take any r es ponsibility for end-us er support, functionality of the applications, or the information in the a pplications or these materia ls. Nokia does n ot provide an y warran ty for the third-party applications. BY USING THE APPL ICATIONS YOU ACKNOW LEDGE THAT THE A PPLICATIONS ARE PROV IDED AS IS WITHOUT WARR ANTY OF ANY KIN D, EXPRESS OR IMPL IE D, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED B Y APPLICABLE LAW. YOU FU RTHER ACKNOWLEDGE THAT NEITHER NOKIA NOR ITS A FFILIATES MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS O R W ARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, IN CLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES O F TITLE, MERCH ANTABILITY OR FI TNESS FOR A PARTIC ULAR PURPOSE, OR THAT THE APP LICATIONS WILL NOT INFR INGE ANY THIRD-PARTY PATENTS, COPYRIGH TS, TRADEMARKS, OR OTHER RIGHTS. The availability of part icular products an d applications and services for these products may vary by region. Please check with your Nokia dealer for details, and availabili ty of language option s. Export controls This device may contain commod ities, technology or software subject to export laws and regulations from the US and ot her countr ies. Diversion contr ary to law is prohibited. FCC/INDUSTRY CA NADA NOTICE Your device may cause TV or radio interferen ce (for example, when usin g a telephone in clos e proximity to receiving equipment). The FCC or Indu stry Canada can require you to stop using your telephone if such inter ference cannot be elimina ted. If you require assistance, contact your local service facility. Th is device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the follo wing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this dev ice must accept any interference received, includi ng interference that may cause und esired operation. Any changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by Nokia co uld void the user's authority to operate this equipment. Model number: 5800d-1 /Issue 2 EN
Contents Safety................. .................. .............. ............... .10 About your device............... ........................ .......................... ...10 Network services.................................................... .................11 1. Get started........................... ........................... 12 Keys and parts........ ......................... ................................. ........12 Insert the SIM card...................... ....................... ......................13 Insert battery ..........................................................................13 Charge the battery..... .............................. ................................14 Switch the device on...............................................................15 Stylus.............. ..................... ....................... ..................... ..........15 Lock the keys and touch screen.................... ............... ..........15 Home screen............................ ....................... ...................... ...15 Access the menu......................................................................16 Touch screen actions................. ....................................... .......16 Media key............ ................... .................... ...................... .........17 Change the ringing t one.........................................................18 Nokia support................................................ ..........................18 2. Find help....................... ...................... ............18 In-device help................................... ............................ ...........18 Extended user guide............ ................... ..................... ............18 Software updates............................................... .....................19 Settings........ .............................. ........................... ....................19 Access codes............................ .......................................... .......19 Prolong battery life................................... ........................ ......20 Free memory.......................................................... ..................21 3. Your device..................................................... 21 Welcome.................................. ................................. ................21 Transfer content.......................................................... ............21 Display indicators.............................................................. ......22 Memory card.................................... ......................... ...............23 Insert the memory card.............................. ............... ..........23 Remove the memory card......... ......................... ..................24 Volume and loudspeaker control........................ ...................24 Shortcuts............................................. .....................................2 5 Antenna locations. ......................... ....................... ...................25 Contacts bar.......................................... ...................................2 5 Offline prof ile...........................................................................26 Sensor settings and display rotat ion.....................................26 Headset............................ ................................... ......................27 Remove the SIM card.................................. .............................27 Attach a wrist strap.................................................................28 Remote lock.......................... ...................... ......................... ....28 4. Make calls................................... ....................29 Proximity sensor..................... .......................................... .......28 Voice calls ........................... .....................................................28 During a call...................................................................... .......29 Voice mailbox ..... ......................... ....................... .....................30 Answer or reject a call....................... ................................... ...30 Make a conference call............................................................30 Speed dial a phone number ................... ............. ................ ..30 Call waiting.... ..................... ................... ...................... .............31 Voice dialling.... .......................... ........................ ..................... .31 Make a video call.... .................. .................. ....................... .......32 During a video call..... ..............................................................32
Answer or reject a video call................................. .............. ...33 Video sharing...........................................................................33 Video sharing requiremen ts................................................33 Settings....................... ...................................................... .....34 Share live video or video clips.............................................34 Accept an invitation. ...................... ........................ ...............35 Log .......... ................... ................... ................... .................. .......35 Recent calls..................... ................................................ .......35 Recent calls toolbar....................................... .......................35 Call duration..........................................................................36 Packet data.... ......................................... ...............................36 Monitor all communication events................ ............... ......36 5. Write text....................... ......................... .......36 On-screen keyboard.......................... ................. ............... ......37 Handwriting.............................................................................37 Alphanumeric keypad......................................... ................... .38 Icons and functions........................................ ......................38 Traditional text inp ut...........................................................39 Predictive text input...................... .......................................39 Switch between text modes................................................39 Touch input settings....................................... ..................... ...39 6. Contacts (phonebook)......................... ...........40 Save and edit names and numbers............... ........ ........ ........40 Contacts toolbar.......... ........................ ...................... ...............40 Manage names and numbers.................................................40 Default numbers and address es........ .......... ........ ........ ..........41 Ring ing t ones , imag es an d cal l tex t fo r con tacts .................41 Copy contacts...........................................................................41 SIM services..............................................................................42 SIM contacts.... ..................... .................... ...................... ........42 Fixed dialling......... ................................................ ................42 7. Messaging.............. ........ ......... ......... ........... ...42 Messaging main view. ................................... ..........................42 Write and send messages..... ................................................. .43 Messaging inbox..................... .................................................44 Receive messages.................................................................44 Multimedia messages... ................................ ........................44 Data, settings, a nd web service messages.........................45 Mailbox.....................................................................................4 5 Define e-mail setti ngs............................... ...........................45 Open the mailbox........................................ ...................... ...45 Retrieve e-mail messages....................................................45 Delete e-mail messages..................................... ..................4 6 Disconnect from the mailbox .......... ............ ........... ........... ..46 View messages on a SIM card. ......................................... .......46 Cell broadcast messages.........................................................46 Service commands........... .............................. ..........................47 Messaging settings................. .................................................47 Text messa ge settings........ ............................ ......................47 Multimedia message settings................... .......................... .47 E-mail settings ..................... ........................... ......................4 8 Manage mailboxes.............................................................48 Instant messaging. ................................................. .................48 8. Pe rson alis e your devic e............ ..................... 48 Change the look of your device..... .........................................49 Profiles............................ .................................... ......................49 9. Music folder....................................................50 Contents
Music player......... .................. .................. ....................... ..........49 Play a song or a podcast ................. .................. ...................50 Playlists............................. .....................................................51 Podcasts................... ..................................... .........................51 Transfer music from a computer. ............................. ...........51 Nokia Music Store...................................................... ..............52 Nokia Podcasting......... ................................................... .........52 Podcasting setti ngs...................................... ........................52 Downloads............. ............................... .................................53 Radio................................. ............................................. ...........53 Listen to the radio......................................... .......................53 Manage radio stations......... ........................ .........................54 10. Gallery.................. .................. ............. .........54 View and organise files.... .................................... ...................54 View images and videos.................................................... .....54 Organise images and videos............ ............ ............... ...........55 TV-out mode................................. ........................ ...................55 11. Camera.............. .......... ............ .......... .......... .56 Activate the ca mera.................. .................... ................ ..........56 Image capture............ ............................... ........................ .......56 On-screen controls and in dicators for still image capture.................... ................................ ...............................56 Capture and recording setting s...........................................57 Capture images.....................................................................58 After capturing an image....................... ..............................58 Flash and video light........................................................... .59 Scenes......................................................................... ...........59 Location information..... .................. .................. ...................59 You in the image â self-timer......................................... ...59 Capture images in a sequence... ........................ ..................60 Video recording................................ ............................ ...........60 Record videos....................................... .................................60 Vi de o re co rd in g o n-s cr ee n c on tro ls an d i ndi ca to rs ..........60 After recording a video clip................ ........... ........... ...........61 12. Positioning (GPS)..........................................61 About GPS.................................................................................61 Assisted GPS (A-GPS)................................................................62 Hold your device correctly............................ ..........................6 2 Tips on creating a GPS connection................................. ........63 Position requests...................... ...............................................63 Landmarks................ .................................... ............................63 GPS data.......... ......................... ................................ .................64 Positioning settings .................. .............................. ................64 13. Maps.................................. ................... ........64 Maps............................. ........................................... ..................65 Network positioning...............................................................6 5 Move on a map...... .................... .......................... .................... .65 Display indicators.............................................................. ......66 Find locations............. ............................ ............................... ...66 Plan a route........................ .............................................. ........67 Save and send locations.. ................... ................... ..................67 View your saved items............................................................67 Navigate to the destina tion........... ............... ............ .............68 Update maps................... .........................................................68 Nokia Map Loader.................................. ..................................68 14. Connectivity.. ................. ............... ................69 Data connections and access points......................................69 Contents
Network settings.....................................................................69 Wireless LAN .......... ........................... ............................. ..........70 About WLAN............... .................... .................... ....................70 WLAN connections................................................................70 WLAN wizard.........................................................................70 WLAN internet access poin ts.............. ................ .............. ...71 Operating modes..................................................................71 Wireless LAN settings...........................................................71 Access points........................... ............................................. ....72 Create a new access point..... ...................... ...................... ...72 Create access point groups..................................................72 Packet data access poin ts............................... .....................73 WLAN internet access poin ts.............. ................ .............. ...73 Active data connections ..........................................................75 Synchronisation. ......................................................................75 Bluetooth connectivity.... ............................................ ............75 About Bluetooth connectivity............... ...............................75 Settings....................... ...................................................... .....76 Security tips..................... ........................................ ..............76 Send data usin g Blu etoo th co nnec tivi ty................. ...........76 Pair devices......... .................. .................... ................... ..........77 Receive data using Bluetooth con nectivity........................77 Block devices.........................................................................78 Remote SIM mode............. ............................................. .......78 USB............................................................................................78 PC connections................. ........................................................79 Administrative setting s..................... .......................... ............79 SIP settings........... .................................................................7 9 Access point name control.............. .....................................79 Packet data se ttings.............................................................79 15. Share online................... ................ ............ ..80 Share online.............................................................................80 Subscribe to services...............................................................80 Manage your accounts....................................... .....................80 Create a post............................................................... .............81 Post files from Gallery........................................... ..................81 16. Nokia Video Centre.......... .............................81 View and download video clips............... ............ ............ ......82 Video feeds......................... ................................ ......................82 My videos................... ...................................... .........................83 Transfer videos from your PC........................ ................ .........83 Video centre settings........................................ ................... ...83 17. Web browser.......... ......................................84 Browse the web....................... ............................................ ....84 Browser toolbar............................ ...........................................85 Navigate pages ............................................................ ............85 Web feeds and blogs...................................... .........................85 Widgets............. .................... .................... ...................... ..........86 Content search.........................................................................86 Download and purchase items.................. ........ ............ ........8 6 Bookmarks.................................. ............................... ..............87 Empty the cache.. ................... ......................... ................... ......87 Connection security.................................................................87 18. Search..................................... ......................88 About Search................................................................... .........88 Start a search...........................................................................8 8 19. Download!...................... ..............................88 Contents
About Download!............... ............................... .......................88 Purchase and download items ..................................... ..........89 20. Other applications............ ............................89 Clock ................................................... ......................................89 Alarm clock............................................................................89 World clock................................................................. ...........90 Calendar..................... ............................... ............................. ...90 Calendar views......................................................................90 Calendar toolbar................................. ........................ ..........90 File manager.......................................................................... ..90 About File manager........................................................ ......90 Find and organise files.........................................................90 Edit memory card................. .................... ...................... .......91 Back up files on a memory card....................... .................. .91 Application manager.... ............................................. ..............91 Install application s....................... .......................... ..............91 Remove applications............................................................92 Application manager set tings.................. .............. .............93 Application Update................. .................................................93 RealPlayer .......... ............................................ ..........................93 RealPlayer toolbar......................... ................... ....................93 Play video clips.................. ........................... .........................93 Stream content over the air................. .................... ............94 Recorder................................................ ...................................94 Write notes.............. ....................... .......................... ................94 Calculator.............. .......................... ................................ ..........94 Converter..................................................................................94 Dictionary.................................................................................95 21. Settings................. ................ ............ ...........95 Phone settings.........................................................................95 Date and time settin gs.........................................................95 Language setti ngs............................. .................................. .95 Display settings. ................................................... .................96 Voice commands......................... ..........................................96 Accessory settings.. ........................ ..................... ..................96 Application settings........ ............................. .........................97 Device updates...... ................................................................97 Security settings........................................... ................... .....97 Phone and SIM.................... ...................................... ..........97 Certificate management... ........................ ...................... ...98 Security module........................................ .........................99 Restore original settings... .......................... ....................... 100 Protected content........................ .......................................100 Notification light............................. .................. ................ .100 Call settings................ ................................................ ............100 Call settings.........................................................................100 Call divert........ ........................... .................................. ........101 Call barring..........................................................................101 22. T rou blesh ooti ng.......... ................... ...........10 2 Accessories.......................................................105 Battery.............. .............. ............... ............... ....105 Battery and charger information....................... ..................105 Nokia battery authentication guidelines......................... ...106 Authenticate hologram........... ...........................................106 Wha t if y our ba tter y is n ot a uthe ntic ?......... ............. .......1 07 Care and maintenance........ ....... ....... ...... ..... ....107 Contents
Recycle...................................................... ..............................108 Addi tion al sa fet y inf orma tion .........................108 Small children........................................................................108 Operating environment........................................................108 Medical devices.................................................. ....................109 Implanted medical devices................... .............................109 Hearing aids........................................................................109 Vehicles.............. ...................... ....................... ...................... ..109 Potentially explosive environmen ts.......................... ..........110 Emergency calls.............................................. .......................110 Certification information (SAR)........................................ ....111 Index....................................................... .........112 Contents
Safety Read these simple guidelines . Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete user guide for further information. SWITCH ON SAF ELY Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COM ES FIRST Obey all local laws. Always keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safe ty. INTERFERENCE All wireless devices may be suscepti ble to interference, which coul d affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN RESTRICTED ARE AS Follow any restrictions. Switch the device off in aircraft, near medical eq uipment, fuel, chemicals, or blasting areas. QUALIFIED SERVI CE Only qualified personnel ma y install or repair this product. ACCESSORIES AN D BATTERIES Use only approved accessories and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. WATER-RESIST ANCE Your device is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. About your device The wireless device described in this guide is approved for use on the GSM 850, 900, 1800, 1900 and UMTS 900, 2100 networks. Contact your service provider for more information about networks. When using the features in th is device, obey all laws and respect local customs, privacy and legitimate rights of others, including copyrights. Copyright protections may pr event some images, music (including ringing tones), an d other content from being copied, modified, or transferred. Your device supports several methods of connectivity. Like computers, your devic e may be exposed to viruse s and other harmful content. Exercise caution with messages, connectivity requests, browsing , and downloads. Only install and use services and other software from trustworthy sources that offer adequate se curity and protecti on against harmful software, such as app lications that are Symbia n Signed or have passed the Ja va Verified⢠testing. Consider installing antiviru s and other security s oftware on your device and any connected computer. é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 10
Your device may have preins talled bookmarks and links for third-party internet sites. Yo u may also access other third- party sites through your device. Third-party sites are not affiliated with Nokia, an d Nokia does not endorse or assume liability for them. If you choos e to access such sit es, you should take precautions for security or content. Warning: To use any features in this device, other than the alarm clock, the device must be switched on. Do not switch the device on when wireless device use may cause interference or danger. Remember to make back-up copies or keep a written record of all important information stored in your device. When connecting to any other de vice, read its user guide for detailed safety in structions. Do not connect incompatible products . The images in this guide may di ffer from your device display. Refer to the user guide for ot her important information about your devi ce. Network services To use the device you must have service from a wireless service provider. Many of the features require special network features. These features are no t availa ble on all networks; other networks may require that you make specific arrangements with your servic e provider before you can use the network services. Usin g network services involves transmission of data . Check with your service provider for details about fees in your home network and when roaming on other networks. Your service provider can give you instructions an d explain what charg es will apply. Some networks may have limitati ons that affect how you ca n use network services. For instance, some networks may not support all lang uage-dependent ch aracters and s ervices. Your service provider may ha ve requested that certain features be disabled or not ac tivated in your device. If so, these features will not appear on your devi ce menu. Your device may also have a special configuration such as changes in menu names, menu order, an d icons. Contact your service provider for more information. This device supports WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocols. Some features of this device, such as MMS, browsing, and e-mail, require network support for these technologies. Safety é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 11
1. Get started Keys and part s 1 â Micro USB connector to connect to a compatible PC 2 â Nokia AV Connector (3.5 mm) for compatible headsets, headphones, and TV- out connectors 3 â Charger connector 4 â Power key 5 â Earpiece 6 â Ligh t senso r 7 â Proximity sensor 8 â Touch screen 9 â Secondary camera 10 â Volume/Zoom key 11 â Media key 12 â Screen and key lock switch 13 â Capture key 14 â End key 15 â Menu key 16 â Call key 17 â Pen stylus 18 â Camera lens 19 â Camera flash 20 â Loudspeakers é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 12
21 â Cover of the SIM card slot 22 â Cover of the memory card slot 23 â Wrist strap opening 24 â Microphone During extended operation such as an active video call and a high speed data connection, the device may feel warm. In most cases, this condition is normal. If you suspect the device is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorised service facility. Insert the SIM card Important: To prevent damage to the SIM card, always remove the battery befo re you insert or remove the card. A SIM card may be already inserted in the device. If not, do the following: 1. Open the cover of the SIM card slot. 2. Insert a SIM card in the slot. Ensure that the contact area on the card is facing up and the bevelled corner is facing toward the device. Push th e card in. 3. Close the cover of the SIM card slot. Ensure that the cover is properly closed. If the SIM card is not properly in place, the device can only be used in the offline profile. Insert battery Always switch the device o ff and disconnect th e charger before removing the battery. 1. Remove the back cover by lifting it from the bottom end of the device. Get started é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 13
2. Insert the battery. 3. To replace the cover, direct the top locking catches toward their slots first and then press down until the cover locks into place. Charge the battery 1. Connect a compatible charger to a wall outlet. 2. Connect the power cord to the device. If the battery is completely discharged, it ma y take a while before the charging indicator starts scrolling. 3. When the battery is fully ch arged, the char ging indicator stops scrolling. Disconnect the charger from the device, then from the wall outlet. Tip: Disconnect the charger fr om the wall outlet when the charger is not in use. A charger that is con nected to the outlet co nsumes po wer even when it is not connected to the device. Get started é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 14
Switch the device on 1. Press and h old the power key. 2. If the device asks for a PI N code or lock code, enter it, and select OK . To delete a number, select . The factory setting for the lock code is 12345 . 3. Select your location. If you accidentally select the wrong location, select Back . 4. Enter the date and time. When using the 12-hour tim e format, to switch between a. m. and p.m., select any number. Stylus Some functions, such as handwriting recognition, are designed to be used with a st ylus. The pen stylus is located in the back cover of the device. Important: Use only a stylus approved by N okia for use with this device. Using any other stylus may invalidate any warranty a pplying to the device and may damage the to uch screen. Avoid scratchin g the touch screen. Never use an ac tual pen or pencil or other sharp objects to write on the touch screen. Lock the keys and touch screen To lock or unlock the touch screen and the keys, s lide the lock switch on the side of the device. When the touch screen and keys are locked, the touch screen is switched off and the keys are inactive. The screen and keys may be locked automatically after a period of inactivity. To chan ge settings for automatic screen and key locking, select Menu > Settings and Phone > Phone mgmt. > Auto. keyguard > Keypad autolock period . Home screen Home screen is your starting point where you can collect all your important contacts or application shortcuts. Get started é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 15
Interactive display elements To open the clock applic ation, tap the clock (1). To open calendar or change profiles in the home screen, tap the date or the profile name (2). To view or change connectivity settings ( ), to see the available wireless LANs if WL AN scann ing is enabled, or to view the missed events, tap th e top right corner (3). To make a phone call, select (4). To open Contacts, s elect (5). To open the main menu, press the menu key (6 ). Start using the contacts bar To start using the contacts bar and add your con tacts to the home screen, in the home screen, select > Add cont. to Home scr. , and follow the instructions. Change the home screen theme To change the home screen th eme or the shortc uts, select Menu > Settings and Personal > Home screen . Access the menu To access the menu, press the menu key. To open an application or folder in the menu, tap it. Touch screen actions Tap and double-tap To open an application or othe r element on the touch screen, you normally tap it with your finger or the stylus. However, to open the following items, you must tap them twice. â List items in an application, such as the Drafts folder in the folder list in Messaging Tip: When you open a list view, the first item i s already highlighted. To open the highlig hted item, tap it once. â Applications and folders in th e menu when using the list view type â Files in a file list, for exampl e, an image in the images and videos view in Gallery. If you tap a file or similar item once, it is not opened, it becomes highlighte d. To see the options available for the item, select Options or, if available, select an icon from a toolbar. Get started é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 16
Select In this user documentation, op ening applications or items by tapping them once or twice is called "selecting". If you need to select several items in a sequence, the display texts to select are separated by arrows. Example: To select Options > Help , tap Optio ns , and then tap Help . Drag To drag, plac e your finger or the stylus on the screen, and slide it across the screen. Example: To scroll up or down on a web page, drag the page with your finger or stylu s. Swipe To swipe, slide your finger quic kly left or right on the screen. Example: When viewing an image, to view the next or previous image, swipe the image left or right, respectively. Scroll To scroll up or down in lists th at have a scroll bar, drag the slider of the scroll bar. In some list views, you can scroll by placing your finger or stylus on a list item and dra gging up or down. Example: To scroll throug h contacts, place your finger or stylus on a contact, and dra g up or down. Tip: To view a brief desc ript ion of icons and buttons, place your finger or stylus on the icon or butt on. Descriptions are not available for all icons and butto ns. Touch screen light The touch screen light is turned off after a period of inactivity. To turn the screen light on, tap it. If the touch screen and keys are locked, tapping the scr een does not turn the screen ligh t on. To unlock the screen and keys, slide the lock switch. Media key To access app lications such as the music player or browser, tap the media key ( ) to open the media bar, and select the application. Tip: Ho l d y o ur fi ng e r o r t h e stylus on the icon to see the name of the application. Get started é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 17
Change the rin ging tone Select Menu > Settings and Pe rsonal > Prof iles . You can use profiles to set an d customise the ringing tones, message alert tones, and othe r tones for different events, environments, or caller groups. To personalise a profile, scroll to the profil e, and select Options > Pe rsonalise . Nokia support To find the latest version of this guide, additional information, downloads, and serv ices related to your Nokia product, see www.nokia.com/support or your local Nokia website. Configuration setti ngs service To download configuration sett ings such as MMS, GPRS, e- mail, and other services for your phone model, see www.nokia.com/support. Nokia Care services If you need to contact Nokia Care services, check the list of local Nokia Care contact centres at www.nokia.com/ customerservice. Maintenance For maintenance services, find your nearest N okia Care point at www.nokia.com/rep air. 2. Find help In-device help Your device contains instru ctions to help to use the applications in your device. To open help texts from the main menu, select Menu > Help and the application for which you want to read instructions. When an application is open, to access the help text for the current view, select Options > Help . When you are reading the instru ctions, to change the size of the help text, select Options > Decrease font size or Increase font size . You can find links to relate d topics at the end of t he help text. If you select an underlined word, a short explanation is displayed. Help texts use the following indicators: shows a link to a related help topic shows a link to the application being discussed When you are reading the inst ructions, to switch between help texts and the app lication that is open in the background, press and hold the menu key, an d select from the list of open applications. Extended us er guid e An extended version of this us er guide is available on the product support pages of the Noki a website. Some Find help é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 18
applications or functions are explained only in the extended user guide. Software upda tes Nokia may produce software up dates th at offer new features, enhanced functions, a nd impr oved performance. You may be able to request these updates through the Nokia Software Updater PC ap plication. Software updates may not be available for all products or their variants. Not all operators may endorse the latest so ftware versions available. To update the device software, you need the Nokia Software Updater applicati on and a compatible PC with t he Microsoft Windows 2000, XP, or Vista opera ting system, broadband internet access, and a comp atible data cable to connect you r device to the P C. Warning: If you ins tall a softwar e update, you cann ot use the device, even to make emergency calls, until the installation is completed an d the device is restarted. Be su re to back up data before acceptin g installation of an upd ate. To get more information and to download the Nokia Software Updater application, visitwww.nokia.com/ softwareupdate or your local Nokia website. If software updates over the air are supported by your network, you may a lso be able to request up dates through the device. Downloading s oftware updat es may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information about data transmission charges. Make sure that the device battery has enough power, or connect the charger before starting the update. Tip: To check the software version in your device, select Menu > Settings and Phone > Phone mgmt. > Device updates . Settings Your device norm ally has MMS, GP RS, streaming, and m obile internet settings automat ically configured in the device, based on your network service provider information. You may have settings from your service providers already installed in your device, or you may receive or request the settings from the network service providers as a special message. Access codes If you forget any of the access codes, contact your service provider. â Personal identification number (PIN) code â This code protects your SIM card against una uthorised use. The PIN code (4 to 8 digits) is usually supplied with the SIM card. After three consecutive incorre ct PIN code entries, the code is blocked, and you need the PUK code to unblock it. â UPIN code â This code may be supplied with the USIM card. The USIM card is an enhanced version of the S IM card and is supported by UMTS mobile phones. Find help é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 19
â P I N 2 c o d e â T h i s c o d e ( 4 t o 8 d i g i t s ) i s s u p p l i e d w i t h s o m e SIM cards, and is required to access some functions in your devic e. â Lock code (also known as security code) â The lock code helps you to protect your device against unauthorised u se. The preset code is 12345. You can create and change the code, and set the device to request the code. Keep the new co d e s e cr e t an d i n a sa f e p l ac e se p ar a te f ro m y ou r de v ic e . If you forget the code and your device is locked, your device will require servic e and additional char ges may apply. For more information, contact a Nokia Care point or your device dealer. â Personal Unblocking Key (PUK) code and PUK2 code â These codes (8 digits) are required to change a blocked PIN code or PIN2 code, respectively. If the codes are not supplied with the SIM card, contact the opera tor whose SIM card is in your device. â UPUK code â This code (8 digi ts) is required to change a blocked UPIN code. If the code is no t supplied with th e USIM card, contact the operator whose USIM card is in your devic e. Prolong battery life M a n y f e a t u r e s i n y o u r d e v i c e i n c r ea s e t h e d e m a n d o n b a t t e r y power and reduce the battery lifeti me. To save battery power, note the following: â Features that use Bluetooth technology, or allowing such features to run in the ba ckground while usi ng other features, increase the dema nd on battery power. Turn Bluetooth technology off when you do not need it . â Features that use wireless LAN (WLAN), or allowing such features to run in the ba ckground while using other features, increase the demand on battery power. WLAN on your Nokia device switches off when you are not trying to connect, not connected to an access point, or not scanning for available networks. To further reduce battery consumption, you can speci fy that your device does not scan, or scans less often, for av ailable networks in the background. â If you have set Packet data connection to When available in connection settings, and there is no packet data coverage (GPRS), the device periodically tries to establish a packet data connection . To prolong the operating time of your device, select Packet data connection > When needed . â The Maps application downloads new map informat ion when you move to new areas on the map, wh ich increases the demand on battery po wer. You can prevent th e automatic download of n ew maps. â If the signal strength of th e cellular network varies much in your area, your device must scan for the available network repeatedly. This i ncr eases the demand on battery power. If the network mode is set to dual mode in the network settings, the device searches for the UMTS network. You can set the device t o use only the GSM net work. To only use the GSM network, select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > Netw ork > Network mode > GSM . â The backlight of the displa y increases the demand on battery power. In the display settings, you can change t he Find help é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 20
time-out after which the backlight is switched off, and adjust the light sensor t hat observes lighting conditions and adjusts the display brigh tness. Select Menu > Settings and Phone > Display > Light time- out or Light sens or . â Leaving applications running in the background increases the demand on battery power. To close the applications you do not use, press and hold the menu key, select Options > Show open apps. , and navigate to the application with the menu ke y. Press and hold the menu key, a nd select Exit . Free memory To view how much space is a vai lable for different data types, select Menu > Applications > File mg r. . To remove data you no longer need, use File manager or go to the respective application. You can remove the following: â Messages in the folders in Me ssaging an d retrieved e-mail messages from the mailbox â Saved web pages â Contact information â Calendar notes â Applications shown in Application manager that you do not need â Installation files (.sis or .sisx) of applications you have installed. Transfer the insta llation files to a compatible computer. â Images and video clips in Galle ry. Back up the files to a compatible computer using Nokia PC Suite. 3. Your device Welcome When you switch on your de vice for the first time, the Welcome application is displayed. To access the Welcome appl ication later, select Menu > Applications > Welcome . Select from the following: â Settings wi zard â Configure various settings of your devic e. â Phone switch â Tran sfer content, such as contacts an d calendar entries, from a compatible Nokia device. â E-mail setu p â Configure e-mail settings. Transfer content You can use the Switch application to copy content such as phone numbers, addresses, cale ndar items, and images from your previous Nokia device to your device. Your device é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 21
The type of content that can be transferred depends on the model of the device from which you want to transfer content. If that device supports synchronisation , you can also synchronise data between the devices. Your device notifies you if the other device is not compatible. If the other device cannot be sw itched on without a SIM card, you can in sert yo ur SIM card in it . When you r device is switched on without a SIM card, the Offline profile is automatically activated, and t ransfer can be don e. Transfer content for the first time 1. To retrieve data from the ot her device for the first time, on your device, select Phone sw itch in the Welcome application, or select Menu > Appli cations > Switch . 2. Select the connect ion type you want to use t o transfer the data. Both devices must supp ort the selected connection type. 3. If you select Bluet ooth connectivity as the connection type, connect the two devices. To have your device search for devices with Bluetooth connectivity, select Continue . Select the device from which you want to transfer content. You are asked to enter a code on your device. Enter a code (1-16 digits), and select OK . Enter the same code on the other device, and select OK . The devices ar e now paired. Some earlier Nokia devices may not have the Switch application. In this case, the Switch application is sent to the other device as a mess age. To install the Switch application on the other devi ce, open the message, and follow the instructio ns on the display. 4. On your device, select the content you want to transfer from the other device. When the transfer has starte d, you can cancel it and continue later. Content is transferred from th e memory of the other device to the corresponding location in your device. The transfer time depends on the amount of data to be transferred. Display indicators The device is being us ed in a GSM network (network service). The device is being used in a UMTS network (network service). You have one or more un read messages in the Inbox folder in Messaging. You have received new e- mail in the remote mailbox. There are messages waitin g to be sent in the Outbox folder. You have missed calls. The ringing type is set to Silent, and the message and e- mail alert tones are turned off. A timed profile is active. The touch screen and keys are locked. A clock alarm is active. The second phone line is being used (network service). Your device é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 22
All calls to the device are diverted to another number (network service). If you have two phone lines, a number indicates the active line. A compatible headset is connected to the device. A compatible TV out cabl e is connected to the device. A compatible text phone is connected to the device. A data call is active (network service). A G P R S p a c k e t d a t a c o n n e c t i o n i s a c t i v e ( n e t w o r k s e r v i c e ) . indicates tha t the conn ection is on hold and that a connection is available. A p a c k et d a t a c on n e c t i on i s active in a part of the network that suppo rts EGPRS (n etwork servi ce). indicates that the connection is on hold and that a connect ion is available. The icons indicate that EGPRS is available in the network, but your device is not necessarily using an EGPRS connection to transfer data. A U M T S p a c k e t d a t a c o n n e c t i o n i s a c t i v e ( n e t w o r k s e r v i c e ) . indicates tha t the conn ection is on hold and that a connection is available. High-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) is supported and active (network service). indicates that the connection is on hold and that a connection is ava ilable. You have set the device to scan for wireless LAN s, and a wireless LAN is availabl e (networ k service). A wireless LAN connection is active in a network that uses encryption. A wireless LAN connection is active in a network that does not use encryption. Bluetooth connectivity is on. Data is being tran smitted using Bluetooth connectivity. When the indicator is blinking , your device is trying to connect with another dev ice. A USB connection is acti ve. Synchronisation is in progress. Memory card Use only compatible microSD and microSDHC cards approved by Nokia for use with this device. Nokia uses approved industry standards for memory cards, but some brands may not be fully compatible with th is device. Incompatible cards may damage the card and the de vice and corrupt data stored on the card. Insert the memory card A memory card may be already in serted in the device. If not, do the following: Your device é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 23
1. Open the cover of the memory card slot. 2. Insert a com patible memory card in the slot. Ensure that the contact area is facing up. Push the card in. You can hear a click when the card locks into p lace. 3. Close the cover of the memory card slot. Ensure that the cove r is properly closed. Remove the memory card Important: Do not remove the memory card in the middle of an operation when the card is being accessed. Removing the card in the middl e of an operation may damage the memory card as well as the device, and data stored on the card may be corru pted. 1. If the device is switched on , before you remove the card, press the power key, and select Remove memory card . 2. When Removing memory card will close all open applications. Remove anyway? is displayed, select Yes . All applications are closed. 3. When Remove memory card and press 'OK' is displayed, open the cover of the memory card slot. 4. Press the memory card to release it from the slot. 5. Pull out the memory card. If the device is switched on, select OK . Volume and loudspeaker control Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. Continuous exposure to hi gh volume may damage y our hearing. Do not hold the device near your ea r when the loudspeaker is in use, becaus e the volume may be extremely loud. To adjust the volume level wh en you have an active call or are listening to a sound clip, us e the volume key. Your device é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 24
The built-in loudspeaker allo ws you to speak and listen from a short distance without having to hold th e device to your ear. To use the loudspeaker during a call, select Activate loudsp. . To turn off the lo udspeaker, select Activate handset . Shortcuts To switch between open applications, p ress and hold the menu key. Leaving application s runn ing in the background increases the demand on ba ttery power and reduces the battery life. To start a web connection ( net work service), in the dialler, tap and hold 0 . To access applicat ions available in the media bar, such as the music player and web browser, in any view, press the media key. To change the profile, press the power key, and select a profile. To call your voice mailbox (network service), in the dialler, tap and hold 1 . To open a list of last dialle d numbers, in the home screen, press the call key. To use voice commands, in the home screen, press and hold the call key. Antenna locatio ns Your device may have internal and external antennas. As with any radio transmitting device, avoid touching the antenna area unnecessarily while the antenn a is transmitting or receiving. Contact with such an antenna affects the communication quality and may cause the device to operate at a higher power level than otherwise needed and may reduce the battery life. Cellular antenna Bluetooth and WLAN antenna GPS antenna Contacts bar Start using the contacts bar To start using the contacts ba r and add your contacts to the home screen, in the home screen, select > Add cont. to Home scr. , and follow the instructi ons. Your device é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 25
To add a contact to the home screen in contacts bar mode, select and either select a cont act from your contacts, or create a new contact, and a dd a photo to the contact information. To communicate with your conta ct, select the contact a nd from the following: â â Make a phone call. â â Send a message. â â Modify contact information. â â Refresh the contact's web feeds. To view past communication even ts with a conta ct, select a contact. Select a comm unication event to view event details. To close the view, select . Offline profile To activate the Offline profil e, press the power key briefly, and select Offline . The Offline profile lets you us e the device without connecting to the wireless network. When you activate the Offline profile, the connection to the wireless network is turned off, as indicated by in the signal streng th indicator area. All wireless RF signals to a nd from the device are prevented. If you try to send messages, t hey are placed in the Outbox folder to be sent later. When the Offline profile is ac tive, you can use your device without a SIM card. I f t h e S I M c a r d i s n o t p r op e r l y i n p l a c e , t h e d e v i c e s t a r t s i n t h e Offline profile. Important : In the offline profile you cannot make or receive any calls, or use other features that require cellular network coverage. Calls may sti ll be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. To make calls, you must first activate the phone function by changing profiles. If the device has been locked, enter the lock code. When you have activated the offlin e profile, you can still use the wireless LAN, for example, to read your e-mail or browse on the internet. Re member to comply with any applicable safety requirements when esta blishing and using a wireless LAN connection. You can also use Bluetooth con nectivity while in the offline profile. To switch to another profile, press the power key briefly, and select another profile. The device re-enables wireless transmissions (providing ther e is sufficient signal st rength). Sensor settin gs and disp lay rotatio n When you activate the sensors in your device, you can control certain functions by turning the device. Select Menu > Settings and Pho ne > Sensor settings . Select from the following: â Sensors â Activate the sensors. â Turning control â S elect Silencing calls and Snoozing alarms to mute calls and snooz e alarms by turning your device so that the d isplay faces down. Selec t Au t o -r o ta te Your device é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 26
display to rotate the di splay content automatically when you turn the device on its left side or back to a vertical position. Some applications and features may n ot support rotating the display content. Headset You can conn ect a compa tible headset or comp atible headphones to your device. You may need to select the cable mode. Some headsets come in two pa rts, a remote control unit and headphones. A remote control unit has a microphone and keys to answer or end a phon e call, adjust the volume, and play music or video files. To use the headp hones with a remote control unit, connect the unit to the Nokia AV Connector in the device, then connect the headphones to the unit. Warning: When you use the headset, your ability to hear outside sounds may be a ffected. Do not us e the headset where it can endanger your safety. Do not connect products that create an output sig nal as this may cau se damage to the device. Do not connect any voltage source to the Nokia AV Connector. When connecting any external device or any headset, other tha n those approved by Nokia for use with this device, to the Nokia AV Connector, pay special attention to volume levels. Remove the SIM card 1. Remove the back cover by lifting it from the bottom end of the device. 2. Remove the batt ery. Your device é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 27
3. Open the cover of the SIM card slot. Place the tip of the stylus in the opening under the battery, and push the S IM card sideways to slide it out of the slot. Pull the SIM card out. 4. Replace the battery and the back cover. Attach a wrist s trap Tip: Atta ch the plectrum stylus to the device like a wrist s trap. Remote lock To prevent unauthorised use of your device, you can lock your device and memory card remote ly using a text mes sage. You must define the message text, and to lock your device, sen d that text message to your device. To unlock your device, you need the lock code. To enable remote locking an d to defi ne the text message conte nt to be u sed, select Menu > S et ti ng s a nd Pho ne > Phone mgmt. > Security > Phone and SIM card > Remote phone locki ng > Enabled . Tap the text inpu t field to enter the text message content ( 5 to 20 characters), select , and veri fy the message. Enter the lock code. Your device é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 28
4. Make calls Proximity sensor To prevent accidental selections , the touch screen is disabled automatic ally during calls when you place the device next to your ear. Voice calls 1. In the home screen, select to open the dialler, and enter the phone number, in cluding the area code. To remove a number, select C . For international calls, select * twice for the chara cter (which replaces the internation al access code), and enter the country code, area code (omit the leading zero if necessary), and phone number. 2. To make the call, press the call key. 3. To end the call (or to cancel the call at tempt), press the end key. Pressing the end key always en ds a call, even if another application is active. To make a call from the contacts list, select Menu > Contacts . Scroll to the desired name. Or, tap the search field to enter the first letters of the name, and scroll to the na me. To call the contact, press the call key. If you have s aved several numbers for a contact, select the desired number from the list, and press the call key. During a call To mute or unmute the microphone , select or . To put the call on hold or unhold it, select or . Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To activate the loudspeaker, select . If you have attached a compatible headset with Bluetooth conn ectivity, to route the sound to the headset, select Options > Activate BT handsfree . To switch back to the handset, select . To end the call, select . To switch betw een the active and the held call, selec t . Tip: When you have only one active voice call, to put the call on hold, press the call key. To activate the call, press the call key again . To send DTMF tone strings (for example, a password), select Options > Send DTMF . Enter the DTMF string or search for it in the contacts list. To enter a wai t character (w) or a pause character (p), press * repeatedly. To send the tone, select OK . You can add DTMF tones to the phone number or DTMF field in contact details. To end an active call and repla c e it by answering the waiting call, select Options > Replace . Make calls é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 29
To end all your calls, select . Many of the options t hat you can use during a voic e call are network services. Voice mailbox To call your voice mailbox (network service), in the home screen, select to open the dialler, and tap and hold 1 . 1. To change the phone number of your voice mailbox, select Menu > Settings an d Calling > Call mailbox , a mailbox, and Options > Change number . 2. Enter the number (obtained from your network service provider), and select OK . Answer or reject a call To answer a call, press the ca ll key. To mute the ringing tone of an incoming call, select . You can send a t ext message w ithout rejecti ng the call, informing the caller that you ca nnot answer the call. To send the reply message, select Send msg. , edit the message text, and press the call key. If you do not want to answer a call, press the end key. If you activate the Call divert > Voice calls > If busy function in phone settings to divert calls, rejecting an incoming call also diverts the call. You can send a t ext message w ithout rejecti ng the call, informing the caller that yo u cannot answer the call. To activate the text message opt ion and write a standard reply message, select Menu > Settings and Calling > Call > Reject call with message , and Message text . Make a conference call Your device sup ports confer ence calls between a maximum of six participants, including yourself. 1. Make a call to the first part icipant. 2. To make a call to another particip ant, select Opti ons > New call . The first call is put on hold. 3. When the new call is answered , to join the first participant in the conference call, select . To add a new person to the call, make a ca ll to another participant, and add t he new call to the conference call. To have a private conversation with one of the participants, select . Scroll to the participant, a nd select . The conference call is put on hold on your devi ce. The other participants can still continue the conference call. To return to the conf erence call, select . To drop a participant, select , scroll to the participa nt, and select . 4. To end the active conference call, press the end key. Speed dial a phone number Select Menu > Settings and Cal ling . To activate the feature, se lect Call > Speed di alling . Make call s é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 30
1. To assign a phone number to one of the number keys, select Speed dialling . 2. Scroll to the key to which you wa nt to assign the phone number, and select Options > Assign . 1 is reserved for the voice mailbox. To call in the home screen, select to open the dialler, select the assigned key number, and press the call key. To call in the home screen when speed dialling is active, select to open the dialler, and tap and hold the assign ed key number. Call waiting You can an swer a call wh en you have an other call in progr ess. To activate call waiting (n etwork service), select Menu > Settings and Calling > Call > Call wa iting . 1. To answer the waiting call, pr ess the call key. The first call is put on hol d. 2. To switch between the two calls, select Options > Swap . 3. To connect an incoming call or a call on hold with an active call, and to disconnect yo urself from the calls, select Options > Transfer . 4. To end the active call, press the end key. 5. To end both calls, select Options > End all calls . Voice dialling Your device supports enhanced voice comma nds. Enhanced voice commands are not depend ent on the speakerâÂÂs voice, s o y o u d o n o t n e e d t o r e c o r d v oice tags in advance. The device creates a voice tag for the entries in the contacts and compares the spoken voice tag with it. The voice recognition in the device adapts to the main userâÂÂs voice to r ecognise the voice commands better. The voice tag for a contact is the name that is saved for the contact. To listen to th e synthesised voice tag, select a contact and Options > Voice tag details . Scroll to a conta ct detail, and select Options > Play voice ta g . Make a call with a voice tag Note: Using voice tags may be difficult in a noisy environment or during an emer gency, so you should not rely solely upon voice dialli ng in all circumstances. When you use voice dialling, th e loudspeaker is in use. Hold the device at a shor t distance awa y when you sa y the voice tag. 1. To start voice dialling, in the home screen, press and hold the call key. If a comp atible headset with the h eadset key is attached, press and hold the headset key to start voice dialling. 2. A short tone sounds, and Speak now is displayed. Say clearly the name that is saved for the cont act. 3. The device plays a synth esised voice tag for the recognised contact in the se lected device language, an d Make calls é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 31
displays the name and num ber. To cancel the voice dialling, select Quit . If several numbers are saved for a name, you can say a lso the name and the number type, su ch as mobile or telephone. Make a video ca ll When you make a video call (network service), you can see a real-time, two-way video betw een you and the recipient of the call. The live video image, or video image captured by the camera in your device is sh own to the video call recipient. To be able to make a video call, you must have a USIM card and be in the coverage of a UM TS network. For availability, pricing and subscription to video call services, contact your network service provider. A video call can only be made b etween two parties. The video call can be made to a compatible mobile device or an ISDN client. Video calls cannot be ma de while another voice, video, or data call is active. Icons You are not receiving video (the recipient is not sending video or the network is not transmitting it). You have denied video sending from your device. To send a still image instead, select Menu > Settings and Calling > Call > Image in video call . Even if you denied video sendin g during a video call, the call is still charged as a video ca ll. Check the pricing with your service provider. 1. In the home screen, select to open the dialler, and enter the phone number. 2. Select Options > Call > Video call . The secondary camera on the front is used by default for video calls. Starting a v ideo call may take a while. If the call is not successful (for example, video calls are not supported by the network, or the receiving device is not compatible), you are asked if you want to try a normal call or send a message inst ead. The video call is active when you see two video images, and hear the sound through the loudspeaker. The call recipient may deny video sending (indica ted by ), and you only hear the voice of the caller and may see a still image or a grey screen. 3. To end the video call, press the end key. During a video call To change between showing video or hearing the voice of the caller only, select or . To mute or unmute the microphone , select or . Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To activate the loudspeaker, select . If you have attached a compatible headset with Bluetooth conn ectivity, to route the sound to the headset, select Options > Activate BT handsfree . To switch back to the handset, select . Make call s é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 32
To use the camera in the back of your device to send video, select Options > Use secondary camera . T o s wi tc h b ac k t o the camera in the front of your device, select Options > Use main camera . To take a snapshot of the vi deo you are sending, select Options > Send snapshot . Video sending is paused and the snapshot is shown to the recipi ent. Th e snapshot is not saved. To zoom your image in or out, select Options > Zoom . To change the video quality, select Options > Video preference > Normal quality , Clearer detail or Smoother motion . Answer or reject a video call When a video call arr ives, is displayed. 1. To answer the video call, press the call key. 2. To start sending live video image, select Yes . If you do not activate the video call, you only hear the voice of the caller. A grey screen replaces the video image. To replace the grey screen with a still image captured by the camera in your device, select Menu > Sett ings and Calling > Call > Image in v ideo call . Video shari ng Use video sharing (net work service) to send live video or a video clip from your mobile device to another compatible mobile device during a voice call. The loudspeaker is active when you activate video sharing. If you do not wa nt to use th e loudspeaker for the voice call while you share vi deo, you can also use a com patible headset. Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. Continuous exposure to hi gh volume may damage y our hearing. Video sharing requirements Video sharing requires a UMTS connection. Your ability to use video sharing depends on the availa bility of the UMTS network. For more information on the service, UMTS network availability, and fees as sociated with us ing this service, contact your service provider. To use video sharing, ensure the following: â Your de vice is set u p for person-to-person connections. â You have an active UMTS connection and a re within UMTS network coverage. If y ou move outside the UMTS network during a video sh aring sess ion, the sharing stops while your voice call continues. â Both the sender and recipient are registered to the UMTS network. If you invite someone to a sharing session and the recipientâÂÂs device is not within UMTS network coverage or does not have video sharing installed or person-to-person connections set up, the recipient does not receive invitations. You receive an error message that indicates that the recipient can not accept the invitation. Make calls é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 33
Settings To set up video sharing, you need person-to- person and UM TS connection settings. Person-to-person connec tion settings A person-to-person connection is also known as a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) conn ection. The SIP profile settings must be configured in your device before you can use video sharing. Ask your service provid er for the SIP profile settings , and save them to your device. Your service provider may sen d you the settings or give you a list of the needed parameters. To add a SIP address to a cont act: 1. Select Menu > Contacts . 2. Open the contact or create a new contact. 3. Select Option s > Edit . 4. Select Option s > Add detail > Share video . 5. Enter the SIP address in the forma t username@domainname (you can use an IP address instead of a domain name). If you do not know the SIP address for the contact, you can use the phone number of the recipient, including the country code, to share video (if supported by the network service provider). UMTS connection settings To set up your UMTS connection: â Contact your service provider to establish an agreement for you to us e the UMTS netw ork. â Ensure that the UMTS a ccess point connection setti ngs for your device are configured properly. For more information about the settings, contact your service provider. Share live video or video clips During an active voice call, s elect Option s > Share video . 1. To share live video during the call, select Li ve vid eo . To share a video clip, select Video clip and the clip you want to share. You may need to convert the video clip into a suitable format to be able to share it. If your device notifies you that the video clip must be con verted, select OK . Your device must have a video editor for the conversion to work. 2. If the recipient has se veral SIP addresses or phone numbers including the countr y code saved in Contacts, select the desired address or number. If the SIP address or phone number of the recipi ent is not available, enter the address or number of the recipient including the country code, and select OK to send the in vitation. Your device sends the invitation to the S IP address. Sharing begin s automatica lly when the reci pient accepts the invitation. Options during video sharing or to mu te or unmute the m icrophone or to switch the loudspeaker on and off or to pause and resume video sharing Make call s é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 34
to switch to full screen mode (available for receiver only) 3. To end the sharing session, select St op . To end the voice call, press the end key. Wh en you end the call, video sharing also ends. To save the liv e video you shared, select Yes when pr ompted. The device notifies you of th e location of the saved video. If you access other applications while you are sharing a video clip, the sharing is paused. To return to the video sharing view and to continue sh aring, in the home screen, select Options > Continue . Accept an invitation When someone sends you a vi deo sharing invitati on, the invitation message displays th e senderâÂÂs name or SIP address. If your device is not set to silent, it rings wh en you receive an invitation. If someone sends you a share invita tion and you are not within UMTS network coverage, you will not know t hat you received an invitation. When you receive an invitation , select from the following: â Yes â Accep t the invitation and activat e the sharing session. â No â Reject the invi tation. The sender receives a message that you rejected the invitation. You can al so press the end key to reject the invitation and end the voice ca ll. Select Options and from the following: â Pause â Pause the playing of a video clip. â Continue â Resume the playing of a video clip. â Mute â Mute the sound of the video clip. To end the sharing session, select Stop . To end the voice call, press the end key. When you en d the call, video sharing also ends. Log The Log application stores information about the communication history of the device. The device registers missed and received calls only if the ne twork supports these functions, the device is switch ed on, and within the network service area. To open the Log application, select Menu > Log . Recent calls To view missed, received, and dialled voice calls, select Recent calls . To clear all recent call lists, select Options > Clear recent calls . To clear one of the call regis ter s, open the register you want to erase, and select Options > Clear list . To clear an individual event, open a register, scroll to the event, and select Options > Delete . Recent calls toolbar Select Missed calls , Received calls , or Dialled nu mbers . On the toolbar, select from the following: Make calls é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 35
â Call â Call the desired contact. â Create message â Send a message to the desired contact. â Open Conta cts â Open the cont acts list. Call durat ion To view the approximate durat ion of received and dialled calls, select Call duration . Note: The actual invoice for calls and services from your service provider may vary, depending on network features, rounding off for bi lling, taxes, and so forth. Packet data You may be charged for your packet data connection s by the amount of data sent and re ce ived. To check the amount of data sent and received during packet data connections, select Packet data . Monitor all communication events To open the general log where you can monitor all v oice calls, text messages, or da ta and wireless LAN con nections registered by the device, open the general log tab . Subevents, such as a text message sen t in more than one pa rt and packet data connection s, are logged as one communication event. Connecti ons to your mailbox, multimedia messaging centre , or web pages are shown as packet data connections. To add a phone number from the log to your contacts, select Options > Save to Contacts . To copy a phone number from the log to the clipboard, and paste it into a text message, for example, select Op tions > Use number > Copy . To view how much data was trans ferred and how long a certain packet data connection lasted, scroll to an incoming or outgoing event indicated by GPRS , and select Options > View . To filter the log, select Options > Filter and a filter. To open the contacts list, select Options > Open Contac ts . To set the log duration, select Option s > Settings > Log duration . If you select No l og , no communication information is saved in the log. 5. Write text You can enter letters, numbers, and special characters in several different ways. The on -screen keyboards allow you to enter characters by tapping th em with your fingers or the stylus. Handwriting recognit ion allows you to write characters directly onto the sc reen using the stylus as a pen. Tap any text input field to enter letters, numbers, and special characters. Write text é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 36
Your device can complete words based on the built-in dictionary for the selected te xt input language. The device also learns new words from your input. On-screen keyboard To activate the on-scre en keyb oard in portrait mode, select and Mini QWERTY keybo ard . To activate the on-screen key board in landscape mode, select and Full screen QWERTY . When using the on-screen keyboa rd in portrait mode, tap the keys of the keyboard with th e stylus. When using the on- screen keyboard in landscape mode and in full-screen, you can tap the keys with your fingers. For an explanation of each key and its function, see the following figure. 1 â Close - Closes the on-screen keyboard view. 2 â Input me nu - Opens th e touch inpu t options menu, which includes commands such as Writing language . 3 â On-screen keyboard 4 â Shift and Caps Lock - Allows you to enter an uppercase character when you write in lowercase using the on-screen keyboard. When you tap this key in handwriting recognition mode, the last lowercase character switches to uppercase, and vice versa. To turn Caps Lock on, tap the key twice. The key will have a line under it. 5 â Numbers and symbols - Switches between numbers, most commonly used special charact ers, and alphabet characters in the on-screen keyboard. 6 â Character accents - Open s a pop-up window, in wh ich you can select language character a ccents. 7 â Space bar - Inserts a space. 8 â Enter - Moves the cursor to the next row or text input field. Additional functions ar e based on the current context (for example, in the web addre ss field of the web browser, it acts as a Go butt on). 9 â Move - Moves the touch i nput window. Drag the key to move the touch input window around the screen. 10 â Backspace - Deletes the previously entered character. 11 â Input mode - Opens a pop-up window, in which you can select from the available input methods. When you tap an item, the current input method view closes, and the selected one opens. Handwriting To activate handwriting mode, ta p and Handwriting . Write text é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 37
You can use the stylus as a pen to write as you would write text on paper . Write legible, upright characters on the text input area, and leave a space between each character. To teach the device your handwriti ng style, tap and Handwriting training . To enter letters and numbers (default mode), write words as you would n ormally. To select number mode, tap in the right pane of the input area. To enter non-Latin chara cters, tap the corresponding icon, if available. To write special characters, write them as you would normally. You can also tap in the right pane of the input area, and se lect a desired character from the pop-up table. To delete characters or move the cursor back, swipe backwards (see Figure 1). To insert a space, swipe forwards (see Figure 2). Alphanumeric keypa d Icons and functions Use the on-screen keypad ( Alphanumeric keypad ) to enter characters like you would with a trad itional phone keypad with numbers on the keys. For an explanation of each icon and its function, see the following figure. 1 â Close - Closes on-screen keypad ( Alphanumeric keypad ). 2 â Input menu - Opens th e touch input menu, which includes commands such a s Activate predicti ve text and Writing language . 3 â Text input indica tor - Open s a pop-up window, in which you can turn predictive text input modes on or off, change the character case, and swit ch between letter and number mode. 4 â Input mode - Opens a pop-up window, in which you can select from the available input modes. When you tap an item, Write text é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 38
the current input method view closes, and the selected one opens. 5 â Arrow keys - Moves th e cursor left or right. 6 â Backspace - Deletes the previously entered character. 7 â Number keys - Enters the desired numbers or characters according to the current case and input mode. 8 â Star - Opens a special characters table. 9 â Shift - Changes the chara cter case, turns predictive tex t input modes on or off, and switches between the alphabet and number modes. Traditional text input Tap a number key (1-9) repeat edly until the desired charact er appears. There are more chara cters available for a number key than are visible on the key. If the next letter is located on the same key as the present one, wait until the cursor appears (or move the cursor forward to end the time-out period), and enter the letter. To insert a space, tap 0 . To move the cursor to the next line, tap 0 three times. Predictive text input With predictive tex t input, you can enter any letter wit h a single tap of a key. Predictive text input is based on a built- in dictionary to which you can add new words. 1. To activate predictive text input for all editors on the device, tap , and select Activat e prediction , or quickly tap # twice. You can also tap , and select Activate pred ictive text . 2. To write the desired wor d, tap the keys 2-9. Tap each key only once for one letter. Fo r example, to write "Nokia" when the English dictionary is selected, tap 6 for N, 6 for o, 5 for k, 4 for i, and 2 for a. The word suggestion changes after each tap of a key. 3. When you finish writing th e word correctly, mo ve the cursor right to confirm it, or tap 0 to add a space. If the word is not correct, tap * repeatedly to view t he matching words the dictionary has found one by one. If the ? character is s hown after the word, the word is not in the dictionary. To add a wo rd to the dictionary, select Spell , enter the word using traditional text inpu t, and select OK . The word is added to the dict ionary. When th e dictionary is full, a new word replaces the oldest added word. 4. Start writing the next word. Switch betwee n text modes To turn predictive text input o ff for all editors in your device, tap , and select Deactivate predi ction or quickly double-tap # . Alternatively, you can ta p , and select Predicti ve text > Of f . Touch input settings Select Menu > Settings and Pho ne > Touch input . Write text é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 39
To configure text inpu t settings for the touch screen, select from the following: â Handwritin g training â Open the handwriting training application. Train the device to recogni se your handwriting better. This opt ion is not available in all languages. â Writing language â Define which language-specific characters in your handwrit ing are recognised and how your on-screen keyb oard is laid out. â Writing speed â Adjust the speed at which handwriting is recognised. â Guiding line â Show or hide the guiding line in the writing area. The guiding line helps you write in a straight line, and it also helps the device recognise your writing. â Pen trail widt h â Change the thickness of the text written with the st ylus. â Writing colour â Chan ge the colour of the text written with the stylus. 6. Contacts (phonebook) You can save and update conta c t information, such as phone numbers, home addresses, or e-mail addresses of your contacts. You can add a personal ringing ton e or a thumbnail image to a contact. Y ou can also create contact groups, which allow you to send text messages or e-ma il to many recipients at the same time. To open the contacts list, in the home screen, select . Save and edit names and numbers 1. To add a new contact to th e contacts list, s elect Options > New contact . 2. Tap a field to enter the information in the field. To close the text inpu t, select . Fill in the fields that you want, and select Done . To edit contacts , select a contact an d Option s > Edit . Contacts toolbar On the contacts list toolbar, select from the following: â Call â Call the desired contact. â Create message â Send a message to the desired contact. â New con tact â Create a new contact. Manage names and numbers To copy or delete a contact, or to send a contact as a busines s card to another device, tap and hold a contact, and select Copy , Delete , or Send business card . To delete several contacts at the same time, select Op tions > Mark/Unmark to mark the desired contacts, and to delete, select Option s > Delete . Contacts (phonebook) é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 40
To listen to the voice tag assigned to a contact, select the contact and Opti ons > Voice tag details > Options > Play voice tag . Default numbers and addresses You can assign defa ult numbers or addresses t o a contact. If a contact has se veral numbers or addresses , you can easily call or send a message to a cert ain number or address . The default number is also used in voice dialling. 1. In the contacts li st, select a c ontact. 2. Select Option s > Defaults . 3. Select a default to which you want to add a number or an address, and select Assign . 4. Select a number or an address you want to set as a default. The default number or address is underlined in the contact view. Ringing tones, imag es and call text for contacts You can define a ringing ton e for a contact or group , and an image and a call text for a contact. When the contact calls you, the device plays the selected ringing tone and sh ows the call text or image (if the callerâÂÂs ph one number is sent with the call and your device recognises it). To define a ringing tone for a cont act, select the c ontact, Options > Ringing tone , and a ringing tone. To define a ringing tone for a contact group, scroll to the contact group, select Opti ons > Ringing tone and a ringing tone. To define a call text for a contact, select the contact, select Options > Add call alert text . Tap the text field to enter the call text, and select . To add an image for a conta ct saved in the device memory, select the contact, Options > Add imag e , and an imag e from Gallery. To remove the ringing tone, select Default tone from the list of ringing tones. To view, change or remove the imag e from a contact, select the contact an d Option s > Image > View , Change , or Remove . Copy contacts When you open the contacts list for the first time, the device asks if you want to copy names and numbers from the SIM card to your device. To start copying, select OK . If you do not want to copy the contacts from the S IM card to your device, select Cancel . The device asks if you want to view the SIM card contacts in the contacts di rectory. To vi ew the contacts, select OK . The contacts list opens, and the names stored on your SIM card are indicated with . Contacts (phonebook) é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 41
SIM services For availability and informat ion on using SIM card services, contact your SIM card v endor . This may be the service provider or other vendor. SIM contacts To set the names a nd numbers stored on th e SIM card to be shown on the contacts list, select Options > Settings > Contacts to disp lay > SIM memory . You can add and edit SIM contacts, or call them. The numbers you save in th e contacts list may not be automatically sa ved to your SIM card. T o save numbers to the SIM card, select a contact and Options > Copy > SIM memory . To select whether the new contacts you enter are saved to your device o r your S IM card, select Options > Settings > Default saving memory > Phone memory or SIM memory . Fixed dialling You can restrict calls from yo ur device to selected phone numbers. To open the list of fixed dialling numbers, in the contacts list, select Opt ions > SIM numbe rs > Fixed dial contacts . This option is only show n if supported by your SIM card. You need your PIN2 code to activate and deactiv ate fixed dialling or edit your fixed dialling contacts. When fixed dialling is activate d, calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. To activate or deactivate fi xed dialling, select Options > Activate fixe d dialling or Deacti vate fixed dialling , and enter your PIN2 code. To add new numbers to the fixed dialling list, select Options > New SIM contact , or Options > Add from Contacts . When you us e fixed dialling, pa cket data connections are not possible, except when sending text messages over a pac ket data connection. For this, th e message centre number and the recipientâÂÂs phone number must be included on the fixed dialling list. 7. Messaging Only devices that have compat ible features can receive and display multimedia m essages. The ap pearance of a message may vary depending on the receivi ng device. Messaging main view Select Menu > Messaging (network service). Messag ing é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 42
To create a new message, select New message . Tip: To avoid rewriting message s that you send often, use texts in the Templates fold er in My folders. You can also create and save your own temp lates. Messaging contains the following folders: â Inbox â Received messages, except e-mail and cell broadcast messages, ar e stored here. â My folders â Organise your messages into folders. â Mailbox â Connect to your remote mailbox to retrieve your new e-mail messages, or view your previously retrieved e-mail messages offline. â Drafts â Draft messages tha t have not been sent are stored here. â Sent â The last mess ages that have been sent, excluding messag es sent using Bluet ooth connectivit y, are stored here. You can change the number of message s to save in this folder. â Outb ox â Messag es waiting to be sent are tem porarily stored in the outbox, for example, when your device is outside network coverage. â Delivery reports â You can request the network to send you a delivery report of the text messages and multimedia messa ges you have sen t (network service). Write and send messages Select Menu > Messaging . Important : Exercise caution when opening messages. Messages may contain ma licious software or othe rwise be harmful to your device or PC. Before you can create a multim edia message or write an e- mail, you must have the correct co nnection settings defined. The wireless network may limit the size of MMS messages. If the inserted picture exceeds this limit the device may make it smaller so that it can be sent by MMS. Check the size limit of e-mail messages wi th your service provider. If you attempt to send an e-mail messag e that exceeds the size limit of the e-mail server , the message is left in the Outbox folder, and the device attempts to resend it periodically. Sending an e-mail requires a da ta connection, and continuous attempts to resen d the e-mail may incur charges from your service provider. In the Outbox folder, you can delete such a message or move it to the Drafts folder. 1. To send a message, select New message . To send an audio or e-mail message, select Options > Create message , and the relevant option. 2. To select recipients or groups from the contacts list, select To . To enter the number or e- mail address manually , tap the To field. 3. In the Subject field, enter the subject of the e-mail. To change the fields that are visible, select Options > Message header fields . 4. To write the message, tap the message field. Messag ing é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 43
5. To add an object to a message, s elect and the relevant type of cont ent. The message typ e may change to multimedia message based on the inserted content. 6. To capture an image or record a video or sound clip for a multimedia message, select Options > Insert content and New image , New vi deo clip , or New sou nd clip . 7. To add an attachment to an e-mail, select Options > Insert content and the relevant type of content. E-mail attachments a re indicated by . 8. To send the messag e, select , or press the call key. Your device supports text me ssages beyond the limit for a single me ssage. Longer me ssages are sent as two or more messages. Your se rvice provid er may charge accordingly. Characters with accents or oth er marks, and charac ters from some language options, take up more space, and limit the number of characters that can be sent in a single message. You may not be able to send video clips that are saved in the MP4 file format or that exceed the size limit of the wireless network in a multimedia message. Messaging inbox Receive messages Select Menu > Messaging and Inbox . In the Inbox folder, indicates an unread text message, an unread mult imedia message, an unread audio message, and data received through Bluetooth connectivity. When you receive a message, and 1 new mes sage are displayed in the home screen. To open the message, select Show . To open a message in the Inbox folder, select the message. To reply to a received message, select Options > Reply . Multimedia messages Important : Exercise caution when opening messages. Messages may contain ma licious software or othe rwise be harmful to your device or PC. You may receive a notification that a multimed ia message is waiting in the multimedia messa ge centre. To start a packet data connection to retrieve the message to your device, select Options > Retrieve . When you open a multimedia message ( ), you may see an image and a mess age. is shown if sound is included, or if video is included. To play the sound or the video, select the indicator. To see the media objects that have been included in the multimedia message, select Option s > Objects . If the message includes a multimedia presentation, is displayed. To play the presen tation, select the indicator. Messag ing é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 44
Data, settings, and web service messages Your device can receive many ki nds of messages that contain data, such as business cards, rin ging tones, operator logos, calendar entries, and e-mail notifications. You may also receive settings from your service provider in a configuration message. To save the data from the messag e, select Options and the corresponding option. Web service messages are notifications (for example, news headlines) and m ay contain a text message or a link. For availability and subscription, contact your service provider. Mailbox Define e-mail settings Select Menu > Messaging and Mail box . To use e-mail, you must have defined a valid internet access point (IAP) in the device an d have defined your e-mail settings correctly. You must have a separat e e-mail account. Follow the instructions given by your remote mailbox and internet service provider (ISP). If you select Messagi ng > Mailbox and have n ot set up your e-mail account, you are prompted to do so. To start creating the e-mail settings with the mailbox guide, select Start . When you create a new mailbox, the n ame you give to the mailbox replaces Mailbox in the Messaging main view. You can have up to six mailbox es. Open the mailbox Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. When you open the mailbox, th e device asks if you want to connect to the mailbox . To conn ect to y our ma ilbox an d retrieve new e-mail headers or messages, select Yes . When you view messages online, you are continuously connected to a remo te mailbox using a data connection. To view previously retrieved e-mail messages offline, select No . To create a new e-mail message, select Options > Create message > E-mail . Retrieve e-mail messages Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. If you are offline, select Options > Connect to open a connection to the remote ma ilbox. Important : Exercise caution when opening messages. Messages may contain ma licious software or othe rwise be harmful to your device or PC. 1. When you have an open connection to a remote mailbox, select Options > Retrieve e-mail > New to retrieve all new messages, Selected to retrieve only selected messages, or All to retrieve all messages from the mailbox. To stop retrieving messag es, select Cancel . Messag ing é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 45
2. To close the connection an d view the e-mail messages offline, select Options > Disconnect . 3. To open an e-mail message, select the message. If the e- mail message has not been retrieved and you are offline, you are asked if you want to retrieve th is message from the mailb ox. To view e-mail attachments, open the message, and select the attachment field indicated by . If the attachment has not been retrieved to the device, select Options > Ret rieve . To retrieve e-mail messages automatica lly, select Op tions > E-mail sett ings > Automatic re trieval . Setting the device to retrieve e-mai l automatically may involve the transmission of la rge amounts of data through your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information abou t data transmission cha rges. Delete e-mail messages Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. To delete the con tents of an e-mail message from the device while still retaining it in the remote mailbox, select Options > Delete > Phone only . The device mirrors the e-mail headers in the remote mailbox. Although you delete the messag e content, the e-mail header stays in your device. If you want to remove the header as well, you must be co nnected to th e s erver when deleting the message from your device and the remote ma ilbox. It there is no connection to the server , the header is deleted when you make a connection from your device to the remote mailbox again to upda te the status. To delete an e-mail from the device and the remote mailbox, select Option s > Delete > Phone and serve r . To cancel deleting an e-mail that has been marked to be deleted from the device and server during the next connection ( ), select O ptions > Restore . Disconnect from the mailbox When you are online, to end the data connection to the remote mailbox, select Opt ions > Disconnect . View messag es on a SIM card Select Menu > Messaging and Options > SIM messages . Before you can view SIM messag es, you must copy them to a folder in your device. 1. Select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark or Mark all to mark messages. 2. Select Options > Copy . A list of folders opens. 3. To start copying, selec t a folder. To view the messages, open the folder. Cell broadcast messages Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Cell broadcast . Cell broadcast (network service) allows you to receive messages on various topics, su ch as weather or traffic conditions, from your service provider. For available topics and relevant topic numbers, co ntact your service provider. Messag ing é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 46
Cell broadcast messages cannot be received in UMTS networks. A packet data co nnection may prevent cell broadcast reception. Service commands Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Service commands . With service comman ds (network service) you can enter and send service requests (also known as USSD commands), such as activation comman ds for netw ork services, to your service provider. Messaging settings The settings may be preconfigured in your device, or you may receive them in a messa ge. To enter settings manua lly, fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or an asterisk. Some or all message centres or access points may be preset for your device by your service provide r, and you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. Text message settings Select Menu > Messaging and Opti ons > Settin gs > Text message . Select from the following: â Message centres â View a list of all text message centres that have been defined. â Message centre in use â Select which mess age centre to use to deliver text messages. â Character encoding â To use character conversion to another encoding syst em when available, select Re duced support . â Receive report â Select whether the network sends delivery rep orts on your messages (network service). â Message validity â Select how long the message centre resends your message if the first attemp t fails (network service). If the message cannot be sent within the validity period, the mes sage is deleted fro m the message cent re. â Message sent as â To learn if your message centre is able to convert text messag es into these other format s, contact your service provider. â Preferred connection â Select the connection to use. â Reply via same centre â Select whet her you want the reply message to be sent using the same text message centre number (net work service). Multimedia message settings Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settings > Multimedia message . Select from the following: â Image size â Define the size of the image in a multimedia message. â MMS creation mode â If you select Guided , the device informs you if you try to send a mess age that may not be supported by the recipient. If you select Restricted , the device prevents you from sending mes sages that may not be supported. To include co ntent in your messages without notifi cations, select Free . Messag ing é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 47
â Access point in use â Select which access point is used as the preferred connection. â Multimedia retrie val â Select how you want to receive messages. To receive m essages automati cally in your home network, select Auto in home netw. . Outsid e your home network, you receive a notification th at there is a message to retrieve in the multimedia message centre. If you select Always automatic , your device automatically makes an active packet data connection to retrieve t he message both in and outs ide your home network. â Allow anonymous msgs. â Select whether you want to reject messages from an anonymous sender. â Receive adverts â Select whe ther you want to receive multimedia message adv ertisements. â Receive reports â Select whether you wa nt the status of the sent message to be shown in the log (network service). â Deny report sending â Select whether you wa nt to prevent your device from sending delivery reports of received messages. â Message validity â Select for how long the message centre resends your message if the first attempt fails (network service). If the me ssage cannot be sent wi thin this time period, the message is deleted from the message centre . E-mail settings Manage mailboxes Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settin gs > E- mail . To select which mailbox you want to use to send and receive e-mail, select Mailbox in use and a mailbox. To remove a mailbox and its messages from your device, select Mailboxes , tap the mailbox to be removed if it is not already highlight ed, and select Options > Delete . To create a new mailbox, select Mailboxes > Options > New mailbox . The name you give to the new mailbox replaces Mailbox in the Mess aging main view. You ca n have up to six mailboxes. Select Mailboxes and a mailbo x to change the con nection settings , user sett ings, r etr ieval settings, and automatic retrieval settings. Instant messaging Select Menu > Applications > IM . Instant messaging (I M) (network service) allows you to chat with other people using instan t messages and join discussion forums (IM groups) with spec ific topics. Various service providers maintain compatible IM servers th at you can log in to after you register to an IM service. Service providers may differ in their support of features. Before you can us e Instant messaging, y ou must save t he settings to access the service that you want to use. The settings may be preconfigured in your device, or you may receive the settings as a co nfiguration messa ge from the service provider that offers the IM service. You can also e nter the settings manually. Personal ise your de vice é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 48
8. Personalise your device You can personalis e your device by chan ging the home screen, tones, or themes. Change t he look of yo ur device Select Menu > Settings and Pe rsonal > Themes . You can use themes to change the look of the display, such as wallpaper and main menu lay out. To change the theme tha t is used for all the applications in your device, select Gen eral . To preview a theme before activating it, scroll to the theme, and wait for a few second s. To activate the theme, select Op tions > Set . The activ e theme is indicated by . To change the layout of the main menu, select Menu . To change the look of the home screen, select Home screen theme . To have a wallpaper image or a slide show of changing images as the background in the home screen, select Wallpaper > Image or Slide sh ow . To change the image displayed in the home screen when a call is received, select Call image . Profiles Select Menu > Settings and Pe rsonal > Profiles . You can use profiles to set and customise the ringing tones, message alert tones, and ot her tones for different events, environments, or caller groups . The name of the selected profile is displayed at the top of the home screen. If the General profile is in use, only the date is displayed. To change a profile, scroll to the profile, and select Options > Activate . To personalise a profile, scroll to the profile, and select Options > Personalise . Select the setting you wa nt to change. To set the profile to be active until a certain time within the next 24 hours, scroll t o the profile, select Options > Timed , an d set the time. When the time expires, the profile changes back to the previously active non-timed profile. When the profile is timed, is displayed in the home screen. The Offline profile cannot be timed. To create a new profile, select Op tions > Cre ate new . Personali se your de vice é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 49
9. Music folder Music player Warning: Listen to mu sic at a mod erate level. Continuous exposure to high volume m ay damage your hearing. Do not hold the device near your ea r when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. Music player supports file format s such as AAC, AAC , eAAC , MP3, and WM A. Music pl ayer does not n ecessarily s upport all features of a file format or a ll the variations of file formats. You can also use Music playe r to listen to podcasts. Podcasti ng is the method for delivering au dio or video content over the internet using either RSS or Atom technologies for playback on mobil e devices an d computers. You can transf er music from other compatible devices t o your device. Play a song or a podcast To open Music player, select Menu > Music > Music player . You may have to refresh the music and podcast libraries after you have updated the song or podcast selection in your device. To add all av ailable items to the library, select Options > Refresh library . To play a song or a podcast: 1. Select categories to navigate to the song or podcasts you want to hear. 2. To play an item, select the item from the list. To pause playback, tap ; to resume, tap . To fast-forward or rewind, tap and hold or . To go to the next i tem, tap . To return to the beginning of the item, tap . To sk ip to th e previous item, tap again within 2 seconds after a s ong or podcast has started. To turn random play ( ) on or off, select Options > Shuffle play . To repeat the current item ( ), all items ( ), or to turn repeat off, select Options > Repeat . If you play podcasts, shuffle and repeat are auto matically turned off. To adjust the volu me, press the volume key. To modify the tone of the music playback, select Options > Equaliser . Music folder é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 50
To modify the balance and ster eo image or to enhance the bass, select Options > Settings . To return to the home screen and leave the player playing in the background, press the end key. To close the player, select Option s > Exit . Playlists Select Menu > Music > Music player and Playlist s . To view details of the playlist, select Optio ns > Playli st details . Create a playlist 1. Select Option s > New playl ist . 2. Enter a name for the playlist, an d select OK . 3. To add songs now, select Yes ; or to add the songs later, select No . 4. If you select Yes , select artists to find the songs you want to add to the playlist. Select Add to add items. To show the song list un de r an artist title, select Expand . To hide the song list, select Collapse . 5. When you have made your selections, select Done . If a compatible memory card is inserted, the playlist is saved to the memory card. To add more songs later, when viewing the playlist, select Options > Add song s . To add songs, albums, a rtists, genres, and composers to a playlist from the different view s of the music menu, sele ct an item and Options > Add to playlist > Saved playlist or New playlist . To remove a song from a playlist, select Options > Remove . This does not delete the song from the device; it only removes it from the playlist. To reorder songs in a playlist, select the song you want to move, and Optio ns > Reorder playlist . To grab a so ng and drop it to a new position, se lect the song in the desired position and Drop . To finish reordering the playlist, select Done . Podcasts Select Menu > Music > Music player an d Podcasts . The podcast menu displays the podcasts available in the device. Podcast episodes have three s tates: never played, pa rtially played, and completely played . If an episode is partially played, it plays from the last playback position the next time it is played. If an episode has never been played or completely played, it plays from the beginn ing. Transfer music from a computer You can use the followi ng methods to tran sfer music: â To view your device on a computer as a mass memory device where you can transfer any data files, ma ke the connection with a compatible USB data cable or Bluetooth connectivity. If you are using a USB c able, select Mass storage as the connection mode. A compatible memory card must be insert ed in the device. Music fo lder é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 51
â To synchronise music wi th Windows Media Pla yer, connect a compatible USB data cable and select Media transfer as the connection mode. A compatible memory card must be inserted in the device. To change the defaul t USB connection mode, select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > USB > USB conn ection mode . Nokia Music Store Select Menu > Music > Music store . In the Nokia Music Store (network service) you can search, browse, and purchase music to download to your device. To purchase music, you first need to register for the service. To access the Nokia Music Store, you mus t have a valid internet access point in the device. Nokia Music Store is not availabl e for all countries or regions. Nokia Music Store settings The availability and appeara nce of the Nokia Music Store settings may vary. The settings may also be predefined and not editable. You may be asked to select the access point to use when connecting to the Nokia M usic Store. Select Default access point . In the Nokia Music Store, you m ay be able to edit the settings by selecting Options > Settings . Nokia Podcasting With the Nokia P odcast ing appl ication (network service), you can search, discover, subscrib e to, and download podcasts over the air, and play, manag e, and share audio and video podcasts with your device. Podcasting settings To open Nokia Podcasting, select Menu > Music > Podcast ing . Before using Nokia Podcasting, define your connection and download settings. The recommended connection method is WLAN. Check with your service provider for term s and data service fees before using different connection methods. For example, a flat rate data plan can allo w large data transfers for one monthly fee. Connection settings To edit the connection settings, select Options > Settings > Connection and from the fo llowing: â Default access point â Select the access point to define your connection to the internet. â Search service URL â Define the podcast se arch service URL to be used in searches. Download settings To edit the download settings, select Options > Settings > Download and from the following: â Save to â Define the location where you want to save your podcasts. Music folder é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 52
â Update interval â Define how of ten podcasts a re updated. â Next update d ate â Define the date of the next automati c update. â Next update ti me â Define the time of the next automati c update. Automatic updates only occur if a specific default access point is selected and Nokia Podc asting is running. If Nokia Podcasting is not running, t he automatic updates are not activated. â Download limit (%) â Define the percentage of memory that is reserved for podcast downloads. â If li mit excee ds â Define what to do if the downloads exceed the download limit. Setting the application to retrieve podcasts automatically may involve the tran smission of large amounts of data through your serv ice providerâÂÂs network. Contact your service provider for information abou t data transmission cha rges. To restore the defau lt settings, select Options > Restore default in the settings view. Downloads After you have subscribed to a podcast, from directories, search, or by entering a URL , you can manage, download , and play episodes in Podcas ts . To see the podcasts you have subscribed to, select Podcasting > Podcasts . To see individual episode titl es (an episode is a particular media file of a podca st), select the podcast title. To start a download, select the episode title. To dow nload or to continue to download select ed or marked episodes, select Download . You can downlo ad multip le episodes at the same time. To play a portion of a podcast during download or after partial downloading, se lect th e podcast and Opt ions > Play preview . Fully downloaded podcasts can be found in the Podcasts folder, but are not shown unti l the library is refreshed. Radio Listen to the radio Select Menu > Music > Radio . The FM radio depends on an an tenna other than the wireless device antenna. A com patible headset or ac cessory needs to be attached to the device for the FM radio to function properly. When you open the application for the first time, you can choose to ha ve the local st ations tuned automatically. To listen to the next or the previous station, select or . To mute the radio, select . Select Options and from the following: â Stations â View saved radio stations. â Tune stations â Search for radio stations. â Save â Save the radio station. Music fo lder é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 53
â Activate loudspeaker or Deactivate loudsp eaker â Turn the loudspeaker on or off. â Alternativ e frequenc ies â Select wheth er you want the radio to automatically search for a better RDS frequency for the station if the frequency level becomes low. â Play in background â Return to the home screen wit h the radio playing in th e background. Manage radio stations Select Menu > Music > Radio . To listen to saved stations, select Options > Stations , and select a station from the list. To remove or rename a station, select Options > Stations > Options > Delete or Rename . To set the desired frequency manually, select Options > Tune stations > Options > Manual tuning . 10. Gallery To store and organise your images, video clips, sound clips, and streaming links, s elect Menu > Gallery . Tip: To access the images and video clips view q uickly, tap the media key ( ) to open the media bar, and select . View and organise files Select Menu > Gallery and from the following: â Image s & videos â View images in the image viewer and videos in Video centre. â Songs â Open Music player. â Sound clips â Listen to sound clips. â Other med ia â View presentations. You can browse, open, and crea te folders; and mark, copy, move, and add items to folders. Files stored on your compatible memory card (if inserted) are indicated with . To open a file, select a file fr om the list. Video clips and files with the .ram file extension op en and play in Video centre, and music and soun d clips in Music player. To copy or move files to the memory card (if inserted) or device memory, select a file, Options > Organise > Copy or Move , and from the available options. View images and videos Select Menu > Gallery and Images & vide os . The images, video clips, and fo lders are displayed in a loop and ordered by date and time. To browse the files one by one, swipe left or right. To browse files in groups, swipe up or down. Gallery é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 54
To open a file, select a file from the list. To zoom in an image, use the volume key in your device. Select Options and from the following: â Edit â Edit a video clip or an image. â Use file â To use the image as wallpaper in the home screen, select Set as wall paper . To set the image as a generic call image, select Set as call image . To set the image as a call image for a contact, select Ass ign to contact . To set the video clip as a ringing tone, select As ri nging tone . To assign the video clip as a ringing tone for a contact, select Assign to contact . The toolbar helps you select fr equently used functions with images, video clips, and folders. From the toolbar, sele ct from the following: â Send â Send the selected image or video clip. â Edit â Edit the selected image or video clip. â Delete â Delete the selected image or video clip. Organise images and videos Select Menu > Gallery and Images & video s > Opti ons and from the following: â Folder options â T o move files to folders, select Move to folder . To create a new folder, select New folder . â Organise â To copy files to folders, select Copy . To move files to folders, select Move . â View by â View files by date, title, or size. TV-out mode Select Menu > Settings . To view the captured images and video clips on a compatible TV, use a Nokia V ideo-Out Cable. Before viewing the images an d video clips on TV, you may need to configure the TV-out settings for the applicable TV system and TV aspe ct ratio. Select Phone > Accessories > TV-Out . In TV-out mode, you cann ot use the TV a s the camera viewfinder. To watch images and video cl ips on TV, do the following: 1. Connect a Nokia Video-Out Cable to the vi deo input of a compatible TV. 2. Connect the other end of the Nok ia Video-Out Cable to the Nokia AV Connector of your device. 3. You may need to select the cable mode. 4. Select Menu > Gallery , and browse for the file you want to view. Gallery é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 55
The images are shown in the image viewer, and the video clips are played in RealPlayer. All audio, including the active calls, stereo video clip sound, key tone, and ringing tone, is routed to the TV when the Nokia Video -Out Cable is connected to the device. You can use the device microphone nor mally. The opened image is displayed in full-s creen on the TV. When you open an image in the thumbnail view while it is viewed on the TV, zooming in is not available. When you open a highlighted video clip, RealPlayer starts playing the video clip on the de vice display and the TV sc reen. You can view images as a slide show on TV. All items in an album or marked images are displayed on the TV in full- screen. The quality of the TV image may vary due to different resolution of the devices. Wireless radio signals, such as incoming ca lls, may cause interference in the TV image. 11. Camera Your Nokia 5800 XpressMusic has two cameras, a high resolution camera on the back of the device, and a lower resolution camera on the fron t. You can u se both cameras to capture images and record videos. Your device supp orts an image capture resolution of 2048x1536 pixels. The image resolution in this guide may appear different. Activate the camera To activate the camera, press t he capture key. To activate the s econdary camer a, activate the main camer a, and select Option s > Use secondary came ra . Image capture On-screen controls and indicators for still image capture The still image viewfinder displays the following: 1 â Capture mode indicator Camera é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 56
2 â Zoom slider. To turn the zoom slider on and off, tap the screen. 3 â Capture icon. Tap to capture an image. 4 â Flash mo de. Tap to chan ge settings. 5 â Capture settings. T ap to change settings. 6 â Battery charge level indica tor 7 â Image resolution indicator 8 â Image counter (the estimated num ber of images you can capture using the curr ent image quality settin g and available memory) 9 â Memory in use. Depending on the setup of your device, there are the following op tions: device memory ( ), memory card ( ), or mass memory ( ). 10 â GPS signal indica tor Capture and recording settings To open the capture and recording settings view before capturing an image or recording a video clip, select Menu > Applications > Camera and . The capture and recording setti ngs view provides you with shortcuts to different items and settings before capturing an image or recording a video clip. The capture and recording setti ngs return to the default settings after you close th e camera. Select from the following: â Select the scene. or â Switch between video and image mode. or â Sho w or hi de the viewfin der gr id (imag es only ). â Activate the self-timer (images only). â Open Gallery. Image se ttings: â Select a colour effect. â Adjust the white balanc e. Select the current lighting conditions. This allows the ca me ra to repro duce colour s more accurately. â Adjust the ex posure compensation (images only). If you are shooting a da rk subject against a very light background, such as snow, adju st the exposure to 1 or 2 to compensate for the backgr ound brightness. For light subjects against a dark ba ckground, use -1 or -2. Adjust light sensitivity (i mages only). Increase the light sensitivity in low light condit ions to avoid too dark images and blurry imag es. Increasing the ligh t sensitivity may also increase the image noise. Adjust contrast (images only). Adjust the difference between the lightest and da rkest parts of the image. Adjust sharpness (images only) . The screen display changes to match the settings you define. The capture settings are shoo ting-mode specific. Switching between the modes does not reset the defined settings. Camera é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 57
If you select a new scene, th e capture settings are replaced by the selected scene. You ca n change the capture settings after selecting a scene if needed. Saving the captured image may ta ke longer if you change the zoom, lighting, or colour settings. Capture images When capturing an i mage, note the following: â Use both hands to keep the camera still. â The quality of a digita lly zoomed image is lower than that of a non-zoomed image. â The camera goes into battery saving mode if there are no actions for about a mi nute. To continue captu ring images, slide the lock switch on the side of the device. To capture an image: 1. To switch from video mode to image mode, if necessary, select > . 2. To lock the focus on an object, press the capture key halfway down (not available in landscape or sport scene modes). A green locked focus in dicator is displayed. If the focus was not locked, a yellow focus indicator is displayed. Release the capture key, and pres s it halfway down again. You can also captu re an imag e without locking the focus. 3. To captur e an image, press the capture key. Do not move the device before the image is saved and the fina l image displayed. To zoom in or out when capturing an image, use the zoom key in your device. To leave the camera open in the background and use other applications, press the menu ke y. To return to the camera, press and hold the capture key. After capturing an image After you capt ure an image, sele ct from the following options (available only if you have selected Options > Settings > Show captured image > Yes ): â Send â Send the image in a multimedia or e-mail message, or through connection methods such as Bluetooth connectivity. To send the image to th e person you are talking to, select Send to caller during a call. â Delete â Delete the image. â â Open Gallery. To use the image as wallpaper in the home screen, select Options > Use image > Set as wallpaper . To set the image as a defau lt call image to be used for every call situation, select Options > Use image > Se t as call image . To assign the image to a co ntact, Options > Use image > Assign to contact . To return to the viewfinder to capture a new im age, press the capture key. Camera é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 58
Flash and video light Keep a safe distance when usin g the flash. Do not use the flash on people or animals at close range. Do not cover the flash while taking a picture. The camera of your device has a dual LED flash f or low light conditions. To select the desired flash mo de, tap the current flash mode indicator, which is one of the following: Automatic , Reduce red , On , and Off . Avoid touching the flash LEDs when the back cover has been removed. The LEDs may get hot after prolonged usage. Video light To increase light levels when recording video in low light, select Scenes A scene helps yo u to find the right colo ur and lighting set tings for the current environment. Th e settings of each scene have been set according to a ce rtain style or environment. The default scene in image mode is Automa tic , and in video mode Automatic (bo th indicated with ). To change the scene, select > Scene modes and a scene. To make your ow n scene suitab le for a certain environment, scroll to User defined , and select Change . In the user defined scene you can adjust different lighting and colour settings. To copy the settings of another scene, select Based on scene mode and the desired scene. To save the changes and return to the sc enes list, select Back . To act ivate your own scene, select User defin ed > Select . Location information You can automati cally add capt ure location information to the file details of the captured material. Select Menu > Applications > Camera . To add location information to all captured material, select Options > Settings > Show GPS info > On . Location information indicators: â â Location information un available. GPS sta ys on in the background for several minutes. If a satellite connection is found an d the indicator changes to within that time, all the images captured and video clips recorded during that time are tag ged based on the received GPS positioning information. â â Location information is available. Location information is added to the file details. You in the image â self-timer Use the self-timer to delay the capture so that you can include yourself in the image. To set the self-timer delay, select > , and the delay needed before the image is captured. To activate the self-timer, select Activate . The stopwa tch icon on the screen blinks and the remaining time is displayed when the timer is ru nning. The camera captures the image after the selected delay elapses. Camera é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 59
To switch off the self-timer, select > > . Tip: Select 2 seco nds to keep your hand steady when capturing an image. Capture images in a sequence Select Menu > Applications > Camera . The sequence mode is availabl e only in the main camera. To start capturing images in a quick sequence, select Menu > Applications > Camera and > Sequence . T o close the settings window, tap t he screen above the window. Press an d hold the capture key. The devi ce captures images until you release the key or until the memory runs out. I f you press the capture key br iefly, the devi ce captures six image in a sequence. To capture two or more images in defined intervals, select the desired time interval. To capture th e images, press the capture key. To stop ca pturing images, select Cancel . The number of images captured depends on the available memory. The captured images are displayed in a grid. If yo u used a time interval, only the last ca ptured image is displayed. You can view the other images in Gallery. You can also use sequence mode with the self-timer. To return to the sequence mode viewfinder, press the captur e key. To deactivate sequence mode, select > Seque nce mode > Off . Video recording Record videos 1. To switch from image mode to video mode, if necessary, select and the video mode . 2. To start recording, pre ss the capture key or tap . A red record icon is displayed, and a tone sounds. 3. To pause recording at any time, s elect Paus e . To resume, select Conti nue . If you pause recording and do not press any key within one minute, the recording stops. To zoom in or out of the subject, use the zoom key in your device. 4. To stop recording, press the capture key. The video clip is automatically saved in Gallery . The maximum leng th of a video clip is approximately 30 seconds with sharing quality and 90 minutes with other quality se ttings. Video recording on-screen co ntrols and indicators The video viewfinder displays the following: 1 â Capture mode indicator Camera é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 60
2 â Audio mute on indicator 3 â Capture icon. Tap to record video. 4 â Video light on/off. 5 â Recording settings. Tap to change settin gs. 6 â Battery charge level indica tor 7 â Video quality indicator. To change this setting, select Options > Settings > Video quality . 8 â Video clip file type 9 â Available recording time. When you are recording, the current video length i ndicator also shows the e lapsed and remaining time. 10 â The location to which the video clip is saved. After recording a video clip After you record a video clip, select from the following options (available only if you have selected Options > Settings > Show last captured video > Yes ): â Play â Play the video clip you just recorded. â Delete â Delete the video clip. â Send or press the call key â Send the video clip in a multimedia or e-mail mess age, or through connection methods such as Bluetooth connectivity. You may not be able to send vide o clips save d in the MPEG4 file format in a multimedia message. To send the video clip to the person you are ta lking to, select ( Send to cal ler ) during a call. To return to the viewfinder to record a new video clip, press the capture key. 12. Positioning (GPS) You can use applications su ch as Maps and GPS data to find out your location, or measure distances and coordinates. These applications requ ire a GPS connection. About GPS The coordinates in the GPS are expressed in the degrees and decimal degrees format usin g the international WGS-84 coordinate system. The Global Positioning System (GPS) is operated by the government of the United States , which is solely responsible for its accuracy and maintenanc e. The accuracy of location Positioning (GPS ) é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 61
data can be affected by adju stments to GPS satellites made by the United States government and is subject to change with the United States Departmen t of Defense civil GPS policy and the Federal Radionavigation Plan. Accuracy can also be affected by poor satellite geom etry. Availability and quality of GPS signals may be affected by your location, bui ldings, natural obstacles, and weather conditions. The GPS receiver should only be used outdoors to allow reception of GPS signals. Any GPS should not be used for precise location measurement, and you should ne ver rely solely on location data from the GPS receiver an d cellular radio networks for positioning or navigation. To enable or disable different positioning methods, select Menu > Applicatio ns > Locat ion and Posi tioning > Position ing metho ds . Assisted GPS (A-GPS) Your device also supports Assisted GP S (A-GPS). A-GPS is a network service. Assisted GPS (A-GPS) is used to ret rieve assistance data over a packet data connection, whic h assists in calculating th e coordinates of your current lo cation when your device is receiving signals from satellites. When you activat e A-GPS, your device receives useful satellite information from an assistan ce data server over the cellular network. With the help of assisted data, your device can obtain the GPS position faster. Your device is preconfigured to use the Nokia A-GPS service, if no service provider-specific A-GPS settings are available. The assistance data i s retrieve d from the Nokia A-GPS service server only when needed. You must ha ve an internet a cce ss point defined in the device to retrieve assistance data from the Nokia A-GPS service over a packet data connection. To defi ne an access point for A-GPS, select Menu > Applicat ions > Loca tion and Positio ning > Positi oning server > Access point . A wireless LAN (WLAN) access p oint cannot be used for this service. Only a packet data internet access point can be used. Your device asks for the inte r net access point when GPS is used for the first time. Hold your device correctly When using the GPS receiver, ensure you do not cover the antenna with your hand. Establishing a GPS connection may take from a couple of seconds to several min utes. Establishing a GPS connection in a vehicle may take longer. The GPS receiver draws its power from the device battery. Using the GPS receiver may drain the battery faster. Position ing (GPS ) é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 62
Tips on creating a GPS connection Check satellite signal status To check how many satellites you r device has found, and whether your device is receiv ing satellite signals , select Menu > Applicatio ns > Locat ion and GPS dat a > Position > Optio ns > Satel lite status . If your device has found satellites, a bar for each satellite is shown in the satellite info view. The longer the bar, the stronger the satellite signal. When your device has received enough data from the satellite signal to calcula te the coordinates of your location, the bar turns blue. To view the positions of found sate llites, select Chg. vi ew . Initially your device must rece ive signals from at least fou r satellites to be able to calculate th e coordinates of your location. When the in itial calculation has been made, it may be possible to continue calc ulating the coordinates of your location with three satellite s. However, the accuracy is generally better when more satellites are found. If your device cannot find the satellite sig nal, consider the following: â If you are indoors, go outdoors to receive a better signal. â If you are outdoors, move to a more open space. â Ensure that your hand does not cover the GPS antenna of your device. â If the weather conditions are ba d, the signal strength may be affected. â Some vehicles have tinted (athermic) w indows, which may block the satellite signals. Position requ ests You may receive a request from a network service to receive your position information. Service providers may offer information about local topics, such as weather or traffic conditions, based on the location of your device. When you receive a position request, a message is displayed showing the service that is making the request. Select Accept to allow your position information to be sent or Reject to deny the request. Landmarks Select Menu > Applications > Location and Landm arks . With Landma rks, you can sav e the position information of specific locations in your device. You can sort the saved locations into different categories, such as business, and add other information to them, s uch as addresses. You can use your saved landmarks in compatib le applications, su ch as GPS data. GPS coordinates are expressed in the degrees and decimal degrees format using the inte rnational WGS-84 coordinate system. Select Options and from the following: Positioning (GPS ) é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 63
â New landma rk â Create a new landmark. To ma ke a positioning request for your current location, select Current positio n . To enter the position information manually, select Enter manually . â Edit â Edit or add information to a saved landmark (for example, a street address). â Add to category â Add a landmark to a category in Landmarks. Select each catego ry to which you w ant to add the landmark. â Send â Send one or several landmarks to a compatible device. Your received landmarks are placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging. You can sort your landmarks into preset categories, and create new categories. To ed it and create new landmark categories, open the cate gories tab, and select Options > Edit categori es . GPS data GPS data is designed to prov ide route guidance information to a selected destination, position information about your current location, a nd traveling information, such as th e approximate distance to the destination and app roximate duration of travel. Select Menu > Applications > Location and GPS data . Positioning settings Select Menu > Appli cations > Location and Positioning . Positioning methods â Integrated GPS â Use the integrated GPS receiver of your device. â Assisted GPS â Use Assisted GP S (A-GPS ) to receive assistance dat a from an assistance dat a server. â Bluetooth GPS â Use a compatible external GPS receiver with Bluetooth connectivity. â Network based â Use information from the cellular network (network service). Positioning server To define an access point, an d positioning server for A-GPS, select Positionin g server . The positioning server may be preset by your service provider, and you may not be able to edit the settings. Notation settings To select which measurement system you want to use for speeds and di stances, select Measurement system > Metric or Imp erial . To define in which format the coordinate information is shown in your device, select Coordinate format , and the desired format. Maps é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 64
13. Maps Maps Select Menu > Maps . With Maps, you can see you r current location on the map, browse maps for different cities and countries, search for addresses and different points of interest, plan routes from one location to another, and save locations and send them to compatible devices. You can also purchase licences for extra services, such as travel guides, traffic informa tion, and navigation service with voice guidance. These services are not available for all countries or regions. When you use Maps for the first time, you may need to select an internet access poin t for downloading maps. If you browse to an area whi ch is not covered by maps al ready downloaded in your device, a map for the area is automatically dow nloaded through the internet. Some maps may be available in your device or memory card. You can also use the Nokia Map Loader PC software to download maps. To install Nokia Map Loader to a compatible PC, see www.nokia.com/maps . Tip: To avoid data transfer co sts, you can also use Maps without an internet connection, and browse the maps that are saved in your device or on a memory card. Almost all digital ca rtography is inaccurate and incomplete to some extent. Never rely solely on the ca rtography that you download for use in this device. Downloading maps an d extra services may inv olve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. For more information on data transmission charges, contact your service provider. Network positioning You can use the mobile network to find your current location even indoors. This is faster bu t less accurate than with GPS, and you canno t use the location as a starting point for navigation. To use the mobile network fo r positioning, start the Maps application, and select Network bas ed as the positioning method. When your GPS connec tion is ready, it replaces mobile network as th e positioning method. Move on a map Select Menu > Maps . To z oo m i n t o yo u r GP S po s it i o n o r y ou r la s t k n o wn lo c a ti o n, select Option s > My positi on . When the GPS connection is active, shows your current location on the map. To move on the map, drag the map. The map is oriented towards north by default. Maps é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 65
When you have an active connection and browse th e map on the display, a new ma p is automatically downloaded if you scroll to an area which is not covered by maps already downloaded. The maps are automatically sa ved in the device memory or on a compatible memory ca rd (if inserted). To zoom in and out on the map, select and - . Display indicators The GPS indicator shows the availability and strength of the satellite s ignal . One bar is one satellite. When the device tries to find a satellite, the bar is yellow. When the device receives enough data from the satellite to establis h a GPS connection, the bar turns green. The mor e green bars, the stronger the GPS connection. Initially, your device must rece ive signals from at least four satellites to calculate the coordina tes of your location. After the initial calculation, signal s from three satellit es may be enough. The data transfer indicator shows the intern et connection used and the amount of data t ransferred since the application started. Find locations Select Menu > Maps . To find a location in the city or area displayed on the map, enter the full or partial address of the location in the sear ch field. Tap the green arrow, and select Search . To find a location in another city, enter the city and the full or partial address, such as London Oxford Street . For the best results, enter the name of the city in the local langua ge. Tip: If unsure of the name of the location, enter only the first characters of th e search word. For the best search results, ente r at least three characters . To find a specific address, or an address in another cou ntry, select Option s > Search > Addresses . Country/Region * and City/Pos t code * are mandatory. Tip: To search for locations in another country using the search field, enter also the name of the country in the search field: Rome Italy . Enter th e name of the country in English, or use the three letter ISO-code (ITA for Italy, GBR for Great Britain, CHN for China). To import a location address from the Contacts application, select Options > Search > Addres ses > Optio ns > Select from Contacts . If you search for locations wi thout an internet connection, the search results are limited to a radius of 50 km (31 miles). Search by ca tegories The search result s are grouped by categories. T o limit the search to one category, select Options > Search > Places and the category. Example: To find restaurants close to your location, select Options > Search > Places > Eat & Dr ink > Restaurants . Example: To find a specific hotel, select Options > Search > Places > Accommodation . Enter the name of the hotel in the search field, and select Search all . Maps é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 66
Plan a route Select Menu > Maps . To plan a route, select your start poin t on the map, ta p the information area on the top of the map , and select Add to route . To define the destin ation and add more locations for your route, search for the location, and select Opti ons > Add route point . To change the order of the loca tions in the route, tap a location, and select Move . Move to the place where you want to move the location, and select Select . To edit the route, tap a locat ion, and select Edit route . To define the settings for the route, select Options > Settings . To show the route on the map, select Options > Show route . To navigate to the destinat ion by car or on foot, if you have purchased a licence for these extra services, select Options > Start driving or Start walking . To save the route, select Options > Save route . Save and send loca tions To save a location to your device, select the location, tap the information are on the top of the map, and select Add t o My places . The location is saved in Favourites > My places . To send a location to a compat ible device, tap the location, and select Send . If you send the location in a text message, the information is converted to plai n text. View your saved items To view the items you have saved to your device, select Options > Favourites . Places To view the locations you have saved to your device, select My places . To organise the sav ed locations, select Options > Sort . To view the selected loca tion on the map, select Show on map . To add the location to a route, tap the location, and select Add > Add to route . History To check which locations you ha ve searched for on the map, select History . To view the selected loca tion on the map, select Show on map . To send the location to a comp atible device, tap the location , and select Send . Collections To create a collection of your favourite places, such as restaurants or museums , select Collections > Options > New collection . Maps é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 67
To add locations to your collection , open My places , tap the location, and select Add > Add to colle ction . To view the selected loca tion on the map, select Show on map . Routes To view the routes you have saved, select Routes . To open the selected route, select Option s > Open . Navigate to the destination Select Menu > Maps . To navigate to your destinat ion, you must purchase a licen ce for the navigation service. To purchase a licence for pede strian and car navigation with voice gui dance, select Drive & Walk . To purchase a licence for pedestrian naviga tion only, select Walk . The licence is region-specific and can be used only in the selected area. You can pay for the licence through a credit card or in your phone bill, if supported by your service provider. You can transfer the licence from your device to another compatible device, but the licence can on ly be used in one device at a time. When you use na vigation for th e firs t time, you are asked to select the language of the v oice guid ance and download th e related voice guidance files. To change the la nguage later, in the main view, select Opti ons > Tools > Settings > Navigation > Voice guidance . Voice guidance is not available for pedestrian navigation. To start navigatin g, select a location an d Drive to or Walk to . To stop navigating, select Options > Stop navigati on . Update maps To update the maps on your device, select Options > Tools > Settings > Map > Option s > Check for map updates , or use No kia Map Loader. To update the Maps appli cation, go to http:// maps.nokia.com. Nokia Map Loader With the Nokia Map Lo ader application, you can download maps and voice guidan ce files from the internet to the device memory or a compatible memory card. You must use the Maps application and browse maps at least once before using Nokia Map Loader, as Nokia Map Loader uses the Maps information to check which vers ion of the maps to download. To inst all No kia Ma p Loader to a co mpatib le PC or Mac, g o to http://maps .nokia.com, and fo llo w the instructions on the screen. Maps é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 68
14. Connectivity Your device offers several opt ions to connect to the internet or to another compatible device or PC. Data connections and access p oints Your device supports packet data connections (network service), such as GPRS in the GSM network. W hen you use your device in GSM and UMTS networ ks, multiple data connections can be active at the same time, and a ccess points can share a data connection. In the UMTS network, data connections remain active during voice calls. You can also use a WLAN dat a connection. O nly one connection in one wireless LAN can be active at a time, but several applications can use t h e same internet access point. To establish a data connection , an access point is required. You can define differen t kinds of access points, such as the following: â MMS access point to send and receive multimedia messages â Internet access point (IAP ) to send and receive e-mail and connect to the internet Check the type of access poin t you need with your service provider for the service you want to access. For availability and subscription to packet data connection services, contact your service provider. Network settings Select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > Ne twork . Your dev ice can aut omaticall y switch between GSM and UMTS networks. GSM networks are indicated with . UMTS networks are indicated with . Select from the following: â Network mode â Select which network to use. If you select Dual mode , the device uses the GSM or UMTS network automatically, a ccording to the network parameters and the roamin g agreements between the wireless service providers. For details and roaming costs, contact your network service provider. This option is shown only if supported by th e wireless service provider. A roaming agreement is an agreement between two or more service providers to enable the users of one service provider to use the services of other service providers. â Operator select ion â Sele ct Automatic to set the device to search for and select one of the available ne tworks, or Manual to manually select the ne twork from a list. If the connection to th e manually se lected network is lost, the device sounds an error tone and asks you to reselect a network. The selected net work must have a roaming agreement with your home netw ork. â Cell info display â Set the device to indicate when it is used in a cellular network ba sed on microcellular network (MCN) technology and to activate cell info reception. Connectivity é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 69
Wireless LAN Your device can detect and connect to wireless local area networks (WLAN). Using a WL AN, you can c onnect your dev ice to the internet and compatib le devices that have WLAN support. About WLAN To use a wireless LAN (WLAN) conn ection, it must be available in the location, and your device must be conn ected to the WLAN. Some WLANs ar e protecte d, and you need an access key from the service provider to connect to them. Some places, like Fr ance, ha ve restrictions on the use of wireless LAN. Check with your local authorities for more information. Features that use WLAN, or that are allowed to run in th e background while using ot her features, increase the demand on battery power and redu ce the battery life. Your device supp orts the following WLAN features: â IEEE 802.11b/g sta ndard â Operation at 2.4 GHz â Wired equivalent privacy (W EP) with keys up to 128 bits, Wi-Fi protected access (WPA), and 802.1x authentication methods. These functions can be used only if they are supported by the network. Important: Always enable one of the available encryption methods to increase the security of your wireless LAN connection. Using encryp tion reduces the risk of unauthorised access to your data. WLAN connections To use a wireless LAN (WLAN) connection, you must create an internet access poin t (IAP) for WLAN. Use the acc ess point for applications that need to connect to the internet. A WLAN connection is establis hed when you create a data connection using a WLAN inte rnet access point. The active WLAN connection ends when you end the data connection. You can use WLAN du ring a voice call or when packet data is active. You can only be connected to one WLAN access point device at a time, but several applications can use the same internet access point. When the device is in the offline profile, you can still use WLAN (if available). Remember to comp ly with any applicable safety requirements when establ ishing and using a WLAN connection. Tip: To check the unique media access control (M AC) address that identifies your device, open the dialler and enter *#62209 526# . WLAN wizard Select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > Wi reless LAN . The WLAN wizard helps you to connect to a w ireless LAN (WLAN) and mana ge your WLAN connections. Connectivity é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 70
If the search finds WLANs, to create an internet access point (IAP) for a connection and start the web browser using th is IAP, select the connection and Start web browsin g . If you select a secured WLAN, you are asked to enter the relevant password. T o connect to a hidden n etwork, you must enter the correct network name (service set identifier, SSID ). If you already have th e web browser running using the currently active WLAN connection, to return to the web browser, select Continue web browsing . To end the active connection, select the connection and Disconnect WLAN . WLAN internet access points Select Menu > Settings and Co nnectivi ty > Wireless LAN > Options . Select from the following: â Filter WLAN networks â Filter out wireless LANs (WLANs) from the list of found networks. The selected networks are not displayed the next ti me the application searches for WLAN s. â Detai ls â View the details of a network shown in the list. If you select an active con nection, the connection details are displayed. Operating modes There are two operating modes in WLAN: infrastructure and ad hoc. The infrastructure operating mode allows two kinds of communication: wireless devices are connected to each other through a WLAN acces s poin t device, or wireless devices are connected to a wired LAN through a W LAN access point device. In the ad hoc operating mode, devices can send and receive data directly wi th each other. Wireless LAN settings Select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > Wi reless LAN > Optio ns > Settings . Select from the following: â Show WLAN availa bility â Select whether is displayed when a wireless LAN (WLAN) is available. Tip: To access the WLAN Wizard appli cation and view the available options, select the WLAN icon, and in the pop-up win dow, select the highlighted text next to the WLAN icon. â Scan for networks â If you set Show WLAN availability to Yes , you can select how often the device searches for available WLAN s and updates the indicator. â Internet connectivity te st â Select whether you want the device to test the intern et capability of the selected WLAN automatically, to ask for permission every time, or to never perform the connecti vity test. If you select Run automatically or allow the test to be performed when the device asks for it, and the co nnectivity test is performed successfully, the access point is saved to the interne t destinations. To view advanced settings, select Options > Advanced settings . Changing the advanced sett ings for the WLAN is not recommended. Connectivity é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 71
Access points Create a new access point Select Menu > Settings and Co nnectivi ty > Destinations . You may recei ve access point settings in a message from a service provider. Some or all access points may be preset for your devi ce by your s ervice pro vider, an d you may no t be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. When you open one of the access point groups ( , , , ), you can see the access point types: indicates a protected access point indicates a packet data access point indicates a wireless LAN (WLAN) access point Tip: You can create intern et access points in a WLAN with the WLAN wizard. To create a new acc ess point, select Access point . The device asks to check for av ailable connections. After the search, connections that are already ava ilable are shown and can be shared by a new a ccess point. If you ski p this step, you are asked to select a connection method and to define the settings needed. To edit the settings of an acce ss point, open one of the access point groups, an d select an access point. Follow the instructions from your service provider. â Connecti on name â Enter a name for the connection. â Data b earer â Select the data connection type. Depending on the data connect ion you select, only certain setting fields are available. Fi ll in all fields marked with Must be defined or with a red *. Other fields can be left empty, unless your service provider has instructed otherwise. To use a data connect ion, your service provider must support this feature, and if necessary, activate it for your SIM card. Create access point groups Select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > Destinations . Some applications allow you to use access point groups for network connections. To avoid selecting a single access point every time the device makes a network connection, yo u can create a group that contains various access points to connect to that net work and define the order in which the access points are used. For example, you can add wireless LAN (WLAN) and packet data access points to an intern et access point group, and use the group for browsing the web. If you give WLAN the h ighest priority, the device connects to the internet throug h WLAN, if available, and through a packet dat a connection if not. To create a new access point group, select Option s > Manage > New destination . To add access points to an access point group, select the group and Options > New access point . To copy an existing access point from another group , select the group, t ap the relevant access point if it is not already high lighted, and select Option s > Organise > Copy to other dest. . Connectivity é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 72
To change the priority of an access point within t he group, select Options > Organise > Change priority . Packet data access points Select Menu > Settings and Co nnectivi ty > Destinations > Access point , and follow the instructions on the screen. To edit a packet data access p o int, open one of the access point groups, an d select an access point marked with . Follow the instructions from your service provider. Select from the following: â Access point name â You obtain the access point name from your service provider. â User na me â The user name may be needed to make a data connectio n, and is usually provided by your service provider. â Prompt passwo rd â If you must enter the password every time you log in to a server, or if you do not want to save your password in the device, sele ct Yes . â Password â A password may be needed to make a data connection and is usually provided by your service provider. â Authentication â Select Secure to always send your password encrypted or Normal to send your password encrypted when possible. â Homepage â Depending on th e access point you are setting up, enter the web address or the a ddress of the multimedia message centre. â Use access point â Sele ct After confirmati on if you want the device to ask for confirmation before the connection using this acce ss point is created, or Automatically if you want the device to connect to the destination using this a ccess point automatically. Select Options > Advanced settings and from the following: â Network type â Select the internet protocol type to transfer data to and from your device. The other s ettings depend on the selected network type. â Phone IP addr ess (for IPv4 only) â Enter the IP address of your device. â DNS addresses â Enter the IP addresses of the primary and secondary DNS servers, if required by your service provider. To obtain these addresses, contact your internet service provider. â Proxy server add ress â Enter the address of the pro xy server. â Proxy port number â Enter the port number of the proxy server. WLAN internet access points Select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > Destinations > Access point , and follow th e instructions on the screen. To edit a wireless LA N (WLAN) access point, open one of the access point groups and select an access point marked with . Follow the instructions from your WLAN service provider. Connectivity é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 73
â WLAN network name â Select Enter manu ally or Search for networks . If you select an exist ing network, WLAN network mode and WL AN security mode are determined by the settings of its access point device. â Networ k status â Defi ne whether the network name is displayed . â WLAN network mode â S elect Ad-hoc to create an ad hoc network and to allow devices to send and receive data directly; a WLAN ac cess point device is not needed. In an ad hoc network, all devices must use the s ame WLAN network name. â WLAN security m ode â Select the encryption used: WEP , 802.1x (not for ad hoc networks), or WPA /WPA2 . If you select Open network , no encr yption is used. The WEP, 802.1x, and WPA functions can be used only if the network supports them. â Homepage â Enter the web address o f the starting page. â Use access point â Select After confirmation if you want the device to ask for confirmat ion before the connection using this a ccess point is created or Automatically if you want the device to connect to the destination us ing this access point au tomatically. To enter the settings for the selected se curity mode, select WLAN security sett ings . Security settings for WEP â WEP key in use â Select the wired equivalent privacy (WEP) key number. You can create up to four WEP keys. The same settings must be entered on the WLAN acce ss point devic e. â Authenti cation typ e â Select Open or Shared for the authentication typ e between your device and the WLAN access point device. â WEP key settings â Enter WEP encryption (length of the key), WEP key format ( ASCII or Hexadecimal ), a nd WEP key (the WEP key data in the selected format). Security settings for 802.1x and WPA/WPA2 â WPA/WPA 2 â Select the means of authen tication: EAP to use an extensible authentica tion prot ocol (EAP ) plug-in, or Pre-shared key to use a password. Complete the appropriate settin gs: â EAP plug-in setti ngs â Enter the settings according to the instructions from your service provider. â Pre-shared key â Enter a password. The same password must be entered on the WLAN access point device. â WPA2 only mode â Only WPA2 enabled devices are allowed to establish a co nnection in this mode. Advanced WLAN settings Select Options > Advanced settings and from the following: â IPv4 settin gs â Enter the IP address of your device, the subnet IP address, the de fault gateway, and the IP addresses of the prima ry and secondary DNS s ervers. Contact you r internet s ervice provider for these addresses. â IPv6 settin gs â Define the type of DNS address. â Ad-hoc channel (only for Ad-hoc ) â To enter a channel number (1-11) manually, select User define d . Connectivity é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 74
â Proxy server addres s â Enter the address for the proxy server. â Proxy port numbe r â Enter the proxy port number. Active data connections Select Menu > Settings and Co nnectivi ty > Connection mgr. . In the active data connections vi ew, you can see the open data connect ions: data calls packet data connections wireless LAN (WLAN) connections Note: The actual invoice for calls and services from your service provider may vary, depending on network features, rounding off for bi lling, taxes, and so forth. To end a connection, select Option s > Disconnect . To end all open connections, select Optio ns > Disconnect all . To view the details of a connection, select Options > Details . Synchronisation Select Menu > Settings and Co nnectivi ty > Data transfer > Sync . The Synchronisation application enables you to sync hronise your notes, calendar entries, text and multimedia messages, browser bookmarks, or contac ts with various compatible applications on a compatible co mputer or on the internet. You may receive synchronisation settings in a special message from your service provider. A synchronisation profile contai ns the necessary se ttings for synchronisation. When you open the application , the default or previously used synchronisation profile is displayed. To modify the profile, tap a synchronisation item to include it in the profile or to leave it out. To manage synchronisat ion profiles, select Options and the desired option. To synchronise data, select Options > Synchroni se . To cancel synchronisation before it finishes, select Cancel . Bluetooth connectivity About Bluetooth co nnectivity With Bluetooth connectivity, yo u can make a wireless connection to other compatible devices, such as mobile phones, computers, headsets , and car kits. You can use the connection to se nd images, video clips, music and sound clips, and n otes, transfer files from your compatible PC, and print images with a compatible printer. Since devices with Bl uetooth wireless technology communicate using radio waves, they do not need to be in di r ec t li ne - o f- s ig h t. H ow e ve r , t h ey mu s t be wi t hi n 10 me t re s Connectivity é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 75
(33 feet) of each other, al though the connection may be subject to interference from obstructions such as w alls or from other electronic devices. This device is compliant with Bluetooth Specification 2.0 EDR supporting the following profiles: advanced audio distribution, basic imaging, de vice identification, dial-up networking, file transfer, generic access, generic audio/video distribution, generic object exchange, hands-free, headset, object push, phone book access, se rial port, and SIM access. To ensure interoperability be twee n other devices supporting Bluetooth technolo gy, use Noki a approved accessories for this model. Check with th e manufacturers of oth er devices to determine their compatibil ity with this device. Features using Bluetooth techno logy increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life. When the device is locked , you cannot use Bluetooth connectivity. Settings Select Menu > Settings and Co nnectivi ty > Bluetooth . When you open the application for the first time, you are asked to define a name for your device. You can change the name later. Select from the following: â Blueto oth â Turn Bluetooth connectivity on or off. â My phone's visibili ty â T o a l l o w y o u r d e v i c e t o b e f o u n d by other devices with Blue tooth wireless technology, select Shown to all . To set a time period after which the visibility is set from shown to hidden, select Set v isibility period . To hide your device from other devices, select Hidden . â My phone's name â Edit the name shown to other devices with Bluetoot h wireless technology. â Remote SIM mode â Enable or disable another device, such as a compatible car kit a ccessory, to use the SIM card in your device to connect to the ne twork. Security tips Select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > Blu etooth . When you are not using Bluetooth connectivity, t o control who can find your device and connect to it, select Bluetooth > Off or My phone's visibility > Hidden . Do not pair with or accept connection requests from an unknown device. This helps to protect your device from harmful content. Send data using Bluetooth connectivity Several Bluetooth connecti ons can be active at a time . For example, if you are c onnected to a co mpatible headset, you can also transfer files to a nother compatible device at the same time. 1. Open the application where th e item yo u want to send is stored. For example, to se nd an image to another compatible device, select Gallery > Images & vide os . 2. Tap an it em, and select Options > Send > Via Bluetooth . Devices with Bluetooth wireless technology that are within range are displayed. Device icons are as follows: Connectivity é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 76
computer phone audio or video device other device To interrupt th e search, select Stop . 3. Select the device with which you wa nt to connect. 4. If the other device requires pairing before data can be transmitted, a tone sounds, and you are as ked to enter a passcode. The same passcode must be entere d in both devices. When the connection is established, Sending data is displayed. Tip: When searching for devices, some devices may show only the unique addre ss (device address ). To find the unique address of your device, enter *#2820# . Pair devices Select Menu > Settings and Co nnectivi ty > Bluetooth . To pair with compatible dev ices and view your paired devices, open the Paired de vices tab. Before pairing, create your own p a s s c o d e ( 1 t o 1 6 d i g i t s ) , a n d agree with the owner of the other device to use the same code. Devices that do not have a user interface have a factory- set passcode. The passcode is used only once. 1. To pair with a device, select Options > New paired device . Devices that are within range are displa yed. 2. Select the device, and en ter the pas scode. The same passcode must be entered on the other device, as well. 3. Some audio accessories connect a utomatically to your device after pairing. Othe rwise, to connect to an accessory, select Opt ions > Connect to audio device . Paired devices are indicated by in the device search. To set a device as authorised or unauthorised, select from the following: â Set as author ised â Connections between your device and the authorised device ca n be made without your knowledge. You will not be asked for authorisation or acceptance sepa rately. Use t h is status only for your own devices, such as yo ur compatible headset or PC, or devices that belong to so meone you trust . indicates authorised devices in the paired devices view. â Set as unauthorise d â Connection requests from this device must be accepted separately every time. To cancel a pairing with a device, select Options > Delete . To cancel all pairings, select Options > Delete all . Receive data using Bluetooth connectivity When you receive data t hrough Bluetoot h connectivity , a tone sounds, and you a re asked if you want to accep t the message. If you accept, is displayed, and the item is placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging. Messages receive d through Bluetooth connectivity are indicated by . Connectivity é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 77
Block devices Select Menu > Settings and Co nnectivi ty > Bluetooth . To block a device from establishing a Bluetooth connection to your device, open the Paired devices tab. Tap a device you want to block, if it is not already highlighted, and select Options > Block . To unblock a device, open the Blocked devices tab, tap a device, if it is not already highlighted, and select Op tions > Delete . To unblock all blocked devices, select Options > Delete all . If you reject a pairing reques t from another device, you are asked if you want to block all future connection requests from this device. If y ou accept the query , the remote device i s added to the list of blocked devices. Remote SIM mode Select Menu > Settings and Co nnectivi ty > Bluetooth . Before the remote SIM mode can be activated, t he two devices must be paired and th e pairing initiated from the other device. When pairing, us e a 16-digi t passcode, and set the other device as authorised. To use the remote SIM mode with a compatible ca r kit accessory, activate Bluetooth connectivity, and enable the use of the remote SIM mode with your device. Activate the remote SIM mode from the other device. When the remote SIM mode is on in your device, Remote SIM mode is displayed in the home sc reen. The connection to the wireless network is turned off, as indicated by in the signal strength indicator a rea, and you cannot use SIM card services or features requiring ce llular network coverage. When the wireless device is in the remote SIM m ode, you can only use a compatible connected accessory, such as a car kit, to make or receive calls. Your wireless device will not make any calls while in this mode, except to the emergency numbers programmed into your device. To ma ke calls from your device, you must leave the remote S IM mode. If the device is locked, enter the lock code to unlock it. To leave the remote SIM mode, press the power key, and select Exit remote SIM mode . USB Select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > US B . To have the device ask the purpose of the connection each time a compatible data cable is connected, select Ask on connecti on > Yes . If the Ask on connection option is turned off or you want to chan ge the mode during an acti ve connection, select USB connection mode and from the following: â PC Suite â Use Nokia PC applications such as Nokia Ovi Suite, and Nokia Soft ware Updater. Connectivity é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 78
â Mass storage â Transfer data between your device a nd a compatible PC. â Image transfer â Print images with a compatible printer. â Media transfer â Synchronise m usic with Windows Media Player. PC connections You can use your mo bile device with a variety of compatible PC connectivity and data communicat ions applications. With Nokia Ovi Suite you can, for exam ple, transfer files and images between your device and a comp atible computer. To use Ovi Suite with USB connection mode, select PC Su ite mode . For more information about Ov i Suite and the download link in the support area on the Nokia website, see www.ovi.nokia.com. Administrative settings Select Menu > Settings and Co nnectivi ty > Admin. settings . To set the online time for the da ta call connection, select Data call . The data call settings affect all access points that use a GSM data call. SIP settings Select Menu > Settings and Co nnectivi ty > Admin. settings > SIP settings . Session Initiation Protocol (S IP) settings are needed for certain network services using SIP. You may receive the settings in a special text mess age from your service provider. You can view, delete, or create these setting profiles in SIP settings. Access point name control Select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > Admin. settings > APN control . With the access point name co ntrol service, you can restrict packet data connections and a llow your device to use only certain packet data access points. This setting is only availa ble if your SIM card supports the access point control service. T o t u r n t h e c o n t r o l s e r v i c e o n o r o f f , o r t o c h a n g e t h e a l l o w e d access points, select Options and the corresponding option. To change the options, you need your PIN2 code. Contact your service provider for the code. Packet data settings Select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > Admin. settings > Packet data . The packet data set tings affe ct all access points using a packet data connection. Select from the following: â Packet data connection â If you select When available and you are in a net work that suppor ts packet data, the device regist ers to the packet data network. Connectivity é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 79
Starting an active packet data connection ( for example, to send and receive e-mail) is quicker than if the device establishes a packet data connection when needed. If there is no packet data cove rage, the dev ice peri odical ly tries to establish a packet data connection. If you select When needed , the device uses a packet data connection only if you start an app licat ion or action that needs it. â Access point â The access point name is needed to us e your device as a packet data modem to a compatible computer. â High speed packet access â Enable or disable the use of HSDPA (network servic e) in UMTS networks. 15. Share online Share online Select Menu > Internet > Share o nline . With Share online, yo u can po st images, video clips, and sound clips from your device to compatible online sharing services, such as albums and blogs. You can also view and send comments to the p osts in these services, and download content to your compatible Nokia device. The supported cont ent types may vary depending on the service provider. The availability of the Sh are online service may vary depending on your country or sales area . Subscribe to services Select Menu > Internet > Share o nline . To subscribe to an online shar ing service, go to the service provider's website, and check that your Nokia device is compatible with the service. Create an ac count as instructed on the website. You receive a user name and password needed to set up your device with the account. 1. To activate a se rvice, open the Sha re online application in your device, select a service and Option s > Activate . 2. Allow the device to create a network connection. If you are prompted for an internet access point, select one from the list. 3. Sign in to your account as instructed on the service providerâÂÂs website. Nokia's services in the online sharing service are free of charge. Any data t ransferred over the network may incur charges from your service provider. For the availability and cost of the third party services and dat a transfer costs, contact your service provider or the relevant third party. Manage your accounts To view your accounts, select Options > Settings > My accounts . Share online é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 80
To create a new acc ount, select Options > Add new account . T o ch a n g e y o u r u s e r n a m e o r p a s s w o r d f o r an a c c o u n t , s e l ec t the account and Options > Open . To set the account as the defau lt when sending post s from your device, select Opt ions > Set as default . To remove an account, se lect the account and Options > Delete . Create a post Select Menu > Internet > Share o nline . To post multimedia files to a service, select a service a nd Options > New post . If the online sharing service provides channels for posting files, select the desire d channel. To add an image, video clip, or sound clip to the post, select Options > Insert . To add a title or description to the post, enter text directly to the fields, if available. To add tags to the post, select Tags: . To select whether to enab le the posting of location information contained in the file, select Location: . To set the level of privacy f or a file, select Privacy: . To allow everyone to view your file, select Public . To restrict others from seeing your files, select Private . You can define the Default setting on the service provider's website. To send the post to the service, select Options > Post to web . Post files from Galle ry You can post files from Gallery to an online sharing service. 1. Open Gallery, and select th e files you want to post. 2. Select Options > Send > Post to web and the desired account. 3. Edit your post as required. 4. Select Options > Post to web . 16. Nokia Video Centre With Nok ia Video Centre (netwo rk service), you can download and stream video clips over th e air from compatible internet video services using a packet data or WLAN connection. You can also transfer video clips from a compatible PC to your device and view them in Video centre. Using packet data access poi nts to download videos may involve the transmission of la rge amounts o f data through your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information abou t data transmission charge s. Your device may have predefined s ervices. Nokia Video Centre é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 81
Service providers may provide free content or charge a fee. Check the pricing in the service or from the service provider. View and downlo ad video clips Connect to video services 1. Select Menu > Applicatio ns > Video centre . 2. To connect to a servi ce to install video services , select Video di rectory and the desired video service from the service catalogue. View a video clip To browse the content of in stalled video services, select Video feeds . The content of some video servic es is divided into categories. To browse video clips, select a category. To search for a video clip in the service, select Video search . Search may not be available in all services. To view information abou t the selected video clip, select Options > Video details . Some video clips can be streamed over the air, but others must be first downloaded to your device. To download a video clip, select Options > Download . Downloads continue in the background if you exit the application. The downloaded video clips are save d in My videos. To stream a video clip or view a downloaded one, select Options > Play . When the video clip is play ing, to use the contro l keys for controlling the player, tap the screen. To adjust the volume, use the volume key. Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. Continuous exposure to hi gh volume may damage y our hearing. Schedule downloads Setting the application to download video clips aut omatically may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. For information about data transmission charges, contact your service provider. To schedule an automa tic download for video clips in a service, select a category and Options > Schedule downloads . Video centre automatically downloads new video clips daily at the time you define. To cancel scheduled downloads for a category, select Manual download as the download method. Video feeds The content of the installed vide o services is distributed using Atom or RSS feeds. To view and manage your feeds, select Video feeds . Select Options and from the following: â Feed sub scription s â Check your current feed subscriptions. â Refresh feed s â Refresh the content of all feeds. â Add feed â Subscribe to new feeds. Select Via Video directory to select a feed from the services in the video directory, or Add manually to add a video feed address. â Feed details â View information about a video. Nokia Video Centre é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 82
â Manage account â Manage your account options for a given feed, if available. â Remove fee d â R em o v e a f e e d fr o m y o u r s u b sc r i p t i o n s . You may not be able to remove some preinstalled feeds. To view the videos available in a feed, select a feed from the list. My videos My videos is a storage place fo r all videos in the Video centre application. You can list downlo aded videos and video clips recorded with the device camera in separate views. 1. To open a folder and view vi deo clips, select the folder. When a video clip is playing, to use the control keys for controlling the play er, tap the screen. 2. To adjust the volume, press the volume key. Select Options and from the following: â Mute or Unmute â Turn sound on or off. â Resume dow nload â Resume a paused or failed download. â Cancel download â Cancel a download. â Video details â View file details. â Change aspect ratio â Select the aspect ratio of the video clip. Select Natural , Stretch , or Z oom . â Memory status â View the amount of free and used memory. To move or copy video clips to a compatible memory card, select Options > Move and copy > Copy or Move and the memory card. Transfer vi deos from your PC Transfer your own video clips to Video centre from compatible devices using a comp atible USB data cable. Video centre will display only the vi deo clips which are in a format supported by your device. 1. To view your device on a PC as a mass memory device where you can transfer any data files, make the connection with a USB data cable. 2. Select Mass storage as the connection mode. A compatible memory card needs to be inserted in the device. 3. Select the video clips you wan t to copy from your PC. 4. Transfer the video clips t o E:\My Videos in the memory card. The transferred video clips appear in the My videos folder in Video centre. Video files in other folders of your device are not displayed. Video centre settings In the Video centre main view, select Options > Settin gs and from the following: â Video service select ion â Select the video services that you want to app ear in Vide o centre. You can also add, remove, edit, and view the details of a video service. You cannot edit preinstalled video services. â Connection settings â To define the network destination used for the network connection, select Network connection . T o select the connection manually Nokia Video Centre é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 83
each time Video centre open s a network connection, select Always ask . To set GPRS connection on or off, select Confirm GPRS usage . To set roaming on or off, select Confirm roaming . â Parental control â Set an age limit to v ideos. The required password is the same as the device lock code. The factory setting for the lock code is 12345 . In video-on- demand services, videos which have the same or a hi gher age limit than you have set, are hidden . â Preferred memory â Select whether downloaded videos are saved in the device memory or on a compatible memory card. â Thumbnails â Select whether to download and view thumbnail images in video feeds. 17. Web browse r With the web browser, you can view hypertext markup language (HTML) page s on the web as originally designed. You can also browse web pages t hat are designed spe cifically for mobile devices, and use extensible hypertext markup language (XHTML ), or the wireless markup langua ge (WML). To browse the web, you need to have an internet access point defined in your device. Tip: To access the browse r, tap the media key ( ) to open the media bar, and select . Browse the web Select Menu > Internet > Web . Important: Use only services that you trust and that offer adequate security and protection against harmful software. Important : Only install and use applications and other software from trusted sources, such a s applications tha t are Symbian Signed or hav e passed the Java Verified⢠testing. To browse a web page, in the bookmarks view, select a bookmark, or enter the address in the field ( ), and select Go to . Some web pages may cont ain material, such as gr aphics and sounds, that requires a large amount of memory to view. If your device runs out of memo ry while loading such a web page, the graphics on the page are not shown. To browse web p ages withou t graphics t o save memory, select Options > Settings > Page > Load c ontent > Tex t only . To enter a new web address you want to visit, select Options > Go to > New we b page . Web browser é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 84
To refresh the content of the web page, selec t Options > Web page options > Reload . To save the current web page a s a bookmark, select Options > Web page option s > Save as bookmark . To view snapshots of the web pages you hav e visited during the current browsing s ession, select Back (available if History list is set on in the browse r settings and the current web page i s not th e first web page you vi sit). Select the web page y ou want. To open a sublist of commands or actions for the current web page, select Options > Servi ce options (if supported by the web page). To prevent or allow the automatic opening of multiple windows, select Op tions > Web page options > Block pop-ups or Allow pop-ups . Tip: To take the browser to the background, press the end key once. To end the connection, press and hold the end key. Browser toolbar The browser toolbar helps yo u select frequently used functions of the browser. From the toolbar, sele ct from the following: â Expand toolbar â E x p a n d t h e t o o l b a r t o a c ce s s m o r e toolbar functions. â Go to web address â Enter a new web address. â Show zoom â Zoom in or out on the web page. To use the expanded toolbar, select Expand t oolbar and from the following: â Go to feeds â View your current feed subscriptions. â Full screen â Switch to the full screen view. â Subsc. feeds â View a lis t of available web feeds on the current web page, and subscribe to a web feed. â Settings â Edit the settings. â Save bkmrk. â Save the current web page as a bookmark. â Reload â Refresh the web page. â Overview â View an overview of the current web page. â Homepage â Go to the homepage (if defined in the settings). â Bookmarks â Open the bookmarks view. â Find keywd. â Search on the current web page. Navigate pages When you are bro wsing a web page t hat contains a larg e amount of information, you can use Page overview t o view what kind of information th e web page contains. To see an overview of the curre nt web page, open the toolbar, and select > . Web feeds and blogs Web feeds are XML files on web pages that are used to share, for example, the latest news headlines or blogs. Blogs or Web browse r é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 85
weblogs are web diaries. It is common to find web feeds on web, blog, and wiki pages. The Web application automatically detects if a web page contains web feeds. To subscribe to a web feed, select a feed and Options > Subscribe to we b feeds . To update a web feed, select a feed and Option s > Refresh . To define how the web feeds are updated, select Op tions > Settings > Web feeds . Widgets Your device supp orts wi dgets. Widgets are small, downloadable web applicati ons that deliver multimedia, news feeds, and other in formation, such as weather reports, to your device. Installed widgets appear as separate applications in the Applications folder. You can download widgets us ing the Download! application or from the web. You can also inst all widgets on a compatible memory card (if available). The default access point for widgets is the same as in the w eb browser. When active in the background, some widgets may update informat ion automa tically to you r device. Using widget s may invo lve the transmission of large amounts of data through your servic e provider's network. For information about data transm ission charges, contact your service provider. Content search To search for text, phone nu mbers, or e-mail addresses within the current web page, select Options > Ke yword and the desired option. To go to the previous match, select Options > Find previous . To go to the next ma tch, select Options > Find next . Tip: To search for text within the current web page, open the toolbar, and select > . Download and purchase items You can download items such as ringing tones, im ages, operator logos, themes, and vi deo clips. These items can be provided free of charge, or you can purchase them. Downloaded items are handled by the respective applicati ons in your device, for example, a downloaded photo can be saved in Gallery. Important : Only install and use applications and other software from trusted sources, such a s applications tha t are Symbian Signed or hav e passed the Java Verified testing. To download an item: 1. Select the link. 2. Select the appropriate option to purch ase the item (for example, Buy ). 3. Carefully read all th e information provided. 4. To continue or canc el the download, selec t the appropriate option (for example, Accept or Cancel ). Web browser é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 86
When you star t a download, a list of ongoing and completed downloads from the current br owsing session is displayed. To modify the list, select Options > Downloads . In t he list, select an item an d Options to cancel ongoing downloads, or open, save, or d elete completed d ownloads. Bookmarks The bookmarks view opens when you open the Web application. You can select web addresses from a list or from a collection of bookmarks in the Recently visited pages folder. The toolbar helps you select freq uently used functions of the browser. On the toolbar, select from the following: â Add bookmark â Add a new bookmark. â Go to web address â Enter a new web address. â Delete â Delete a bookmark. Select Options and from the following: â Go to â Enter a new web address, go to the previous web page, or view saved link s to web feeds and blogs. â Bookmark options â Send and add boo kmarks, and set bookmarks as a homepage. â Bookmark manager â Edit, move, and delete bookmarks. Web also keeps track of the we b pages you visit during browsing. In the Recently vi sited pages folder, you can view the list of the v isited web pages . Empty the cache The information or services yo u have accessed are st ored in the cache memory of the device. A cache is a memory location that is used to sto re data temporarily. If you have tried to access or have accessed confidential information requ iring passwords, empty the cache after each use. To empty the cache, select Options > Clear privacy data > Cache . Connection security If the security indicator ( ) is displayed duri ng a connection, the data transmi ssion between the device and the internet gateway or server is encrypted. The security icon does not indi cate that the data transmission between the gateway and the co ntent server (or the place where the requested resource is stored) is secure. The service provider secures the data transmission between the gateway and the content server. Security certificates may be re quired for some services, such as banking services. You are noti fied if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your device. For more information, contact your service provider. Important : Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote co nnections and software installation considerably smaller, they must be used correctly Web browse r é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 87
in order to benefit from increased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer any protecti on by itself; the certificate manager must co ntain correct, authentic, or trusted certificates for increa sed secur ity to be available. Certificates have a restricted li fetime. If "Expired certificate" or "Certificate not valid yet" is shown, even if the certificate should be valid, check that the current date and time in your device are correct. Before changing any certificat e sett ings, you must make sure that you really trust the owner of the certificate an d that the certificate really belong s to the listed owner. 18. Search About Search Select Menu > Internet > Search . Search enables yo u to use va rious internet-based search services to find, for example, websites, and images . The content and availability of the services may vary. Start a search Select Menu > Internet > Search . To search the contents of your mobile device, en ter search terms in the search field, or browse the content categories. While you enter the search terms, the results are organised into categories. The most recently accessed results appear at the top of the result list, if they match your search terms. To search for web pages on the internet, select Search the Internet , a search provider, an d enter your search term s in the search field. The search provider you selected is set as your default internet search provider. If a default search provider is already set, select it to start a search, or select More search s ervices to use another search provider. To change the default service provider, select Options > Select service . To change the country or region setting to find more search providers, select Optio ns > Settings > Country or region . 19. Download! Some features may not be available in your region. Please check the availability with local operator. About Download! Select Menu > Download! . Search é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 88
With Dow nload!, you can di scov er, pr eview, buy, download, and upgrade cont ent, services, and applications. Games, ringing tones, wallpapers, applications, and much more are easily accessible. T he items ar e categorised under catalog ues and folders from different serv ice providers. The available content depends on your service provider. Download! uses yo ur network serv ices to access the most up - to-date content. For inform ation on additional items available through Dow nload!, contact you r service provider or the supplier or manu facturer of the item. Download! receives updates conti nuously and provides you with the latest content your se rvice provider offers for your device. Items may be charg eable, but you can usua lly preview them free of charge. For more information about the charges, contact your service provider or the provider of the item. To update the content in Download! manually, select Options > Refresh content . Purchase a nd download items To buy the selected item in the main view, a folder, or a catalogue, select Options > Buy . A submenu opens where you can select the version of the item and view price information. The available opt ions depend on the service provider. To download an item that is free of charge, select Optio ns > Get . 20. Other applications Clock Select Menu > Applications > Clock . Alarm clock To view your active and ina ctive alarms, select Alarms . When the alarm is acti ve, is displayed. When the alarm is repeated, is displayed. To set a new alarm, se lect New alarm . To set a one-time alarm within 24 hours, on a certain da y, or a repeated alarm, select Repeat . To remove an alarm, select Alarms , scroll to the alar m, and select Option s > Remove alarm . To turn off the sounding alarm, select Stop . To stop the alarm for a certain time period, select Snooze . If your device is switched off when an alarm is du e, you r device switches itself on and starts sounding the alarm tone. Other applic ations é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 89
To define the time period after whi ch the alarm sounds again when you set it to snooze, select Options > Se ttings > Alarm snooze time . To change the time, dat e, and clock type settings, select Options > Sett ings . To automatically update the time, date, and time zone information for yo ur device (network service), select Automatic tim e update > On . World clock To view the cu rrent time in different locations, select World clock . To add locations to the list, select Op tions > Add location . To set your current location, scroll to a location, and select Options > Set as current location . The time in your device is changed according to the selected location. Ensure th at the time is correct and matches your time zone. Calendar To open the calendar, select Menu > Calendar . Calendar views To switch between month, week , day, and to-do note view, select Options > Change view > Month view , Week , Day or To-do . To change the star ting day of the week, the view that is shown when you open the calendar, or th e calendar alarm settings, select Option s > Settings . To go to a certain date, select Op tions > Go to date . Calendar toolbar On calendar toolbar, you may select from the following: â Next v iew â Select the month view. â Next v iew â Select the week view. â Next v iew â Select the day view. â Next vi ew â Select the to-do view. â New meeti ng â Add a new meeting reminder. â New to-do note â Add a now to-do note. File manager About File manager Select Menu > Applications > File mgr. . With File manager, you can brow se, manage, and open files on your device, memory car d, or a compatible external drive. The available options depend on the memory you select. Find and organise file s Select Menu > Applications > File mgr. . To find a file, select Opt ions > Find . Enter a search text tha t matches the file name. To move and copy files and folders, or to create new folders in the memo ry, select Options > Organise and the desired option. To sort files, select Options > Sort by and the desire d category. Other applications é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 90
Edit memory card Select Menu > Applications > File mgr. . These options are available only if a compatible memory card is inserted in the device. Select Options and from the following: â Memory card opti ons â Rename or format a memory card. â Memory c ard pass word â Password protect a memo ry card. â Unlock memory card â Unlo ck a memory card. Back up files on a memory card Select Menu > Applications > File mgr. . To back up files, select the fi le types you w ant to back up o n a memory card and Options > Back up now . Ensure that your memory card has enough free memory for the files that you have chosen to back up . Application manager With Application mana ger, you can see the software packages installed in your de vice. You can view details of installed applications, remo ve applications, and define installation settings. You can install two types of ap plications and software to your device: â JME applications based on Java⢠technology with the .j ad or .jar file extensions â Other applications and software suit able for the Symbian operating system with the .s is or .sisx file extensions Only install software that is compatible with your device. Install applications You can transfer installation files to your device from a compatible computer, download them during browsin g, or receive them in a multimed ia message, as an e-mail attachment, or using other co nnectivity methods, such as Bluetooth connectivity. You can use N okia Application I nstaller in Nokia Ovi Suite to install an application to your device. Icons in Application manage r indicate the following: SIS or SISX application Java application widgets application installed in the memory card Important : Only install and use applications and other software from trusted sources, such a s applications tha t are Symbian Signed or hav e passed the Java Verified testing. Before installation, note the following: â To view the application ty pe, v ersion number, and the supplier or manufacturer of the application, select Options > View details . Other applic ations é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 91
To view the security certific ate details of the application, select Details: > Certificates: > View details . Control the use of digital certificates in Certificate management. â If you install a file that contains an update or repair to an existing application, you ca n only restore the original application if you have the origin al installation file or a full backup copy of the removed software package. To restore the original application, remove the application, and install the application ag ain fr om the original installation file or the backup copy. The JAR file is required for inst alling Java appl ications. If it is missing, the device may ask you to download it. If there is no access point defined for the application, you are asked to select one. To install an application: 1. To locate an insta llation file, select Menu > Settings and Application mgr. . Alternatively, search installation files using File manager, or select Messaging > Inbox , and open a message th at contains an installation file. 2. In Application manager, select Opt ions > Install . In other applications, select the installation file to start the installation. During installation, the devi ce shows information about the progress of the installation. If you i nstall an application without a digital signature or certification, the device displays a warning. Continue installation only if you are sure of the or igin and contents of the application. To start an installed applica tion, locate it in the menu, an d select it. If th e applic ation does not have a default fold er defined, it is installed in the Installed apps. fo lder in the main menu. To see which software packages are installed or removed and when, select Opt ions > View log . Important : Your device can only support one antivirus application. Having more than one app lication with antivirus functionality could affect performance and operation or cause the device to stop functi oning. After you install applications to a compatible memory card, installation files (.si s, .sisx) remain in the dev ice memory. The files may use large amounts of memory and prevent you from storing other fi les. If the .sis file is a message att achment, delete the message from the Messaging inbox. Remove applications Select Menu > Settings and Application mgr. . To remove a software package, select Installed apps. > Options > Remove . Select Yes to confirm. If you remove software, you can only reinstall it if you have the original software package or a full backup of the removed software package. If you remo ve a software package, you may no longer be a ble to open documents created with that software. If another software packag e depends on the software package that you removed, the other software pa ckage may Other applications é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 92
stop working. Refer to the do cumentation of the installed software package for details. Application manager settings Select Menu > Settings and Ap plication mgr. . Select Installatio n settings and from the following: â Software ins tallation â Select whether Symbian software that has no verified digital signature can be installed. â Online certificate check â Select to check the online certificates before inst alling an ap plication. â Default w eb addres s â Set the default web address used when checking online certificates. Application Update Select Menu > Applications > App. upd ate . With Application Upda te, you can check the available upda tes for applications and download th em to your device. After updating your device software using Application Update, the functiona l instructions related to t he updated applications in the user guide or the helps may not be up to date. To download the available updates, select Options > Start update . To unmark updates, select the updat es. To view information on an update, select Options > View details . To change the settings , select Options > Settings . RealPlayer With RealPlayer, you can pla y video clips or stream medi a files over the air without saving them to the device firs t. RealPlayer does not necessarily support all file formats or all the variations of file formats. Select Menu > Applications > RealPlayer . RealPlayer toolbar In the Video clips, Streaming li nks, and R ecently played v iews, the following toolbar icons may be available: â Send â Send a video clip or streaming link. â Play â Play the video clip or video stream. â Delete â Delete the video clip or streaming link. â Remove â Remove a file from the recently played list. Play video clips To play a video clip, select Video clips , and a clip. To list recently played files, in the application main view, select Recently played . In the list of video clips, scroll to a clip, select Op tions and from the following: â Use video clip â Assign a video t o a contact or set it as a ringing tone. â Mark/Unmark â Mar k item s in th e list t o send or dele te multiple items at the same time. Other applic ations é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 93
â View details â View details of the selected item, such as format, resolution, and duration. â Settings â Edit settings for video playba ck and streaming. Stream content over the air In RealPlayer, you can only open an RTSP link. However, RealPlayer plays a RAM fi le if you open an HTTP link to it in a browser. To stream content over th e air (network service), in RealPlayer, select Streaming links and a link. You can also receive a streaming link in a text message or multimedia message, or open a link on a web page. Before live content begins streaming, your device conn ects to the site and starts loading the content. The content is not saved in your device. Recorder Select Menu > Applications > Recorder . With the Recorder application, you can record voice memos and telephone conversations. The recorder cannot be used when a data call or GPRS connection is active. To record a sound clip, select . To stop recording a sound clip, select . To listen to the sound clip, select . To select the recording qualit y or where you want to save your sound clips, se lect Optio ns > Settings . Recorded sound clips are saved in the Sound clips folder in Gallery. To record a telephone conversa tion, open recorder during a voice call, and select . Both parties hear a tone every 5 seconds during recording. Write notes Select Menu > Applications > Notes . To write a no te, select Options > New note . Tap the note field to enter text, and select . You can sav e plain text files (. txt file format) you receive to Notes. Calculator Select Menu > Applications > Calculator . This calculator has limited ac curacy and is designed for simple calculations. To make a calculation, enter the first number of the calculation. To rem ove a number, select C . Select a function such as add or subtract. Enter the second number of the calculation, and select = . Converter With Converter, you can convert measures from one unit to another. The converter has limited accu racy, and rounding errors may occur. Other applications é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 94
Select Menu > Applications > Converter . Dictionary Select Menu > Applications > Dictionary . To translate words from one la nguage to another, enter text in the search field. As you en ter text, s uggestions of words to translate are disp layed. To translate a w ord, select the word from the list. Select Options and from the following: â Listen â Listen to the selected word. â History â Find previously translated words from the current session. â Languages â Change the source or targ et language. â Languages â Download languages from the internet or remove a language from the dictionary. You cannot remove the English langua ge from the dictionary. You can have two additional la nguage s installed, be sides English. â Speech â Edit the voice feature settings. You ca n adjust the speed and volume of the voice. 21. Settings Some settings may be preset fo r the device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change them. Phone settings Date and time settings Select Menu > Settings and Ph one > Date and time . Select from the following: â Time â Enter the current time. â Time zone â Select your location. â Date â Enter the date. â Date for mat â Select the date format. â Date s eparator â Select the sy mbol that separates day s, months, and years. â Time format â Select the time format. â Time separator â Select the symbol tha t separates hours and minute s. â Clock type â Select the clock type. â Clock alarm tone â Select the to ne for the alarm clock. â Alarm snooze time â Adjust the snooze time. â Workdays â Select your working days. You can then set an alarm only for working day mornings, for example. â Automatic time update â To update the time, date, and time zone, select On . This network service may not be available on all networks . Language settings Select Menu > Settings and Pho ne > Language . To change the device language, select Phone l anguage . To change the writing lan guage, select Writing language . Settings é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 95
To turn predictive text input on or off, select Predictive text . Display settings Select Menu > Settings and Ph one > Display . Select from the following: â Light s ensor â Adjust the light sensor sensitivity of your device. The light sensor turns the light s on when the lighting of your location is dim and off when it is bright. â Font size â Select the size of text and icons on the display. â Welcome note / logo â Select whether you wa nt to display a note or image when you switch on the device. â Light t ime-out â Set how long the lig ht stays on when you stop using the dev ice. Voice commands You can use enhanced voice com mands to control your device. To activate enhanced voice commands to start applica tions and profiles, press and hold th e call key in the home screen. To use enhanced voice commands , press and hold the call key in the home screen, and speak a voice command. The voice command is the name of the application or profile displayed in the list. Select Menu > Settings and Ph one > Voice commands . To edit the voice commands, select Options > Change command . To listen to the synthe sised voice tag, select Options > Playback . To remove a voice command that you added manually, select Options > Remove voic e command . Select Options > Settings and from the following: â Synthesise r â Turn on or off th e synthesiser that plays recognised voice tags an d commands in the selected device language. â Playback volume â Adjust the playback volume for the voice commands. â Recognition sens itivity â Adjust how easily the synthesiser recognises speech. If the sensitiv ity is set too high, it may not accept comma nds because of background noise. â Command verification â Select whether the s poken command is accepted ma nually, by voice, or automatically. â Reset voice adaptation â Reset voice recognition learning, for example, when the main user of the device has changed . Accessory settings Select Menu > Settings and Pho ne > Accessories . Some accessory connectors indi cate which type of accessory is connected to the device. Select an accessory and from the following: â Default profile â Set the profile that you want activated each time you connect a certain compatible accessory to your device. Settings é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 96
â Automatic answ er â Select whether you want the device to answer an incomi ng call automatically after 5 seconds. If the ringing type is set to Beep o nce or Silent , automatic ans wer is disabled. â Lights â Set whether lights remain on after the time-out. The available settings depend on the type of accessory. TV-out settings To change the sett ings for a TV-out connect ion, select TV- Out and from the following: â Default pr ofile â Set the profile that you want activated each time you connect a Noki a Video Connectivity Cable to your device. â TV screen size â Select the aspect ratio of the TV: Normal or Wides creen for widescreen TVs. â TV system â Select the analogue video signal system that is compatible with your TV. â Flicker fil ter â To improve image quality on the screen of your TV , selec t On . The flicker filter may not diminish image flicker on all TV screens. Application settings Select Menu > Settings and Ph one > Application sett. . In application settings , you can edit the settings of some of the applications in your device. To edit the settings, you can also select Opt ions > Settings in each application. Device updates Select Menu > Settings and Pho ne > Phone mgmt. > Device updates . Use Device updates to check for software updates, t o connect to a server and receive configuration settings for your d evice, to create new server profiles, or to view existing software version and device inform ation and v iew and manage existing server profiles. You may receive server profil es and different configuration settings from your service providers and company information management depa rtment. These configuration settings may include connection and other settings used by different applications in your device. To check for software updates, select Option s > Check for updates . To connect to the server and receive configuration sett ings for your device, select Options > Se rver profiles , a profile, and Options > Start configuration . To create a server profile, select Options > Server profiles > Option s > New se rver profile . To delete a server profile, select the profile and Options > Delete . Security settings Phone and SI M Select Menu > Settings and Pho ne > Phone mgmt. > Security > Phone an d SIM card . Select from the following: Settings é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 97
â PIN cod e request â When active, the code is requested each time the device is switched on. Deactivating the PIN code request may not be a llowed by some S IM cards. â PIN cod e and PIN2 code â Change the PIN and PIN2 code. These codes can only include numbers. Avoid using access codes similar to the emergency numbers to prevent accidental dialling of the em ergency number. If you forget the PIN or PIN2 code, contact your service p rovider. If you forget the lock code, contact a Nokia Care point or your service provider. â Lock code â The lock code is used to unlock the device. To avoid unauthorised use of your device, change the lock code. The preset code is 12345. The new code can be 4-255 characters long. Alph anumeric characters and both uppercase and low ercase char acters can be used. The device notifies you if the lock code is not properly formatted. Keep th e new code secret and separate from your device. â Phone autolock period â To avoid unauthorised use, you can set a t ime-out af ter which the device automatically locks. A locked device cannot be used until the correct lock code is entere d. To turn o ff autolock, select None . â Lock if SIM card changed â Set the device to ask for the l o c k c od e w he n a n u nk no wn SI M c ar d i s i ns er t e d i n to yo ur device. The device maintains a li st of SIM cards that are recognised as the ownerâÂÂs cards. â Remote ph one lockin g â Enable or disable remote lock. â Closed u ser group â Specify a group of people to whom you can call and who can call you (network service). â Confirm SIM services â Set the device to display confirmation messages when you are using a SIM card service (network service). In the offline or flight profiles , you may need to unlock the device and change to the calling profile before making a call. When calls are limited to closed user groups, calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Certificate management Select Menu > Settings and Pho ne > Phone mgmt. > Security > Certificate management . Digital certificates should be used if you wan t to connect to an online bank or another site or remote server for actions that involve transferri ng confidential informati on. They should also be used if you want to reduce the risk of viruses or other malicious software and be sure of the authenticity of software when downloadin g and installing software. Select from the following: â Authority certifi cates â View and edit authority certificates. â Trusted site ce rtificates â View and edit trusted site certificates. â Personal certificates â View and edit personal certificates. â Phone certificates â View and edit device certificates. Digital certificates do not guar antee safety; they are used to verify the origin of software. Settings é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 98
Important: Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote connections and software installation considerab ly smaller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer any protecti on by itself; the certificate manager must co ntain correct, authentic, or trusted certificates for increa sed secur ity to be available. Certificates have a restricted li fetime. If "Expired certificate" or "Certificate not valid yet" is shown, even if the certificate should be valid, chec k that the curren t date and tim e in your device are correct. View certificate details â check authenticity You can only be s ure of the co rrect identity of a server when the signature and the validity pe riod of a server certificate have been checked. You are notified if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the corre ct security certificate in your device. To check the details of a certificate, select Options > Certificate det ails . The validity of the certificate is checked, and one of the following notes may be displayed: â Certificate not trus ted â You have not set any application to use the certificate. â Expired certificate â The certificate validity period has ended. â Certificate not valid y et â The certificate validity period has not yet begun. â Certificate corrupted â The certificate cannot be used. Contact the certificate issuer. Change the trust settings Before changing any certificat e sett ings, you must make sure that you really trust the owner of the certificate an d that the certificate really belong s to the listed owner. To change the settings for an authority certificate, select Options > Trust settings . Depending on the certificate, a list of the applications tha t ca n use the selected certificate is shown. For example: â Symbian installation : Yes â The certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Symbian operating system application. â Internet : Yes â The certificate is able to certify servers. â App. installation : Yes â The certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Java⢠application. To change the value, select Op tions > Change trust setting . Security module Select Menu > Settings and Pho ne > Phone mgmt. > Security > Security module . To vi ew or edit a s ecuri ty mod u le (if available), select it from the list. To view detailed information about a security module, select Options > Security details . Settings é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 99
Restore original settings Select Menu > Settings and Ph one > Phon e mgmt. > Factory settings . You can reset some of the settings to their original values. To do this, you need the lock code. After resetting, the device may take a long er time to power on. Documents and fi les are unaffected. Protected cont ent To manage digital righ ts licences, select Menu > Settings and Phone > Phone mgmt. > Se curity > Prot ected content . Digital rights management Content owners may use different types of digital rights management (DRM) technologies to protect their intellect ual property, including copyrights. Th is device uses various types of DRM software to acces s DRM-protected content. With th is device you can access content protected with WMDRM 10, OMA DRM 1.0, and OMA DR M 2.0. If certain DRM software fails to protect the content, conten t owners may ask that su ch DRM software's ability to access new DRM-protected con tent be revoked. Revocation may also prevent renewal of such DRM- protected content already in yo ur device. Revocation of such DRM software does not affect the use of content protected with other types of DRM or the use of non-DRM-protected content. Digital rights manag ement (DRM) protected content comes with an ass ociated activ ation key th at defines your rights to use the content. If your device has WMDRM-p rotected content, both the activation keys and the content will be lost if the device memory is formatted. You may also lose the activation key s and the content if th e files on your device get corrupted. Losing the activation key s or the content may limit you r ability to use the same content on your device again. For more information, contact your service provider. Some activation keys may be co nnected to a specific S IM card, and the protected content can be accessed only if the SIM card is inserted in the device. Notification light Select Menu > Settings and Pho ne > Notifica tion light . When the notification light is turned on, the menu key lights up periodically to notify of missed eve nts, such as missed calls or unread messages. To turn the notifica tion light on or off, select No tification light . Call settings Call settings Select Menu > Settings . Select Calling > Call and from the following: â Send my caller ID â Select Yes to show your phone number to the person you are calling. To use the setting agreed upon with your service provider, select Set by network ) (network service). Settings é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 100
â Call waitin g â Activate your device to notify you of incoming calls while you are in a call (network service), or check whether the function is activa ted. â Reject call with me ssage â Activate rejecting a call wit h a text message to inform the caller wh y you could not answer the call. â Message text â Write the standard text mess age that is sent when you reject a call. â Own video in recvd. call â Select to allow or deny video sending during a video call from your device. â Image in v ideo call â If video is not sent during a video call, you can select a still im age to be displayed instead. â Automatic r edial â Set your device to ma ke a maximum of 10 attempts to connect the call after an unsuccess ful call attempt. To stop automatic redialling, press the end key. â Show call duration â Set the length of a call to be displayed during the call. â Summary after call â Set the length of a call to be displayed after the call. â Speed dial â Activate speed dialling. â Anykey answ er â Activate anykey answer. â Line in use â This setting (network service) is shown o nly if the SIM card supports two subscriber numbers, that is, two phone lines. Select which phone line yo u want to u se for making calls and sending text messages. Calls on both lines can be answered irresp ec tive of the selected line. If you select Line 2 and have not subscribed to this network service, you are not able to make calls. When line 2 is selected, is shown in the home screen. â Line change â Select to prevent line selection (network service), if supported by yo ur SIM card. To change this setting, you need the PIN2 code. Call divert Select Menu > Settings and Cal ling > Call divert . Call divert allows you to divert incoming calls to your voice mailbox or another phone numb er. For details, contact your service provider. To activate call divert, select Activate . To check whether the option is active, select Check status . Several diverting options can be active at the same time. When all calls are diverted, is displayed in the home screen. Call barring and call diverting ca nnot be active at the same time. Call barring Select Menu > Settings and Cal ling > Call ba rring . Call barring (network service) a llows you to restrict the calls that you make or receive with the device. For example, you can restrict all outgoing intern ational calls or incoming calls when you are abroad . To change the settings, you need the barring password from your service provider. Call barring and call diverting ca nnot be active at the same time. Settings é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 101
When calls are barred, calls may be possible to certain official emergency numbers. Voice call barring Select the desired barring option and Activate , Deactivate , or Check status . Call barring affects a ll calls, including data calls. 22. Troubleshooting To view frequently asked ques tions about your device, see the product support pages a t www.nokia.com/support . Q: What is my password for the lock, PIN, or PUK codes? A: The default lock code is 12345 . If you forget the lock code, contact your device dealer. If you forget a PIN or PUK code, or if you have not received such a code, contact your network service provider. For information about passwords, contact your access point provider, for exam ple, a commercial internet service provider (ISP ) or network service provider. Q: How do I clo se an application that is no t responding? A: Press and hold the menu key, select Option s > Show open apps. , and navigate to the app lication with the menu key. Press and hold the menu key, and select Exit . Q: Why do images look smudg y? A: Ensure that the camera len s protection windows are clean. Q: Why do missing, discoloured, or bright dots appear on the screen every time I swit ch on my device? A: This is a characteristic of this type of display. Some displays may contain pixels or dots that remain on or off. This is normal, not a fau lt. Q: Why can't my No kia device establish a GPS connection? A: Establishing a GPS co nnection may t ake from a couple of seconds to several minutes. Establishing a GPS connection in a vehicle may take longer. If you are indoors, go outdoors to receive a better signal. If you are outdoors, move to a more open space. Ensure that your hand does not cover the GPS antenna of your device. If the weather cond itions are bad, the signal strength may be affecte d. Some vehicles have tinted (athermic) windows, whi ch may block the satellite signals. Q: Why canâÂÂt I find my f riendâÂÂs device while us ing Bluetooth connectivity ? A: Check that both devices are compatible , have activated Bluetooth connectivity, and are not in hidden m ode. Check Troubl eshootin g é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 102
also that t he distance betw een the two devices is not over 10 metres (33 feet) and that there are no walls or other obstructions between the devices. Q: Why canâÂÂt I end a Bluetooth co nnection? A: If another dev ice is connected to your devic e, you can end the connection from the other device or deactivate Bluetooth connectivity in your device. Select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > Bluetooth > Bluetooth > Off . Q: Why can't I see a wireless LAN (WLAN) acc ess point even though I know I'm within its range? A: The WLAN access point may use a hidden service set identifier (SSID). You ca n only access networks that use a hidden SSID if you know t he correct SSID, and hav e created a WLAN internet access point fo r the network on your Nokia device. Q: How do I turn the wireless LAN (WLAN) off on my Nokia device? A: The WLAN on your Nokia device turns off when you are not connected or trying to connect to another access point , or not scanning for availa ble networ ks. To further reduce battery consumption, yo u can specify that yo ur Nokia device does not scan, or scans less often, for availa ble networks in the background. The WLAN turns off in between background scans. To change the backg round scan settings: 1. Select Menu > Settings and Wireless L AN . 2. To increase th e background scan time interval, adjust the time in Scan for networks. To stop background scans, select Show WLAN availability > Never . 3. To save your chan ges, select Back . When Show WLAN availabilit y is set to Never , the WLAN availability icon is not shown in the home screen. However, you can still manua lly scan for available WLAN networks, and connect to WLAN networks as usual. Q: What do I do if th e memory is full? A: Delete items from the memory. If Not enough memory to perform operat ion. Delete so me data first. or Me mory low. Delete som e data from phone memory. is displayed when you are deleting several items a t the same time, delete items one by one, beginning with the smallest ite ms. Q: Why canâÂÂt I select a con tact for my message? A: The contact card does not have a phone number, address, or e-mail address. Select Menu > Contacts and the relevant contact, and edit the contact ca rd. Q: How can I end the data connection when the device starts a data connection again and again? A: The device may be trying to retrieve a multimedia message from the multimedia message ce ntre. To stop the device from making a data connection, select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settings > Multimed ia message > Multimedi a retrieval . Select Manual to have the multimedia messaging centre sa ve messages to be retrieved later, or Off to ignore all incoming multimedia m essages. If you select Manual , you receive a notification when you have Troubleshooting é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 103
a new message in the mu ltimed ia message centre. If you select Off , the device does not make any network connect ions related to multimedia messaging. To set the device to use a packet data connection only if you start an application or action that needs it, select Menu > Settings and Admin. settings > Packet data > Packet data connection > When nee ded . If this does not help, switch the device off and then on again. Q: Can I use my Nokia device as a f ax modem with a compatible PC? A: You cannot use your device as a fax modem. However, with call diverting (network service) , you can divert incom ing fax calls to a fax number. Q: How do I calibrate the screen? A: The screen is calibrated at th e factory. If it is necessary to recalibrate the screen, select Menu > Settings and Pho ne > Touch input > Touch scree n calibration . Follow the instructions on the display. Troubl eshootin g é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 104
Accessories Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and accessories approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The use of any othe r types ma y invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. For availability of approved accessories, please check with your dealer. When you disconnect the power cord of any accessory, grasp and pull the plug , not the cord. Battery Battery and charger information Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. Th e battery intended for use with this de vice is BL- 5J. Nokia may make additional battery models av ailable for this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from the following chargers: AC-8, AC-5. The exact charger model number may vary depending on the type of plug. The plug variant is identified by one of the following: E, EB, X, AR, U, A, C, or UB. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times, but it will eventually wear out. When th e talk and standby times are noticeably shorter tha n normal, replace the battery. Use only N okia approved batteries, an d recharge your battery on ly with Nokia ap proved chargers desig nated for this device. Use of an unapproved battery or charger may present a risk of fire, explos ion, leakage, or other hazard. If a battery is being used for the first time or if the battery has not been us ed for a prolonge d period, it may be nec essary to connect the charger, then disconn ect and reconnect it to begin charging the battery. If the batt ery is completely discharged, it may take severa l min utes before the charging indicator appea rs on the displa y or before any calls can be made. Always switch the device o ff and disconnect th e charger before removing the battery. Unplug the charger from the el ectrical plug and the device when not in use. Do not le ave a fully charged battery connected to a ch arger, since overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time. Always try to keep the battery between 15ðC a nd 25ðC (59ðF and 77ðF). Extreme temperatures reduce the capacity and lifetime of the battery. A device w ith a hot or cold battery may not wor k tempor arily. Batt ery performa nce is part icularly limited in temperatures well below freezing. Do not short-circuit the battery. Accidenta l short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object suc h as a coin, clip, or pen é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 105
causes direct connection of th e po sitive ( ) and negativ e (-) terminals of the battery . (These look like metal strips on the battery.) This might happ en, fo r example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals ma y damage the batter y or the connecting object. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire as they may explode. Batteries may also explode if damaged. Dispose of batteries according to local re gulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household w aste. Do not dismantle, cut, open, crus h, bend, deform, puncture, or shred cells or batteries. In the event of a battery leak, do not allow the liquid to come in contact with the skin or eyes. In the event of such a leak , flush your skin or eyes immediately with water, or seek medical help. Do not modify, remanufacture, attempt to insert foreign objects into the battery, or immerse or expose it to wate r or other liquids. Improper battery use may result in a fire, explosion, or other hazard. If the device or batter y is dropped, especially on a hard surface, and you believe the battery has been damaged, take it to a service centre for inspection before continuing to use it. Use the battery only for its in tended purpose. Never use any charger or battery that is dama ged. Keep your battery out of the reach of small children. Nokia battery authentication guidel ines Always use original Nokia batter ies for your safety. To check that you are getting a n original Nokia battery, pu rchase it from a Nokia authorised service centre or dealer, and inspect the hologram label usin g the following steps: Successful completion of the steps is not a total assurance of the authenticity of the bat tery. If you have any reason to believe that your battery is not an au thentic, original Nokia battery, you should refrain from using it, and take it to the nearest Nokia authorised service centre or dealer for assistance. If authenticity cannot be verified, return the battery to the place of purchase. Authenticate hologram 1. When you look at the hologram on the label, you should see the Nokia connecting hands symbol from one angle and the No kia Origin al Enhancements logo when looking from another angle. Battery é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 106
2. When you angle the hologram left, right, down and up , you should see 1, 2, 3 and 4 dots on each side respectively. What if your battery is not authentic? If you cannot confirm that your Nokia battery with the hologram on the label is an au thentic Nokia battery, please do not use the battery. Take it to the nearest Nokia authorised service centre or dealer for assistance. The use of a batte ry that is not approv ed by Nokia may be dang erous and may result in poor performance and damage to your device and its accessories. It may also inva lidate any approval or warranty applying to the device. To find out more about origin al Nokia batt eries, see www.nokia.com/battery. Care and maintenance Your device is a product of su perior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with ca re. The following suggestions will help you protect your warranty coverage. â Keep the device dry. Precipi tation, humidity , and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If your device does get wet, remove the battery, and allow the device to dry completely before replacing it. â Use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clean any lenses, such as camera, proximity sensor, and light sensor lenses. â Do not use or store the device in dusty, dirty ar eas. Its moving parts and electronic components can be damaged. â Do not store the device in hot areas. High temperatures can shorten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. â Do not store the device in cold areas. When the device returns to its normal temp erature, moisture can form inside the device and damage electronic circuit boards. â Do not attempt to open the device other than as instructed in this guide. â Do not drop, knock, or shake the device. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards and fine mechanics. â Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the device. â Do not paint the device. Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operation. â Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauth orised antennas, modifications, or attachments could damage th e devi ce and may violate regulations govern ing radio devices. Care and maintenance é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 107
â Use chargers indoors. â Always create a backu p of data you want to keep, s uch as contacts and calendar notes. â To reset the device from time to time for optim um performance, power off the device and remove the battery . These suggestions a pply equally to your device, battery, charger, or any accessory. If any device is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorised s ervice facility for service. Recycle Always return your used elec tronic products, batteries, and packaging materials to a dedica ted collection point. This way you help prevent uncontrolled waste disposal and promote the recycling of materials. More detailed information is available from the product retailer, local waste authorities, national producer responsibility organisations, or your local Nokia representative. Check how to recycle your Nokia products at www.nokia.com/werecycle, or if browsing on a mobile device, www.nokia.mobi/werecycle. The crossed-out wheeled-bin symbol on your product, battery, literature, or pack aging reminds you that all electrical and electronic products, batteries, and accumulators must be take n to separate collection at the end of their working life. Th is requirement applies in the European Union. D o not dispose of these produc ts as unsorted municipal waste. For more environmental information, see the product Eco-Declarations at www.nokia.com/envi ronment. Additional safety information Small children Your device and its accessories may contain small part s. Keep them out of the reach of small children. Operating environment This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used either in the normal use position agai nst the ear or when positioned at least 1.5 cent imetres (5/8 inch) away from the body. W hen a carry case, belt clip, or holder is used for body-worn operation, it should not cont ain metal an d should position the device the above-stated dis tance from your body. To transmit data files or messa ges, this device requires a quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data files or messages may be delayed until such a connection is available. En sure the above separation distance instructions are follo wed until the transmission is completed. Parts of the device are magnetic. Meta llic materials may be attracted to the device. Do no t place credit cards or other Additiona l safe ty info rmatio n é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 108
magnetic storag e media near the device, because information stored on them may be erased. Medical devices Operation of any radio transm itting equipment, including wireless phones, may interfer e with the functionality of inadequately protected medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medica l device to determine if they are adequately shielded fr om external RF energy or if you have any questions. S w i tc h o f f yo u r de v i c e i n he a l t h ca r e facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health ca re facilities may be using equipment that could be sen sit ive to external RF energy. Implanted medical devices Manufacturers of medical devices recommend that a minimum separation of 15.3 ce ntimetres (6 inches) should be maintained between a wirele ss device and an implanted medical device, such as a pacemaker or implanted cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential interference with the medical device. Pers ons who have such devices should: â Always keep the wireless device more than 15.3 centimetres (6 inches) from the medical device when the wireless device is turned on. â Not carry the wireless devi ce in a breast pocket. â Hold the wireless device to the ear opposi te the medical device to minimise the potential for in terference. â Turn the wireless device off immediately if there is any reason to suspect that interference is ta king place. â Read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of their implanted medical device. If you have any questions about using your wireless device with an implanted medical device, con sult your health care provider. Hearing aids Some digital wireless devices may interfere with some hearing aids. If interference occurs, consult your service provider. Vehicles RF signals may affect improper ly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection systems, electronic antiskid (antilock) braking syste ms, electronic spee d control systems, and air bag systems. For more information, check with the manufactur er, or it s repres entativ e, of your veh icle or any equipment that has been added. Only qualified personnel should service the device or install the device in a vehicle. Fau lty installation or service may be dangerous and may inva lidate any warranty that may apply to the device. Check regula rly that all wireless device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, ga ses, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the device, its parts, or accessories. For vehicles equipped with an air Additional safety information é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 109
bag, remember that air bags in flate with great force. Do not place objects, including inst alled or portable wireless equipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is improperly installed and the ai r bag inflates, serious injury could result. Using your device while flying in aircraft is prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an airc raft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, di srupt the wireless telephone network, and may be illegal. Potentially explosive environments Switch off your device when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere, and obey all sig ns and instructions. Potentially explosive atmosphe res include areas where you would normal ly be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such ar eas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the device at refuelling points such as near gas pumps at service stations. Observe restrictions on the us e of radio equipment in fuel depots, storage, and distribut ion areas; chemical plants; or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They include be low deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facilities and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust, or metal powders. You should check with the manufacturers of vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (suc h as propane or but ane) to determine if this device can be safely used in their vicinity. Emergency calls Important : This device operates using radio signals, wireless networks, landline networks, and user-programmed functions. If your device suppor ts voice calls over the internet (internet calls), activate both the internet calls and the cellular phone. The device wi ll attempt to make emergency calls over both the cellula r networks and through your internet call provider if both ar e activated. Conn ections in all conditions cannot be guaranteed. You should never rely solely on any wireless device for essential communica tions like medical emergencies. To make an emergency call: 1. If the device is not on, sw itch it on. Check for adequate signal streng th. Depending on your device, you may also need to complete the following: â Insert a SIM card if your device uses one. â Remove certain call restrict ions you have ac tivated in your device. â Change your profile from offline profile mode to an active profile. â If the screen and keys are locked, slide the lock switch on the side of the device to unlock them. 2. Press the end key as many ti mes as needed to clear the display and ready the device for calls. 3. Open the dialler by selecting the dialler icon ( ). Additiona l safe ty info rmatio n é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 110
4. Enter the official emergency number for your present location. Emergency numbers vary by location. 5. Press the call key. When making an emergency ca ll, give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless device may be the only means of commu nication at the scene of an accident. Do not end the call un til given permission to do so. Certification information (SAR) This mobile device meets gu idelines for expos ure to radio waves. Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio waves recommended by internati onal guidelines. These guidelines were developed by the indepe ndent scientific organisation ICNIRP and include safety margins designed to assure the protection of all persons, re gardless of age and health. The exposure guidelines for mo bile devices employ a unit of measurement known as the Specif ic Absorption Rate or SAR. The SAR limit stated i n the IC NIRP guidelines is 2.0 watts/ kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Tests for SAR are conducted using s tandard operating posit ions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The actual SAR level of an operating device can be belo w the maximu m value because the device is designed to use only the power required to reach the network. Tha t amount ch anges dep ending on a number of factors such as how close you are to a network base station. The highest SAR value under the ICNIRP guidelines for use of the device at the ear i s 0.99 W/kg. Use of device accessories may re sult in different SAR values. SAR values may vary dependin g on national reporting and testing requirements and the network ban d. Additional SAR information may be provided under product information at www.nokia.com. Additional safety information é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 111
Index A access codes 19 access points 71, 72 groups 72 accessories 96 active toolbar 58 alarm calendar note 90 alarm clock 89 answering calls 30 antennas 25 application manage r 91 settings 93 application set tings 97 application s 91 updating 93 assisted GP S (A-GPS) 61 attachments 44, 46 audio messages 43 auto-update for time/date 89 B backing up device me mory 90 battery saving p ower 20 blogs 85 Bluetooth connectivity blocking devices 78 device address 77 device visibility 76 pairing devices 77 receiving data 77 security 76 sending data 76 settings 76 turning on/off 76 bookmarks 87 browser bookmarks 87 browsing pages 84, 85 cache memory 87 downloads 86 searching content 86 security 87 toolbar 85 widgets 86 C cable connection 78 cache memory 87 calculator 94 calendar 90 toolbar 90 call log 36 call waiting 31 calls 29 answering 30 conference 30 duration of 36 missed 35 options during 29 received 35 redialling 100 rejecting 30 settings 100 video calls 32 camera flash 59 image mode 58 indicators 56 location information 5 9 options 58 recording 61 scenes 59 self-timer 59 sequence mode 60 video mode 60 capture settings in camera 5 7 cell broadcast messages 46 certificates 98 clock 89 computer connections 79 See also data connections conference calls 30 é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 112
contacts copying 41 default information 41 deleting 4 0 editing 40 images in 40 names and num bers 40 ringing tones 41 saving 40 sending 40 synchronising 75 voice t ags 40 copyright protectio n 100 D data connectio ns cable 78 device updates 97 PC connectivity 79 synchronisation 75 date and time 89 date and time settings 95 declining calls See reje cting ca lls device updat es 97 dialled numbers 35 dictiona ry 95 dismissing calls 3 0 display rotation 2 6 display setti ngs 96 double-tap 16 Download! 88 purchasing and downloading items 89 downloads 86 drag 16 DRM (digital right s managemen t) 100 duration of calls 36 E e-mail messages 45 end all calls option 31 F factory settings restoring 100 feeds, news 85 file manager 90, 91 backing up files 91 organising files 90 G gallery 54 organising 54 viewing 54 viewing images 5 4 viewing videos 54 general information 18 GPS position requests 63 GPS (Global Positioning System) 61 H headset 27 help application 18 I IAPs (internet access points) 71 inbox message 44 inbox, mess age 44 indicators and icons 22 installing applications 91 instant messagin g 48 internet co nnection 84 See also browser J Java applications 91 JME Java application support 91 K keypad lock 15 keys and parts 12 L landmarks 63 language settings 95 licences 100 Index é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 113
location inform ation 61 lock code 19 lock switch 15 locking device with SMS 28 locking the keys 15 loudspeaker 24 M mailbox e-mail 45 voice 3 0 Maps browsing 65 Favourites 67 finding locations 66 indicators 66 navigatin g 68 network positioning 65 Nokia Ma p Loader 6 8 routes 67 saved items 67 saving locations 67 sending locations 67 updating 68 maps 65 media music player 50 RealPlayer 93 media bar 17 media key 17 memory clearing 21 web cache 87 memory card backing up files 91 editing 91 menu 16 message s e-mail 45 folders for 42 icon for incoming 44 multimedia 44 settings 47 voice 30 Mini Map 85 MMS (multimedia message service) 43, 44 multimedia messages 43, 44 music p layer 50 playlists 5 1 transferring music 51 muting sound 30 N navigation tools 6 1 network settings 69 news feeds 85 Nokia Care 18 Nokia Map Loader 68 Nokia Music Store 52 notes 94 notification light 100 O offline profil e 26 outbox, m essage 43 P packet data connection access point settings 73 counters 36 settings 79 page overview 85 personal certif icates 98 personalisat ion 49 photos See camera PIN code 19 PIN2 code 19 podcasting downloads 53 settings 52 positionin g information 61 positionin g settings 64 presentations, m ultimedia 44 profiles 49 offline restrictions 26 proximity sensor 29 proxy settings 73 PUK codes 19 Index é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 114
R radio listening 53 stations 54 RealPlayer 93 recording settings in camera 5 7 recording vi deo clips 60 rejecting calls 30 remote lock See locking device with SMS remote mailbox 45 remote SIM mode 78 removing applications 92 removing SIM card 27 roaming 69 S scenes image and video 5 9 searching 88 security certificates 98 web browser 87 WEP 74 WPA 74 security code 19 security module 99 select 16 self-tim er camera 59 sensors 26 sent messages folder 43 service commands 47 service mes sages 45 settings 57, 95, 96 access point name control 79 access points 72 applications 97 Bluetooth connectivity 76 call barring 101 call divert 101 calls 100 certificates 98 date and time 95 display 96 language 95 network 69 packet data 79 packet data access poin ts 73 podcasting 52 positioning 64 SIP 79 tv-out 97 video centre 83 video sharing 34 WLAN 71, 74 WLAN internet access points 73 Share online 80 accounts 80 activating services 80 creating posts 81 posting 81 subscribing 80 shared video 33 shooting modes camera 59 SIM card 27 inserting 13 messages 46 SIM card security 97 SIP 79 SMS (short message service) 43 software applications 91 software updat e 19 songs 50 speakerphone 24 speed di alling 30 stylus 15 swipe 16 Symbian applicat ions 91 synchronisation of dat a 75 T tap 16 text messages receiving and reading 44 replying to 44 sending 43 settings 47 SIM messages 46 themes 49 time and date 89 transferring content 21 Index é 2008 Nok ia. All rig hts reserved . 115
troubleshootin g 102 TV configuration 97 tv-out mode 55 U UPIN code 19 UPUK code 19 USB cable connection 78 useful information 18 V video ca lls 32, 33 options during 32 Video Centre 81 video centre downloading 82 my videos 83 transferring videos 83 video feeds 82 viewing 82 video clips shared 33 video sharin g accepting in vitation 35 requirements 33 sharing live v ideo 34 sharing v ideo clips 34 voice applications 96 voice calls See calls voice commands 31, 96 volume cont rols 24 W wallpaper 49 web connection 84 web logs 85 week settings calendar alarm 90 Welcome 21 WEP 74 widgets 86 wireless LAN (WLAN) 70 wireless LAN settings 71 WPA 7 4 wrist strap 28 Z zooming 58, 60 Index é 2008 Nok ia. All righ ts reserved. 116